No.! SUPPLEMENT GENERAL NORTH EASTERN

Transcription

For the information and guidance o f
Railway Officers and Railway Staff only
7
B•ITISH R A I LWAY S
North Eastern Operating Area
No.!
SUPPLEMENT
TO
GENERAL
AND
NORTH EASTERN OPERATING AREA
SECTIONAL APPENDICES
(THE ALTE RATI O NS A N D ADDI TI O NS S H O W N
HEREIN M U S T B E M A D E T O T H E G E NE RAL
AND S E CTIONAL APPENDICES I N FORCE F RO M
1st NOVEMBER, 1947)
(Includes alterations and additions up to and including those contained in July, 1955,
General Notices Programme.)
YORK
AUGUST, 1955
A. P. H U N T E R
CHIEF OPERATING SUPERINTENDENT
e,c)v•
1
GENERAL A P P E N D I X /
•
PAGE iii I N D E X .
P
a
g
e
AD D :— Br eakdow n Cranes . . . . . . . .
9
6
British Railway Standard Coaching Stock • r ohi bi ti ons and Restrictions . . .
6
7
Clearances, W ar ning t o Staff . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
8
9
Coaching Stock, B.R. Standard—Pro m o n s and Restrictions
6
7
Conveyance of Explosives n d Dange u s Goods . . .
7
5
PAGE i v A D D : —
Defective Signals and P i nts.
8
3
Examinations of F r ei ghtI
Fully Fitted .Fr eight
7
3
. . Trains. S i de Lights
DELETE:--- n s
5
Engines Coupled Together . . .
5
7
0
PAGE v A D D : —
57
Hauling of Dead Locomotives owned by British Railways
89
Limited Clearances. W ar ni ng t o Staff
54
Locking of Corridor and Gangway Doors on Passenger Trains
57
Locomotives i n Steam Coupled Together
PAGE vi A D D : —
•
Regulations i n Regard t o t he Acceptance and Conveyance o f Privately Owned
Locomotives and Travelling Cranes Running on thei r ow n wheels
1
1
0
PAGE vi i A D D : —
Side Lights on Freight Trains
7
3
AM EN D :—
Shields, Vestibule
to r ead:—
Shields, Gangway.
PAGE viii A M E N D : —
Wagons containing L.N.E.R. Company's Fuel.
to r ead:—
Wagons Containing Fuel for Railway, Docks and Hotel use Stopped for Repairs.
PAGE viii A D D : —
W orking o f Cranes i n C onnecti on w i t h Mishaps o r Engineer ing Oper ations.
Protection o f Trains on Adjoining Lines
8
7
Working o f Fixed Signals at diverging points
8
6
PAGE 18.
GENERAL R EGU L A T ION S F OR W O R K I N G T H E V A C U U M BRAKE.
AM EN D Clause 1 (C) t o read:—
PA IN T IN G O F V A C U U M BRAKED A N D V A C U U M PIPED F R EIGH T VEH IC L ES.
In futur e the bodies of vacuum " fi tted" and vacuum " pi ped" freight vehicles (except Insulated and Service vehicles)
will be painted r ed. T o enable staff to distinguish between " ful l y fi tted" and "pi ped onl y" vehicles the colours of the
vacuum tr ain pipes will be as under:—
"Fi tted" vehicles—stand pipes r ed.
"Piped" vehicles—stand pipes white.
PAGE 21.
GA U GE C OC K S A N D E N G I N E L EA K DISCS.
Stations.
Carriage Sidings and Marshalling Yards.
DELETE:—
York (Marshalling Yard).
York (Warehouse Yard).
York (Yard N or th) .
Leeds (Armley Bridge).
South Stockton (Goods).
Middlesbrough (Goods).
INSERT:—
Middlesbrough
Hull ( Ol d Inward Yar d) .
North Stockton (Marshalling Yard).
Filey Holiday Camp
Bridlington
York (Skelton N ew Yard).
York (Severus).
York ( No. 2 U p Goods).
York (Dringhouses Down).
York ( N or th Junction).
York (Warehouse Yard).
Leeds (Hunslet).
Darlington (Bank Top Yard).
PAGE 22.
The hand signal indicating the vacuum is required to be destroyed is abolished.
Clause 8 (b ) note (i i ).
AM EN D t o r ead:—
(ii) The intimation to the Driver to create the vacuum must be given either verbally or by hand signal as follows:—
To create by Day: Ar m moved vertically up and dow n above shoulder level. ( See Diagram 1.)
To create by Night: Red l i ght moved vertically up and dow n above shoulder level.
DELETE Diagram 2.
PAGES 33/34.
DELETE:—
Existing Instructions headed "CONVEYANCE OF FOUR-WHEELED NON-PASSENGER-CARRYING COACHING
STOCK AN D BRAKED FREIGHT STOCK IN PASSENGER TRAINS",
and
"CONVEYANCE O F FOUR-WHEELED NON-PASSENGER-CARRYING C OAC H IN G ST OC K A N D BR AKED
FREIGHT STOCK IN EMPTY COACHING STOCK AN D PARCELS, ETC., TRAINS."
A
2
G E NE RAL AP P E NDI X c ont i nue d.
INSERT:—
C ON VEYA N C E O F F OU R - W H EEL ED N ON - PA SSEN GER - C A R R YIN G C O A C H I N G ST OC K
A N D BRAKED F R EIGH T ST OC K I N PA SSEN GER T R A IN S.
General.
1. Four - w heel ed vehicles, ei ther non-passenger-carrying Coaching Stock or Braked Fr eight Stock, r equir ing t o r un
in passenger trains must comply w i th the following requirements:—
(a) O i l axle boxes.
*(b) Autom ati c br ake or thr ough pipes.
(c) Scr ew couplings and l ong buffers.
(d) A minimum tare weight of 6 tons. ( The minimum tar e weight of 6 tons does not apply to Container wagons
when such wagons are carrying containers ei ther loaded or empty and the total load, i.e., tar e weight of
wagon plus weight of container is 6 tons or over).
Four-wheeled vehicles conforming to the above requirements and having a wheelbase of 10 ft. or over are marked
" X.P." together with the wheelbase.
The ter m "non-passenger-carrying Coaching Stock" refers t o stock not constructed for conveying passengers but
includes Horse Boxes and Cattle Boxes.
*Note.—This requirement does not m odify the author i ty (where given) t o attach at the extreme r ear one
vehicle not conveying passengers and not fi tted w i th the continuous br ake or thr ough pipe. ( See
instructions headed "Continuous Brakes on Passenger trains".)
When a four-wheeled vehicle is attached to a passenger train next to a bogie vehicle the screw coupling of the fourwheeled vehicle must be used and must be screwed up tightly. Instanter couplings must not be used f or attaching
vehicles to a passenger train and the emergency screw coupling or screw coupling of the adjacent vehicle must be used.
Four-wheeled vehicle marked " X.P." and having a wheelbase of 15 ft. or over may be attached to passenger trains
without restriction, unless otherwise specially pr ohibited.
2. ( a ) Passenger trains conveying vehicles w i th a wheelbase of less than 15 ft. must not exceed a speed of 60 m .p.h.
at any poi nt. I n every case where four-wheeled vehicles of less than 15 ft. wheelbase are marshalled i n the train the
Guard must advise the Driver before starting so that the speed of 60 m.p.h. may not be exceeded at any point when
such vehicle is, or vehicles are, attached to the trains. T he note "tcp" in the W.T.T. indicates those trains on which
the conveyance of four-wheeled vehicles of less than 15 ft. wheelbase is pr ohibited.
Note.—The instructions contained in this Clause 2 (a) do not apply to " LN ER " Horse Boxes w i th a 14
wheelbase which ar e lettered " M ay r un at speeds exceeding 60 m.p.h. on " LN ER " onl y" .
(b) Four-wheeled vehicles with a wheelbase of less than 10 ft. must not be conveyed on Express Passenger Trains.
3. Four - w heel ed vehicles with a wheelbase of under 15 ft. should as a general rule be marshalled at the back of passenger
trains and at the rear of all bogie vehicles. W her e this is impracticable in the interests of traffic working, they may
be marshalled as shown below:—
(I) N ex t engine.
(ii) Between bogie lion-passenger-carrying vehicles and/or bogie passenger coaches not conveying passengers
when these are placed behind the last vehicle conveying passengers.
(iii) According t o destination when conveying Theatrical, Naval, Military or Ai r Force traffic when formed i n
trains composed entirely of such traffic.
4. F our - w heel ed vehicles should not be placed next to the engine during the period when steam heating is in operation,
unless the vehicle or vehicles are fitted w i th steam pipes.
5. F o u r and six-wheeled vehicles may be intermixed provided they are all marshalled at the fr ont of all bogi e vehicles
or behind all bogie vehicles.
C ON VEYA N C E O F F OU R - W H EEL ED N ON - PA SSEN GER - C A R R YIN G C O A C H I N G ST OC K
A N D BRAKED F R EIGH T ST OC K I N EM PT Y C O A C H I N G ST OC K A N D PARCELS, ETC ., T R A IN S.
Any tr ain ( other than Passenger) composed of coaching stock, i.e., empty coaching stock train, parcels tr ain, newspaper tr ain, milk train, horse-box train, pigeon train, fish, meat, fr ui t, or perishable train conveying one or more fourwheeled vehicles of less than 15 ft. wheelbase must not exceed 60 m.p.h. at any point. I n every case where four-wheeled
vehicles of less than 15 ft. wheelbase are marshalled on the train, the Guard must advise the D r i ver before starting, so
that the speed of 60 m.p.h. may not be exceeded at any point while such vehicle is, or vehicles are, attached to the train.
This instruction does not apply to " LN ER " Horse Boxes w i th a 14 ft. wheelbase which ar e letter ed " M ay r un at
speeds exceeding 60 m.p.h. on ' LN ER " onl y" .
" B U C K EYE" A U T O M A T I C C OU PL ER S A N D PU L L M A N VEST IB U L ES F IT T ED T O L.N .E.R . ST OC K .
PAGE 35. W A R N I N G .
INSERT additional paragraph:—
When a vehicle is detached f ro m a t rain t h e coupler head should b e dropped immed iat ely and t h e
buffers placed in t h e "Long" position.
PAGE 36. C l au se 2.— C OU PL IN G IN ST R U C T ION S.
INSERT:—
(c) W H EN COUPLING A VEHICLE FITTED W IT H INSTANTER COUPLINGS T O A VEHICLE FITTED W IT H
AUTOMATIC COUPLERS, the Instanter coupling must not be used.
If a loose screw coupling is available, this must be used i n accordance w i th Clause 2(b).
If a loose screw coupling is not available the emergency screw coupling must be used as i n the case of a broken or
defective screw coupling, telegraphic advice being sent, as provided in Clause 5, to the station where the Instanter fitted
vehicle will be detached.
Clause 3. — U N C O U PL I N G I N ST R U C T I O N S.
IN SER T between 3r d and 4th paragraphs:—
When the necessary gap between the vehicles has been made the Shunter must exhibit a hand danger signal to the
Driver to indicate that he wishes to proceed between the vehicles and he must obtain an acknowledgement of this hand
signal wor king i n close co-operation w i th the Driver before going between the vehicles.
PAGE 42.
STEAM H E A T I N G O F PA SSEN GER T R A IN S.
DELETE paragraphs headed Commencement and Discontinuance and IN SER T :—
The following dates are those which normally must be followed in the application and discontinuance of steam heating
for passenger trains:—
Commencing
D
a
t
e
.
(i) Al l steam heater pipes to be fitted and coupled for use by
2
5
t
h
August.
(ii) H eat t o be applied:—
sleeping car trains
l
i
s
t
September.
Other express trains while r unning after 5.0 p.m. and befor e 10.0 a.m.
All other passenger trains
1
s
t
October .
3 )
G E NE RAL AP P E N( DI X - - ,
tinued.
Discontinuance.
(i) H eat to be discontinued:—
Al! tr ains except as shown bel ow
1st May.
Sleeping car trains
Other express trains while r unning a
0 p.m. and befor e 10.0 am . 1
Trains
r unni ng N or th of Inverness
.
- 15th June.
(ii) Pipes t o be removed as soot: as possible after
fi er 5 :
1 but guards and other s
The foregoing dates for the application of steam heating are to be regarded as a general guide
concerned m ust use
- thei r discretion i n the event of unusual climatic conditions.
5
PAGE 44.
.
.
t
APPLIANCES CARRIED O N T R A IN S F OR U SE I N C A SE O F A C C ID EN T O R OT H ER EM ER GEN C Y,
h
A N D D IR EC T ION S F OR T H EIR U SE.
AD D t o paragraph 2:—
J
In the case of British Railways standard stock, fir e extinguishers are provided i n all cor r idor
u vehicles.
PAGE 45.
n
CLAUSE 7.—SPARE A M B U L A N C E B O X E S I N T H E C U ST O D Y O F T H E SU PER IN T EN D EN T ' S
e
STAFF: N O R T H EA ST ER N A R EA .
INSERT under above heading:—
.
"Nor thaller ton".
SPEEDS O F F R EIGH T R OL L IN G ST OC K .
Type of Vehicle
Average star t t o stop.
Speed not t o exceed
Loaded
Remarks
Empty
PAGE 49.
DELETE I t em I an d IN SER T : —
1. W agon stock fi tted w i th screw couplings
or ' Ins tanter " couplings, vacuum br ake
and i n accordance w i t h coaching stock
requirements as shown in N ote (h) below.
AM EN D 3 t o r ead:—
3. Machine, Bolster or Special wagons when
load unequal l y di str i buted and bol ster
wagons w hen l oad i s on thr ee o r m or e
vehicles.
DELETE:—
7. C r i ppl ed wagons or condemned wagons
9. N ew and newly lifted wagons
May be attached t o any fr ei ght tr ain.
Includes tank wagons w i th t w o o r
three stars.
Maximum
32 m .p.h.
25
Guards t o advise Drivers w hen thei r
trains include traffic of this nature.
20
25
PAGE 50.
(j) T A N K W A G O N S .
AM EN D thi r d paragraph t o r ead:—
Wagons carrying thr ee stars may be conveyed on Braked Freight or Passenger trains; wagons carrying tw o stars
may be conveyed on Braked Freight trains, but wagons carrying one star and Continental tank wagons marked " R .I.V."
must be conveyed only on Freight trains which do not exceed an average speed of 35 m.p.h. from start to stop. W agons
not starred must not exceed an average speed of 25 m.p.h., when loaded, or 35 m.p.h. when empty.
INSERT immediat ely preceding instructions in regard t o "Express Freight Trains" .
E X A M I N A T I O N O F F R EIGH T T R A IN S B Y C . & W . STAFF.
Unless specially authorised, freight trains may not be r un w i thout examination for longer distances than those in the
list below:—
Maximum Distance
between C . & W .
Description o f Train.
examination.
Miles.
Class C , Freight and Fish
160
Class D , Freight
125
125*
Class E, Freight (braked and unbraked)
..• ••• •••
85
Class F, H , J and K (except empty wagon trains)
Empty wagon trains
125*
* If such trains are conveying any wagons fi tted w i th grease axle boxes, maximum distance must not
exceed 85 miles, unless specially authorised.
EXPRESS F R EIGH T T R A IN S.
No. I Express Goods ( now Class C Freight).
AM EN D Conditions t o read as follows:—
Must be composed of vehicles conforming t o coaching stock requirements as shown above. W agons fi tted w i th
"Instanter " couplings which conform in other respects to coaching stock requirements, may be conveyed on these trains.
(See also instructions regarding "Instanter " couplings.)
Brake Vans for use on the above trains except Parcels and Fish tr ai ns must be either braked or piped-and-gauged
only. Fr ei ght Brake vans used on Parcels or Fish trains must be fully braked.
PAGE 51.
No. 2 Express Goods ( now Class D ) .
AM EN D fi r st sentence of Conditions t o r ead:- Must be composed of vehicles conforming t o coaching stock requirements as shown on Page 50 or wagon stock
fitted w i th thr ee l i nk couplings (including " Instanter " couplings), oi l axle boxes and springs, secured by one of the
methods shown i n item 2 of Coaching Stock Requirements on Page 50, and per m itted t o r un at an average speed of
40 m.p.h. or over. ( See instructions regarding " Instanter " couplings.)
GENERAL APPENDIX—continued.
PAGE 54.
EQ U I PM EN T F OR GU A R D S A N D BRAKE VA N S.
AM EN D the final paragraph t o r ead:—
2 Sprags.
1
Shovel.
1 C oupl i ng stick.
S e c u r i n g
Lock for Equipment Locker.
1 Br ake stick.
2
Side lamps.
1 Br ush ( long handle).
1
Tail lamp.
L OC K IN G O F VEST IB U L E A N D C OR R ID OR D O O R S.
DELETE existing instructions headed as above and IN SER T:—
L OC K IN G O F C OR R ID OR A N D G A N G W A Y D OOR S.
Corridor and gangway doors should be left unlocked so as to provide free access thr ough the train, except as shown
below:—
1. Gangw ay doors to the extreme ends of the train. C ar e must be taken to ensure that when vehicles are detached
from a train en r oute the gangway doors at the poi nt of detachment are locked.
2. B r a k e Vans or Luggage Vans at the extreme ends of the train. W her e, however, a Guard is riding i n the van
or i t is empty, the doors should be unlocked. Should the Guard have occasion to leave his van whilst the train
is i n m otion he must lock the door .
3. B r a k e Vans or Luggage Vans intermediate in the train. Where, however, there is a refreshment car on the train
or a Guard is riding i n the van or the latter is empty, the doors should be unlocked.
4. W h e r e the gangway connections cannot be made.
5. T h e gangway doors at both ends of sleeping car accommodation on trains. W her e, however, i t is necessary to
admit passengers to their berths or to give access to a refreshment car during the time the refreshment service
operates the doors should be unlocked.
In laying down the marshalling of trains, arrangements should be made, i f possible, t o avoid a passenger carrying
vehicle being isolated from the remainder of the train by being marshalled between the brake van in which a Guard is not
riding, and the sleeping car accommodation.
In cases where, i n the interests of the working, this is not desirable, the door leading to the sleeping car must be
left unlocked.
The Guard will be responsible for carrying out these instructions, but Travelling Ticket Staff, where provided, should
assist. I n the case of sleeping cars, the Sleeping Car Attendant will be responsible.
Pullman cars are not equipped w i th door s leading to the gangways at the extreme ends of the coaches, and such
vehicles must only be utilised i n the sets to which they are specially allocated.
Except in emergency, Pullman cars (apart from brake thirds) must not be marshalled nex t to the engine or on the
extreme rear of the train, next to a vehicle equipped with a British Standard gangway, but not fitted with Pullman adaptors,
or nex t to non-gangway stock.
If there is no alternative to marshalling the vehicles in one of these positions, and in all instances when the gangway
connection is inter r upted owing to defect or other cause, i t is imperative that a sound gangway shield should be affixed
to the end ( or ends) of the Pullman car concerned.
M A R SH A LLIN G O F PA SSEN GER T R A IN S.
A M E N D existing instructions headed as above to read as follows:—
A brake van or vehicle with brake compartment leading should, as far as practicable, be marshalled next the engine
of all passenger trains, except where the formation is otherwise specified in the Carriage W or king Instructions, or delay
will be caused at starting points; similarly a brake van or vehicle w i th br ake compartments trailing should, as far as
practicable, be marshalled at the rear of passenger trains.
W hen passenger carrying vehicles are attached en route to either the front or rear of a train, they should be marshalled
within the brake van wher e this can be done w i thout causing delay to the working.
PAGE 55.
M A R SH A LLIN G O F H I G H SID E GIR D ER SETS C O N V E Y I N G TR A N SFOR M ER S.
DELETE existing instructions and IN SER T :—
High Side gir der sets conveying transformers must be marshalled at the rear of freight trains subject to:—
(I) t h e num ber o f wagons between the engine and the load not exceeding the equivalent of 45 or dinar y goods
wagons i n l ength, and
(ii) i f , i n the opinion of the Inspector passing the load, the oscillation is such that the stability of the load will be
jeopardised, then wor king by special tr ai n must be arranged.
PAGES 56 A N D 57.
IN ST A N T ER C OU PL IN GS.
A number of vehicles are fi tted w i th instanter couplings, which can be in ei ther of tw o positions, as shown in the
diagrams on page 56, viz:—
(I) S hor t position.
(11) L o n g position.
Such vehicles may be attached t o trains as shown below:—
(a) T rain s conveying Passengers.
One vehicle only, fi tted w i th instanter couplings, may be attached t o trains conveying passengers, provided i t
conforms i n other respects t o Coaching Stock requirements and subject also t o the instructions r elative t o the
conveyance of four-wheeled vehicles on passenger trains. I n such circumstances the screw couplings of the adjacent
vehicles must be used. This does not modify the author ity (where given) to attach at the extreme rear one vehicle
not conveying passengers and not fitted w i th the continuous brake or thr ough pipe.
(b) Coaching St ock t rains not conveying Passengers.
Vehicles fi tted w i th instanter couplings and conforming t o coaching stock requirements may be conveyed i n
trains composed of coaching stock, other than those conveying passengers, but the screw couplings of the vehicles
on each side of the instanter fitted vehicle must be used. W hen tw o or more vehicles fitted with instanter couplings
are marshalled together i n such trains the screw couplings of the vehicles on each side of the instanter coupled
vehicles must be used and the instanter coupling, or couplings, i n use, must be in the shor t position.
The instructions respecting the conveyance of four-wheeled vehicles will apply i n respect of the r unni ng of
instanter fi tted vehicles on em pty coaching stock trains.
(c) F reig h t Trains.
The couplings must be in the Long position dur ing shunting operations, and also when used i n ordinary freight
trains except w hen t he vehicles ar e conveying cattl e w hen t he couplings of the cattle wagons must be i n the
Short position.
5
Vehicles with instanter couplings can be used i n fi tted fr eight trains In excatly the same way as screw coupled
vehicles, but when used in the fitted por tion of the train the screw coupling of the adjacent vehicle or vehicles should
be used i f possible. I f this is not possible the instanter coupling must be In the Short position.
Under no circumstances must an instanter coupling be used for attaching to vehicles fitted with the Buck-eye coupling
and a screw coupling must be used.
PAGE 57.
EN GIN ES C O U PLED T OGET H ER .
DELETE heading and existing instructions and IN SER T :—
H A U L I N G O F " D E A D " LO C O M O T I V E S O W N E D B Y BR IT ISH R AI LW AYS.
(Excluding depart ment al " Service" locomotives.)
Whenever i t is necessary for " dead" locomotives t o be hauled on thei r ow n wheels fr om one place t o another
the following instructions m ust be carried out:—
The ter m " dead locom otive" means:—
Steam Locom otive—Not i n steam and w i thout fir e.
Diesel Locom otive—Not capable of movement under its ow n power .
Electric Locomotive—Not capable of movement under i ts ow n pow er .
PROCEDURE.
Movement.
(a) N o t m or e than fi ve locomotives, including the hauling locomotives, m ust be r un coupled together . W h e n
more than 2 locomotives, including the hauling locomotive, ar e required t o r un coupled together , the assent
of the Chief Civil Engineers concerned must be obtained.
Steam Locomotives.—Except for short distances (not exceeding 25 miles):—
Must have connecting rods removed and piston crossheads secured against movement and suitable bushes t o be
fitted t o the driving crank pins to prevent side movement of the coupling rods. The piston valve spindle must
be disconnected and securely fastened in a forward position clear of the movement of the valve crossheads.
Diesel Elect ric Shunting Locomotives.
Locomotives fitted with Jackshaft—must have Jackshaft and side coupling rods removed.
Locomotives not fitted with J ackshaft—side coupling rods left in position but traction motor gears demeshed.
Diesel M echanical Shunting Locomotives.
Connecting rods from Jackshaft to be removed, and suitable bushes to be fi tted t o the driving crank pins t o
prevent side movement of the coupling rods.
Diesel M echanical M ain Line Locomotives.
(i) Ens ur e that the gearbox oil level is up t o maximum height.
(ii) S e t the ganged vacuum contr ol isolating cocks at both ends t o the off position.
(iii) S e t the test cock at each end open t o atmosphere.
(iv) S e t both vacuum br ake valves t o neutr al.
(Diesel Electric Main Li ne and Gas Tur bo Locomotives r equir e no special preparation for movement In
this connection.)
Electric Locomotives.
(I) W h e n being hauled outside an electrified area, pantograph or collector shoes must be removed or secured.
(ii) Pr ecauti ons must be taken to ensure that ther e are no circulating currents in the traction motors.
(iii) Br ushes to be taken out of the traction motors for hauls exceeding 25 miles.
(c) I n cases wher e the automatic br ake can be coupled, this should be done.
(d) W hen more than one locomotive is being used t o haul " dead" locomotives, the locomotives hauling must be
marshalled i n fr ont of the " dead" locomotives.
(e) " D ead" locomotives must not be hauled at a speed exceeding 25 miles per hour , and all instructions regarding
the use of spacing wagons, and speed restrictions (permanent way and particular types of locomotives) m or e
severe than 25 miles per hour must be observed.
(f) " D e a d " tender locomotives must not be conveyed on freight trains (see Clause (h) (I) for movement of " dead"
tender locomotives w i th defective hand brake).
(g) " D e a d " tank locomotives may be conveyed on fr eight trains subject to the following:—
(i) N o t m or e than one per tr ai n.
(ii) I t should normally be marshalled next to the hauling locomotive i f its w ei ght is 20 tons or over. I f below
20 tons, i t should normally be marshalled next to and w i thi n the guard's van.
(iii) T h e locomotive must be prepared i n accordance w i th ( b) above.
(iv) T h e speed of the train must be regulated to comply with Clause (e). In every case where a " dead" locomotive
is marshalled in a freight train, the Guard must advise the Driver before starting so that the speed of 25 m.p.h.
may not be exceeded at any time such a locomotive is on the train.
Manning of " D ead " Locomotives.
(h) " R i der s " m ust be provided for " dead" locomotives i n accordance w i th the following:—
(i) W h e n only one is being hauled, a " r i der " must travel on the footplate to operate the hand brake; if the hand
brake is defective, a fr eight brake van must be attached and a guard provided, i n which case ther e is no
necessity t o pr ovide a " r i der " .
(ii) W h e n tw o " dead" locomotives are being hauled, one " r i der " must be provided and he must travel on the
last locomotive, the hand br ake of which m ust be effective.
(iii) W h e n thr ee " dead" locomotives ar e being hauled, " r i der s " must be provided t o r ide on the last tw o,
the hand brakes of which must be effective.
(iv) Wlocomotives,
h e n four locomotives
ar e being
hauled
" dead"
' " r i der s " must be provided on the second and four th
the hand brakes
of which
m ust
be effective.
N ote.—"R i der s" m ust be Motive Power Department men com petent t o operate the hand br ake of the
locomotive on which they r ide, and com petent to carry out the necessary rules for the pr otection of a
train. T hey must be in possession of 12 detonators, tw o red flags and a hand lamp.
These instructions cancel all existing instructions relating to the hauling of " dead" Railway-owned locomotives.
Instructions as t o conveyance of privately-owned locomotives remain as shown i n the Appendix Instructions.
L OC OM OT IVES Ilsr: STEAM C OU PL ED T OGET H ER .
Except wher e otherwise authorised or modified, not more than five locomotives t o be r un coupled together .
6
Page 58.
E X T I N G U I S H I N G SID E L IGH T S O F FREIG T T R A IN S ST A N D IN G I N R EC EPT ION L IN ES.
DELETE. R u le 121 applies.
PAGE 60.
EN GIN ES FITTED W I T H ELECTRIC H EA D LAMPS. ( FOR M ER LY " EN GIN E H EA D A N D TA IL LAMPS").
DELETE. R u le 124 applies.
STANDARD C OD E O F E N G I N E H EA D L A M PS O R DISCS.
DELETE existing instructions and IN SER T : —
Unless otherwise shown in the Sectional Appendices all engines must carry headlamps or white discs as described'
below.
Each tr ain will be signalled and take precedence in accordance w i th the engine headlamps or discs, except where
instructions are issued t o the contrary, and Drivers will be responsible for seeing that the pr oper head code is carried.
Where discs are not provided, unlighted lamps are to be carried in the prescribed position in the daytime.
Guards must instr uct Drivers to alter thei r headlamps or discs when any change i n the classification of a tr ai t is
necessary.
Classification.
Engine Headcode
(white lights or
discs.)
A
B
Description of Train.
Express passenger tr ain, or newspaper train, or breakdown van tr ain or snow plough
going to clear the line, or light engine going to assist disabled train.
Officers' Special tr ai n not r equir ing t o stop i n section.
...M r
Ordinary passenger tr ain, o r m ixed tr ai n, o r breakdown van tr ai n N O T goi ng t o
clear the line, or loaded r ail m otor tr ain.
* Branch passenger tr ain.
r
Parcels, fish, fr ui t, horse, livestock, meat, milk, pigeon or perishable tr ain composed
entirely of vehicles conforming t o coaching stock requirements.
Express freight, livestock, perishable or ballast train, pipe fitted thr oughout w i th the
automatic brake operative on not less than hal f of the vehicles.
Empty coaching stock tr ai n ( not specially authorised t o car r y " A " headcode) o r
empty r ai l m otor tr ain.
0
D
Express freight, livestock, perishable or ballast train, partly fitted, with the automatic
brake operative on not less than one thi r d of the vehicles.
E
Express freight, livestock, perishable or ballast train, par tly fitted, w i th not less than
four braked vehicles connected by vacuum pipe to the engine.
Express fr eight, livestock, perishable or ballast tr ain w i th a limited load of vehicles
NOT fi tted w i th continuous brake.
j
0
F
Express fr eight, livestock, perishable or ballast tr ai n N O T fi tted w i th continuous
brake.
•
G
Light engine or l i ght engines coupled.
Engine w i th not m or e than t w o br ake vans.
H
Through fr ei ght or ballast tr ai n n o t r unni ng under class " C " , " D " . " E " o r " F "
headcode.
7
GENERAL APPENDIX ç nti nue d.
Classification.
Engine Headcode
(white lights or
discs.)
Description of Train.
Mineral o r em pty wagon tr ai n.
Freight, mineral or ballast train stopping at intermediate stations.
* Branch fr ei ght tr ain.
Freight, ballast or Officer's' Special tr ai n, requiring t o stop i n section.
*T o be used only where authorised by the Chief Operating Superintendent.
The ter m "Fr ei ght Tr ai n" applies t o loaded Goods or Mineral or Empty W agon tr ain.
The following shows briefly the former " LN E" classification as related to the corresponding new standards:—
"LNE" Class.
N
E
W
Class.
Express Passenger Train
Ordinary (or stopping) Passenger Train...
No. 1 Express Goods, etc., Train
(also includes
ECS trains)
No. 2 Express Goods, etc., Train
No. 3 Express Goods Braked Train
No. 3 Express Goods Unbraked Train
F
Class " A " Goods, etc., Train
Light Engine
Class " B " Goods, etc., Train
Class " C " Goods, etc., Train
Class " D " Goods, etc., Train
1
NOTE—Where trains are referred to in the Appendix or other special instructions by the descriptions formerly in use such
instructions must be interpreted in accordance with the new classification.
The term Rail Motor train in the new classification " B " and " C " includes Push and Pull trains and Steam Coaches but does
not Include Engineer's Roll Motors or Velocipede Cars.
The special Codes of Engine Headlamps and Discs shown on pages 250-252 of the Sectional Appendix will remain unaltered.
(See also page 98 herein).
PAGE 61.
D U TIES O F E N G I N E C O N D U C T O R .
AM EN D existing instructions t o r ead:—
If a Driver, a Passed Fireman acting as a Driver, or Motorman is not thor oughly acquainted w i th any por tion of the
line over which he has to r un, he must obtain the services of a competent Conductor.
When the Conductor is familiar with the type of engine employed, he must w or k the engine.
When the Conductor is not familiar with the type of engine employed, he will give to the train Driver the necessary
Instructions in regard to the signals, curves, gradients, speed restrictions, etc., applicable to the line over which they are
working, and leave the actual driving entirely in the hands of the train Driver.
The Conductor will be responsible for the due observance of signals, speed restrictions, etc., and safe working of the
train.
In every case the tr ain Driver must study the signals, speed restrictions, etc., for that par t of the line over which
he is being conducted.
The Conductor will be responsible in cases where it is necessary for the Fireman to carry out the provisions of Rule 55,
or seeing that this is done.
SPEED L IM IT S A N D SPEED R EST R IC T ION S O N R U N N I N G L IN ES.
IN SER T as additional clause:—
W OR K IN G O F L O C O M O T I VES W I T H T EN D ER L EA D IN G.
Tender locomotives must not exceed a speed of 45 m.p.h. when running with the tender leading, either when attached
to a tr ain or when r unni ng light.
RESTRICTIONS O N E X L .N .E.R . C O A C H I N G S T O C K W O R K I N G O V E R
E X L .N .E.R . PA SSEN GER L IN ES.
PAGE 63.
Section C. R es tr i c ti ons on L.N .E.R . Stock over specified Br anch lines.
DELETE Clause ( d) .
PAGE 64.
Restriction I . S o u t h e r n Ar ea.
DELETE entr y relating to W itham U p Back Platform.
Scottish Ar ea.
DELETE entr y r el ati ng t o Abbeyhill Stati on.
8
PAGE 65.
R ESTR IC TION 3.
Branch or Place.
Nature of Restriction.
Locality of Restriction.
North East ern Operat ing A rea.
INSERT:—
Durham and Bishop
Bishop Auckland
Auckland.
Down D i r ec ti on. I f travelling on N o. 2 Platform l i ne—
Down Mineral line to be clear and vice versa.
U p D i r ec ti on. I f travelling on N o. 3 Platform line—Up
Mineral line t o be clear and vice versa.
PAGE 66.
R ESTR IC TION 7.
Vehicles marked "Restriction 7 " must not be allowed t o w or k to the Scottish Region, the Eastern Section of the
Eastern Region, and the following sections of the N or th Eastern Region:—
Riccarton-Hexham.
Reedsmouth-Scotsgap.
Rothbury-Morpeth.
R ESTR IC TION 10.
INSERT:—
Vehicles marked Restriction 10 are also subject to t he restrictions shown below:—
Branch o r Place.
W hitby
Nature of Restriction.
Locality of Restriction.
W hitby Station
If standing on N o. 3 platform line, N o. 4 to be clear and vice
versa.
PAGE 67.
INSERT:—
BRITISH R A IL W A YS ST A N D A R D C O A C H I N G ST OC K .— PR OH IB IT ION S A N D R EST R IC T ION S O N
STOCK W I T H A L EN GT H OVER H EA D STOC K S N O T EXC EED IN G 57 FEET W I T H B O G I E CENTRES
OF 41 F EET .
Lines Totally Prohibited.
London Midland Region.
Maryport (excl.) t o Carlisle Line.
Through Whitehaven Tunnel and i nto Whitehaven
Bransby Station.
Buckley and Connah's Quay Branch.
Eastern Region.
Nil.
Southern Region.
Tonbridge to Battle via Robertsbridge
Isle of Wight Lines.
Lines over which Restrictions are to be Observed.
The adjoining lines t o be blocked thr ough Hampstead
Heath Tunnel.
Nil.
Weymouth Tramway.
Scottish Region.
Nil.
W ester n R egi on.
Highworth Branch.
Culm Valley Branch
Looe Branch.
Liskeard—Looe Line.
North Roskear Branch.
Trenance Branch.
Keyham—H.M. Dockyard
Burryport and Gwendreath Valley Line
(Burryport—Cwnmawr).
Shipston-on-Stour Branch.
Ponteycyllte Branch.
Cleobury Mortimer and D i tton Priors Light Railway.
Cleehill Branch.
Criggion Branch.
Vron Branch.
Wrexham and Minera Line (Brymbo Terminus).
Brynmawr (Blaenavon Bay).
Nil.
Valley Lines on Car diff and N ew por t Divisions South
Wales (Passing restrictions.)
GENERAL A P P E N
k
oiX
Lines on which Restrictions ar e
r
—continued.
Nort h Eastern Region.
PAGE 67. I N SER T : —
Ferryhill and Castle Eden W est.
London Transport Executive.
Tube lines w i th thei r open sections, except N or ther n
Line N or th of Park Junction and Central Line East of
Leyton.
District Line.
Circle Line.
Widened Lines.
Metropolitan Line from Baker Street to Finchley Road.
t o be Observed.
Shildon N or th t o Shildon South adjacent lines blocked
through Shildon Tunnel.
Spofforth Stati on t o C r i m pl e Junction adj acent l i nes
blocked.
Bishop Auckland D ow n D i r ecti on i f on N o. 2 Platform
line Down Mineral line to be blocked and vice versa
U p D i r ec ti on i f on N o. 3 Platform l i ne the U p
Mineral line to be blocked and vice versa.
W hitby Station, i f standing on No. 3 Platform line, N o. 4
Platform line to be clear and vice versa.
Nil.
BRITISH R A IL W A YS ST A N D A R D C O A C H I N G ST OC K .— PR OH IB IT ION S A N D R EST R IC T ION S O N
STOC K W I T H A L EN GT H O VER H EA D ST OC K S O F 63 FEET 6 IN C H ES W I T H B OGIE C EN TR ES O F
46 F EET 6 IN C H ES.
All vehicles coming within these prohibitions will be marked " C . 1" above the dimensions shown on t he end of
vehicles.
L O N D O N M I D L A N D R EG I O N .
Dursley Branch.
Thornbury Branch.
Nailsworth Branch.
Widnes and St. Helens Line.
Maryport (Excl.) and Carlisle Line.
Penistone ( Thr ough L.M . Station).
Hampstead Junction Line.
Churnet Valley Li ne, Platforms a t U ttoxeter Station.
Loop Li ne, Etr ur ia and Kidsgrove.
Through Disley Tunnel on Buxton Branch.
Through W hitehaven Tunnel and i nto Whitehaven-Bransty
Station.
Between Bi ngley Junction, Shipley and Br adfor d Junction,
Shipley.
Macclesfield ( Centr al) Platfor m Roads (Ex-G.C. and N .S.
Joint).
Keighley W or th Valley Branch Platform Lines.
Lockwood Junction. T o and from Meltham Branch.
Buckley and Connah' s Quay Branch.
Stafford N o. 2 Bay Li ne Platform.
St. Pancras-King's Cross Tunnel.
Daiston-Station-Poplar Branch.
Hayfield Branch.
EASTERN R EG I O N .
NIL
SOU T H ER N R EG I O N .
Tonbridge t o Battle via Robertsbridge.
Whitstable Har bour Branch.
Isle of W i ght Lines.
SC OT T ISH R EG I O N .
Barncluith Tunnel between Hamilton Central and Haughhead
Junction.
Nor th Lei th.
Peniculk.
Eyemouth.
Lines on which Restrictions are to be Observed.
N I L.
NOTE—These coaches may work through Dalton Tunnel
on Carnforth-W hitehaven l i ne w hi l st the lines remain
interlaced, but w hen interlacing is dispensed w i th t he
matter will be reviewed.
Sudbury Station—Adjoining lines t o be blocked.
N I L.
Milton o f Campsie Platforms—Not t o pass passenger
trains on adjoining lines.
Thor nton t o Leuchar s v i a Crail—Speed r estr i cti on
25 m .p.h. between 1 m.p. and 4 rn.p's.
Thor nton Junction and Leven—Speed restriction 15 m.p.h.
on Down line and 30 m .p.h. on Up line at Anstruther
Crossing and 15 m .p.h. between 31+ and 33 m.p's.
Stravithie and St. Andrews—Speed restriction 10 m .p.h.
St. Andrew' s Station and Guardbridge Station.
W or m it t o Leuchar s v i a Tayport—Speed r estr i cti on
10 m .p.h. W or m i t Station.
te
*
PAGE 67—INSERT: —
Lines Total l y Pr ohibited.
Lines over which Restrictions ar e t o be Observed.
W ESTERN R EG I O N .
Highworth Branch.
CuIm Valley Branch.
Looe Branch.
Liskeard—Looe Line.
North Roskear Branch.
Trenance Branch.
Keyham—H.M. Dockyard.
Burry Por t and Gwendr eath Valley Li ne ( Bur r y Por tCwmmawr).
Shipston-on-Stour.
Pontysyllte Branch.
Cleobury Mortimer and D i tton Priors Li ght Railway.
Cleehill Branch.
Criggion Br anch.
Vron Branch.
Wrexham and M iner a Li ne (Brymbo-Terminus).
Brynmawr (Blaenavon Bay).
Swansea Vale Li ne and Branches.
Swansea Victoria Station.
Brynmawr ( M L A . Line) U p Li ne thr ough Station.
M. & S.W . Li ne (Swindon-Andover)
Valley Lines on Car diff and N ew por t
Divisions i n South W ales.
Beaufort Road S.B. t o Ebbw Vale Jct.
N OR T H EA ST ER N R EG I O N .
Ferryhill t o Castle Eden W est.
Spofforth t o Crimple Junction.
Shildon N or th t o Shildon South.
Bishop Auckland W es t t o Bishop
Auckland N or th.
Bishop Auckl and East t o Bi shop
Auckland N or th.
Bedlington N th. to W . Sleekburn.
W hitby Stati on. I f standing o n
No. 3 Platform Line, the No. 4
Platform Li ne t o be blocked,
and vice versa.
L O N D O N T R A N SPOR T EXEC U T IVE.
Tube Lines w i th thei r open Sections, except N or ther n Line
North of Park Junction and Central Line East of Leyton.
District Line.
Circle Line.
Widened Lines.
Metropolitan Li ne from Baker Str eet to Finchley Road.
Passing
restrictions.
Adjoining
lines t o
be blocked
at these
places.
N I L.
PAGES 70 A N D 71.
RULE SS—D ET EN T ION O F T R A I N S O N R U N N I N G L I N ES.
DELETE. ( R ul e 55 applies.)
PAGE 72.
RULES 77 and 8I — D I SC O N N EC T I O N O F SIGN A L S, P O I N T S , ET C .
DELETE. (Rules 77 and 81 apply.)
RULE 78 ( c) —H A N D SIGN A L M EN A T T W O- A SPEC T C O L O U R L I G H T SIGN A L S
RULE I07— T R A C T ION E N G I N E S , ET C ., C R OSSIN G L I N E .
PAGE 73.
INSERT:—
FU LLY F IT T ED F R EIGH T TR A IN S—SID E L IGH T S.
Referring t o Rule 120, for the purpose of this Rule i t must be understood that fully fitted fr eight trains which are
not required to carry side lights are those classified " C " and signalled by 5 beats on the Block Bell Code: viz., 3 pause.
1 pause, 1.
RULE 121--S1DE L I G H T S O N G O O D S T R A I N S O N PA R A L L EL L I N ES.
RULE 127 ( iv) —SIGNALS A T J U N C T I O N S L O W ER ED F O R W R O N G R O U T E .
DELETE. ( R ul e 127 (vili) applies.)
1)
GENERAL APP X — c o n t i n u e d .
PAGE 73.
RULE I47— L OOP L I N E S PR OVID ED W I T H T EL EPH O N ES.
RULE 159—SM OK IN G.
PAGE 74.
RULES 183 and I84— M OVEM EN T S I N W R O N G D I R E C T I O N
DELETE. ( Rules 183 and 184 apply.)
PAGE 75.
RULE 194 ( c) —C OLOU R L I G H T SIGN A L S A T B O X E S W H E R E SI N G L E L I N E
W OR K IN G T ER M IN A T ES.
DELETE. ( R ul e 194 (c) applies.)
RULE 215— OC C U PA T ION B Y T R O L L EY O F SI N G L E L I N E W O R K E D B Y
ELECTRIC T O K E N B L O C K SYST EM .
DELETE. ( R ul e 215 ( n) applies.)
RULE 2 I 7
DELETE. ( R R
ul eE217
L A( d)
Y applies.)
I NSERT:— I N G ,
R
E
C ON VEYA N C E B Y F R EIGH T T R A I N S O F EXPL O SI VES A N D D A N G E R O U S G O O D S
P A
I
ReferringRto Rule 240, Clause10, the restriction on the number of vehicles containing explosives which may be conveyed
by any one train
A at any one time to a maximum of five does not apply in the case of explosives conveyed on account of:—
(i) T h e Government, (Admiralty, W ar Office, Ai r Ministry and Ministry of Supply).
N
(ii) A trader for transit to a Government Establishment.
D trader for transit to a trader on account of the Government. T he marshalling arrangements laid down in the
(iii) A
O
Rule must,
B
however, be observed.
S
T
U
PAGE 76. R
C
T
A U T OM A T IC A N D SEM I- A U T OM A T IC SIGN A L S.
I headed
O
DELETE Clause
PA SSEN GER T R A I N S O V E R - R U N N I N G PL A T F OR M S. ( R u le 136 (b) applies.;
N
S
O
PAGES 76 A N D 77.
N
T R A IN S DS
ET A IN ED A T A U T O M A T I C A N D SEM I- A U T OM A T IC ST OP SIGN A L S PR OVID ED W I T H
" P" SIGN S.
I
These instructions
are cancelled. W her e " P " signs have hi ther to been pr ovided at automatic or semi-automatic
N
signals for theGpurpose of authorising Drivers to pass such signals at danger, the " P " signs ar e now put Out of use and
these signals may be passed at danger only on verbal or telephonic author ity of the Signalman—see Rule 55 (g). I n the
L
event of the telephone
failing, Drivers m ust act i n accordance w i th Rule 55 ( h) .
E
PAGE 77. L
T EL EPH ON ES A T ST O P SIGN A L S.
I
N
DELETE existing instructions and I N S E R T :
E has been br ought to a stand at a signal where telephone communication with a signal box is provided
When a train
the following code
of instructions must, after telephonic communication has been established, be observed by the TrainS
man and Signalman.
.
The Trainman m ust be careful t o ascertain the name of the signal box w i th which he has established telephonic
communication, and that i t is the box from which he requires to obtain instructions.
I. T r a i n m a n t o Signalman.
T
o
To intimate that train has been br ought to a
stand owing to the signal being at Danger. o
n
2. Sig n alm an t o T rain man .
if tr ai n t o be held at signal.
p
S
T
t
o
o
t
communicat e as f o l l o w s:
r
a
i
n
waiting at t S i g n a l
L
i
n
e
.
t Full description t o be gi ven
t N am e or number of signal and name of line on which train
is standing t o be given.
communicat e as f ollows: - ti l l signal clears. ( i f after waiting 5 m inutes, o r other
prescribed per i od, signal does not clear, Trainman m ust again
communicate w i th the Signalman).
If signal is defective or cannot be lowered and W a i t a t tel ephone f or fur ther instructions. ( Tr ai nm an m ust
train m us t n o t proceed. c o m m u n i c a t e w i t h Signalman a t intervals o f not m or e than
5 m i nutes, o r o t h e r pr escr i bed per i od, unl ess other w i s e
instructed).
If signal is defective or cannot be lowered, but train m ay proceed.
P
a
s
s
Appl i c abl e at signal c ontr ol l ed fr om a Signal Box .
*
S i
g n a l
a t D anger and pr oceed
cautiously t o
(
N
a
m
e
poi nt t o which
train can proceed).
'Applicable a t A u t o m at i c Sig n al o r Semi- au t o mat ic
Signal working Aut omat ically.
Pass*
S i g n a l
a t D anger a n d pr oc eed
cautiously.
* Name or number of signal t o be given.
3. T h e Trainman and Signalman m ust not terminate a conversation until they are sure that a clear understanding has
been reached.
4. I f s Trainman cannot establish communication with the Signalman, the Driver must, unless Instructions to the contrary
are exhibited in the telephone box, send his Fireman to the signal box from which the signal is controlled in or der
to receive the Signalman's instructions. ( This clause is not applicable at Automatic or Semi-automatic Stop Signals).
PAGE 83.
INSERT:—
DEFECTIVE SIGN A L S A N D PO I N T S.
If it is found that any signals or points do not respond to the working of the controlling lever, or that i t is not possible
to correctly set up a route, the Signalman must first replace the levers and operate them again, provided i t is safe for him
to do so; i f this is not successful i t is probable that the cause is due to some hold up in the mechanism, such as a stone in
the poi nts or other obstruction i n the wir e or rodding. T he Signalman should then endeavour to locate the fault and,
if possible, remove the obstruction.
If the Signalman is unable to leave his box for the purpose of tracing the fault he should obtain assistance from a
member of the station or yard staff.
Should the Signalman be unable t o trace or remove the obstruction he must send for the Lineman.
No attem pt should be made by the Signalman t o interfere i n any way with electrical signalling apparatus.
D ET ON A T OR S.
AD D t o final paragraph:—
1951/52 W hi te.
1952/53 Black.
1953/54 Br own.
PAGE 84.
1954/55 Red.
1955/56 Gr een.
1956/57 Gr ey.
1957/58 Yellow.
1958/59 Blue.
1959/60 W hi te.
SIGN A L L IN G O F BALLAST T R A IN S.
C AN C EL existing instructions.
Engineer's trains must be classified in accordance with the standard codes—see page 60.
OFFICER'S SPECIALS.
The " Is Line Clear " bell codes for an Officers' Special ar e amended as under :—
Officers' Special tr ai n not r equir ing t o stop i n section
4
Officers' Special tr ai n r equir ing t o stop i n section
2
consecutively.
- 2 - 3.
PAGE 86.
INSERT (after notice headed "Junctions and Other Diverging Points. Movements of points when train is approaching"):—
W OR K IN G O F F I X E D SIGN A L S A T D IVER GIN G PO I N T S.
In the event of i t being necessary for a passenger tr ain, or other train composed of coaching stock, or a Class " C "
or " D " tr ain t o be r un from one line t o another thr ough a junction over which i t is necessary that speed should be
reduced and such r oute is not the regular booked r oute for the tr ain t o travel, the Junction Stop signal must not be
lowered unti l the train is close t o such signal and the Signalman must, where practicable, satisfy himself that the speed
of the tr ai n has been suitably reduced.
Where ther e is a stop signal wor ked from the same Signal Box on diverging line ahead of the junction, such signal
should not be lowered until the Junction Stop signal is lowered and then only in accordance with the Block Regulations.
T R A IN S N O T C OM PL ET EL Y W I T H I N F I X E D SIGN A L S.
DELETE existing instructions headed as above and I NSERT:—
(a) i n cases wher e:—
(I) A n outl et signal is provided t o control movements from a siding to a r unning line, and
(ii) a shunting signal is pr ovided t o contr ol set-back movements,
Drivers must regard such signals as controlling the movement, although the engine may be standing on the wrong
side of the signal, and must not move thei r engines unti l they are satisfied the signal is off. W her e, however, the
Driver cannot see the signal and the movement is accompanied by a Shunter, the latter must advise the Driver when
the signal is lowered.
If for any reason the signal cannot be lowered, the Shunter or person i n charge will be responsible for ascertaining
from the Signalman that i t is i n or der for the movement to be made and for satisfying himself that the points are
In the pr oper position. I n the case of a l i ght engine unaccompanied by a Shunter, this duty must be carried out
by the Fireman.
(b) O n platform lines or other r unning lines when an engine is ahead of the signal contr olling the starting of trains
owing to the length of the train, a Driver must regard that signal as controlling his movement. W hen the Driver
cannot see such signal, or back indication wher e provided, or the signal cannot be lowered owing t o the engine
occupying a track circuit or other apparatus which prevents the signal being lowered, the Driver must not proceed
until he receives a green handsignal from the Signalman or verbal intimation to do so from the person acting under
the instructions of the Signalman. The Driver must not be authorised t o proceed unti l i t has been ascertained that
any points concerned have been correctly set.
13
GENERAL APPENDD&c ontinue ll
In cases, however, wher e Absolute Block W or king is n o t In oper ation and the signal has been lowered t o enable
the train to draw forward for station duties the signal must be placed at Danger in accordance with Rule 68(a) ( i i )
and (iii). I n such circumstances the signal must not be regarded as controlling the fur ther movement of the tr ain.
If i t is necessary for the Signalman to allow a conflicting movement to take place ahead of the standing train he must
not do so unti l the Dr iver of such tr ai n has been advised o f what is about t o be done. A f t e r t he confl i cti ng
movement has been completed, and when the tr ain is ready to continue its journey, the Driver must not proceed
until he has received a verbal intimation t o do so, from the Signalman or the person acting under the Signalman's
instructions, in addition to the Guard's "r ight- away" signal.
(c) W hen the fixed signals r efer r ed t o i n clauses (a) and ( b) lead t o more than one r unning line, the Dr iver should
satisfy himself by observation which line he is travelling over, but the person in charge of the movement mentioned
in clause (a) or the Signalman or person acting under his instructions as mentioned i n clause (b) must, whenever
practicable, also inform the Driver over which l i ne he is about t o travel.
PAGE 87.
INSERT:—
W OR K IN G O F C R A N ES I N C O N N E C T I O N W I T H M I SH A PS O R EN G I N EER I N G O PER A T I O N S—
PR OT EC T ION O F T R A IN S O N A D J O I N I N G L IN ES.
Where a crane is being used i n connection w i th mishaps or engineering operations and i t is necessary for trains t o
travel over any line which may be fouled by the movement of the crane, the following precautions must be taken:—
(I) , A District inspector ( or other responsible member of the Oper ating Depar tm ent Staff) m ust be i n attendance
and no line must be fouled by the oper ation of the crane unti l his permission has been given. H e must keep i n
touch w i th the Signalman or Signalmen concerned so as to obtain accurate information as to the r unning of trains.
Where necessary a portable telephone in communication with the signal box or boxes concerned must be provided.
(I1) N o tr ai n must be allowed t o pass the site wher e the crane is wor king w i thout the permission of the Oper ating
Department District Inspector, w ho must not give his permission unti l (a) the person i n charge of the crane has
ensured that i t is clear of the line on which the train will r un and no fur ther movement of the crane will be made,
and ( b) the hook and lifting beam (where used) is secured t o pr event movement.
(iii) After a train has passed the site of the work the crane may re-commence operations as soon as the Operating Department District Inspector has ascertained that ther e is a suitable interval for wor k to proceed and after the protective
arrangements shown i n clause (iv) have been carried out.
( Iv) W hen the site at which the crane is wor king is not within the protection of the fixed signals of the line on which
trains r equir e t o r un, Handsignalmen must be appointed i n accordance w i th Rule 217. W hen the Handsignalmen
have taken up their positions, a tr ain may be allowed t o enter the section, but the Handsignalman at the site of the
work must continue t o exhibit a Danger signal unti l the Oper ating Department District Inspector authorises the
train t o proceed.
If the site at which the crane is working is within the protection of the Home signal of the line on which trains require
to r un, such line must not be fouled w i thi n the authorised clearing poi nt by the crane unti l the signal Bl oc k i ng
Back Insi de H om e Signal has been sent to the signal box in r ear and acknowledged. W her e block instruments
are not provided, the Bl ocki ng Back (2-4) signal m ust be sent by bell or telephone and the Signalman at the box
in the rear must place a lever collar on the lever of the signal controlling the entrance to the section and must not
acknowledge the Bl ocki ng Back signal unti l this has been done.
In the case of an Intermediate Block Home signal contr olled from the signal box in the rear, i f the site where the
crane is working is within the clearing point of such signal, the Operating Department District Inspector must request
the Signalman at the box in rear to place a lever collar on the lever controlling the Intermediate Block Home signal
and also on the lever of the signal contr olling the entrance to the Intermediate Block section unti l the conditions
in clause (ii) are carried out. W her e the site at which the crane is working is ahead of the clearing point of the Intermediate Block Home signal, Handsignalmen must be appointed in accordance w i th Rule 217. If, however, the Handsignalman when going out to pr otect an obstruction should arrive at an Intermediate Block Home signal befor e he
has reached the distance of 1 m ile, he must make use of the telephone provided, and r equest the Signalman t o
maintain the Intermediate Block Home signal at Danger until the Handsignalman has informed him that the obstruction
has been removed, and that the line is clear and safe for the passage of trains. U nder these circumstances the Handsignalman must remain at the Intermediate Block Home signal, place on the rail 3 detonators, 10 yards apart, and exhibit
a hand Danger signal, unti l the Operating Depar tm ent District Inspector authorises the tr ain t o proceed. Shoul d
the telephone at the Intermediate Block Home signal have failed, the Handsignalman must proceed for the prescribed
distance i n accordance w i th Rule 217.
At places where automatic signalling is in operation a Handsignalman must be stationed at the automatic Stop signal
in rear of the site of the crane working, and wherever possible this signal must be placed and maintained at Danger,
in which case a distant Handsignalman will not be required. i f i t is not possible for the signal to be kept at Danger,
a distant Handsignalman must be appointed i n accordance w i th Rule 217. O n the arrival of a tr ai n at such signal,
the Handsignalman must advise the Operating Department District Inspector, w ho, after ensuring that the line is
clear in accordance w i th paragraph (ii), may instruct the Handsignalman t o authorise the tr ain t o proceed.
PAGE 89.
INSERT ( to follow "Accidents arising fr om opening of carriage door s") :—
L IM IT ED C L E A R A N C E S
The attention of the staff is- directed towards the need for exercising care when wor king at places where ther e is a
restricted clearance between the
Wrunning
A R N Iline
N Gor siding
T andOadjacent structures, or between r unning lines and/or sidings.
This applies t o Footplate Staff
S and
T Guards
A F as Fwell. as t o staff working on the gr ound.
At certain places the limited clearance may be indicated by a Red and W hi te chequered boar d bearing the words
"WARNING—LIMITED CLEARANCE".
PAGES 90-92.
A D VIC E T O PASSENGERS O F D EL A YS T O PA SSEN GER T R A IN S
A N D PR O VI SI O N O F R EFR ESH M EN TS.
DELETE existing entr y and I N S E R T :
The Station Master or other person in charge of the working at a place where a passenger train is delayed, or is likely
to be delayed 10 minutes or more, must at once notify the District Control Office and carry out existing special instructions
for advising late running of trains. I f the place at which the delay occurs, or is likely to occur, is not connected by telephone
to a District Control Office, and the train r epor ting arrangements do not cover the particular circumstances, information
must be sent by the best means available t o the stations in the vicinity which w oul d be affected, and t o the principal
stations on the dir ect l i ne o f r oute.
The District C ontr ol Office upon receiving advice o f delays t o passenger trains must advise the stations affected
within the Control area if they are not already covered by the train reporting arrangements and also notify the appropriate
Regional Headquarters of the circumstances which i n tur n must suitably advise other District Contr ol Offices and other
Regional Headquarters Offices affected.
If a station has not received pr i or advice o f late r unning and a train is more than 10 minutes overdue, the Station
Master or other person in charge must make immediate enquiries by the best means available to ascertain the likely extent
of the delay.
As far as possible, Station Masters at starting points of trains and at intermediate points should advise passengers
by the most effective means of any exceptional delay which i t is definitely known will arise from any extensive engineering
works, diversions or other causes on the r oute t o be traversed.
2.
Immediately i t is known that a train is r unning behind time to an extent likely to cause inconvenience, an advice of
the probable delay must be given to passengers by Enquiry Office staffs, by Booking Clerks when issuing tickets, by blackboards or other methods of displaying notices and verbally to passengers on platforms and i n waiting and refreshment
rooms. Full use should be made of the loudspeakers where this equipment is available.
When t he passenger service is entirely suspended, intending passengers for destinations within or beyond the area
affected by the suspension must be informed that i f they proceed w i th thei r journey they do so at their own risk. They
must be also informed of any alternative routes available. Passengers who are already on their journey must be dealt with
in accordance with the following paragraphs.
In the case of disturbance of suburban and residential passenger services, particularly during the peak periods, Station
Masters must be in attendance on the platform and advise passengers verbally of the circumstances.
3.
For the purpose of advising passengers of train delays caused by mishaps or failures, pr inted skeleton double-royal
notices have been supplied to stations; these must be kept in readiness to be filled in and prominently displayed as soon
as i t is known that delays will be caused by mishap or failure. T he notice (A) is worded as follows:—
(A)
IM POR T A N T N O T I C E.
British Railways r egr et that ow i ng t o an i nter r upti on o f
normal services at
t
r
a
i
n
s
are subject t o cancellation and delay.
Every effor t is being made t o r estor e normal services
and to minimise inconvenience to passengers.
Particulars of train alterations must be displayed on an adjoining blackboard.
4.
Intending passengers and passengers In trains detained at stations should be given information as t o the probable
extent of the delay and should be informed of any alternative rail or road services available or specially provided, so that
they may have the oppor tunity of proceeding to their destinations by these means. Passengers deciding to take advantage
of alternative services should be directed t o them.
Where arrangements have been made for rail tickets or vouchers to be available by alternative road or rail services
whether normal or specially arranged, the double-royal notice (B) worded as shown i n the following illustration, must
be used instead of notice (A). Details of the alternative services must be inserted in the space provided and particulars
of train alterations must be exhibited.
(B)
IM POR T A N T N O T I C E.
British Railways r egr et that ow i ng t o an i nter r upti on
of normal services at
t r a i n s
ar e subject
to cancellation and delay. Ar r angem ents have been made
for passengers t o pr oceed t o t hei r destinations b y t he
following alternative services:—
All descriptions o f railway tickets will be available by
these alternative services.
Every effor t is being made t o restore normal services
and t o minimise inconvenience t o passengers.
These notices ( A or 8) must remain exhibited unti l i t has been ascertained that the wor king is about to become
normal, when they should be cancelled by a notice (C), wor ded as shown below, placed obliquely across the warning
notice ( A or B) :—
C
)
N OR M A L T R A IN SER VIC E
RESTORED F R OM : —
A record must be kept at each station of the time dur ing which the notices are displayed.
S.
Passengers in trains unavoidably held between stations must be advised by:—
(a) Tr ain Attendant where provided, suitably instructed by the Guard.
(b) Guar d, when he can do so w i thout delaying any protective measures which may be necessary.
(c) Any other member of the train staff (Traffic or Hotels), to whom the guard must give the necessary instructions.
If there is no other member of the staff available on the train, the Guard, after taking the protective steps required
by the Rules, must advise passengers of the circumstances at the first oppor tunity.
l
g
GENERAL A P P E
i diverted from their normal u t e , causing the journey time to be unduly extended,
When it is necessary for trains to be
the Station Master at the last stopping place
N D before
I X —the point of div i o n will be responsible for arranging for the passengers
in the train to be advised, providing this can be done w i thout u s i n g undue delay. W hen possible the advice should be
given by the train staff.
c opti nue d•
6.
7.
When prolonged delay is inevitable, trains must be held at stations rather than at intermediate signal-boxes, so that
passengers may be afforded the oppor tunity of using the station lavatory accommodation or obtaining refreshments.
8.
At stations where refreshment facilities are available, Station Masters must, during the hours when the Refreshment
Rooms are normally open, advise the staff immediately i t is known that trains are likely to be more than 45 minutes late
in or der that arrangements can be made to serve waiting passengers and those on the trains which have been delayed.
This is particularly desirable at stations where platform refreshment trolleys are available, so that refreshments and hot
beverages may be in readiness. In the event of a train which would normally reach a station before the Refreshment Room
closes for the night, being 45 minutes or more late, the Station Masters must advise the Refreshment Room Management
in or der that where i t is practicable, arrangements may be made for them to remain open until the train has arrived and
passengers desiring refreshments have been served. W her ever practicable, passengers should be advised by the quickest
means, the facilities which have been provided for their convenience.
9.
When an accident occurs, arrangements must be made for supplies of refreshments and hot beverages t o be made
available as quickly as possible.
Station Masters at stations where ther e are Refreshment Rooms should make arrangements immediately w i th the
Refreshment Room Management to cover the contingency of accidents arising during the hours the Refreshment Rooms
are closed. Distr ict Operating Officers should make similar arrangements of a general character w i th the Refreshment
Room Management so that accidents or emergencies at other points can be covered.
As a general rule, the supply of refreshments (including restoratives) w i thout charge should be confined to passengers
involved in accidents, but Station Masters or other persons in charge may exercise their discretion in the case of delays of an
exceptional character.
10.
The Station Master or other member of the staff in charge of operations at the scene of an accident must see that
passengers intending t o continue to thei r destination ar e fully informed of the arrangements that are being made for
their com for t and conveyance. T he earliest possible announcement must be made, and i f i t is not practicable t o give
definite information, passengers must be informed that they will be notified as soon as final arrangements have been made.
In the event of passengers involved i n an accident being sent forward t o thei r destination stations at times when
connecting trains and other transport services are not available, emergency arrangements must be made for the reception
of the passengers. W her e practicable, steps should be taken as under :—
(i) Telephone the local Omnibus Company to arrange an emergency service to convey passengers from the railway
station t o thei r homes.
(ii) Telephone local garage proprietors to ask that taxis be made available.
(iii) In such circumstances, road conveyance should be provided w i thout charge to the passengers.
W here passengers must of necessity spend an appreciable tim e on the railway station premises, the best possible
arrangements m ust be made for thei r comfort.
In the case of a serious accident to a passenger train, as soon as the safety of the line has been provided for and all
the necessary emergency arrangements have been made, all reasonable assistance must be given t o passengers for the
despatch of telegrams to relatives, etc., w i thout charge. Such telegrams which must be br ief and must be wr itten on free
postal telegraph forms, should be certified by or on behalf of the Station Master.
Should the accident occur at a poi nt where ther e are no regular means of disposing of telegrams to the Post Office,
telegrams fr om passengers should be passed forward by messenger ( or over railway wires i f this can be done w i thout
detriment to railway emergency requirements) to the most convenient poi nt at which they can be handed over to the
Post Office. A t the poi nt of transmission to the Post Office, the messages must be affixed to free postal telegraph forms
and handed over to the postal Telegraph Office by the most expeditious means.
These instructions do not apply to telegrams to newspapers or news agencies.
•
12.
Station Masters, Passenger Agents, and other officials must satisfy themselves that the members of their staffs who
come in contact wtih the public appreciate the importance of the duties prescribed to them and that they keep themselves
acquainted w i th the running of trains so as to be in a position to answer public enquiries promptly and correctly.
13.
All employees should ensure that the highest standard of tact, courtesy, and helpfulness is maintained on the occasion
of any emergency.
PAGE 92.
W A G O N S C O N T A I N I N G L.N .E.R . C O M PA N Y' S F U EL .
DELETE the instructions under the above heading.
INSERT:—
W A G O N S C O N T A I N I N G F U EL F OR R A IL W A Y, D OC K S A N D H O T E L U SE ST OPPED F OR
REPAIRS.
W hen wagons containing coal, coke, briquettes or ovoids for use of British Railways, Docksand Inland Waterways,
Hotels or Catering Services are stopped for repairs, transhipment or any other reason, the sending and receiving stations
must be advised, and, in addition, and advice must be sent to the Regional Coal Supplies Officers of the Region in which
the wagon is stopped and the destination Region. T he addresses of the Regional Coal Supplies Officers are:—
Eastern Region—Doncaster.
North Eastern Region—Doncaster.
Scottish Region—Glasgow.
London Midland Region—Derby.
Southern Region—W aterloo Station, London.
Western Region—Swindon.
14
1
PAGES 93 A N D 94.
CHARGES T O B E M A D E F OR T H E BREAKAGE O F CARRIAGE W I N D O W S , M IR R OR S, GLA SS
GLOBES, ET C ., B Y PASSENGERS.
DELETE the charges shown for damage t o stock and substitute the following:—
Droplights—
Framed, not exceeding 2 ft. 6 i n. . . .
Unframed, not exceeding 2 ft. 6 i n
Unframed, exceeding 2 ft. 6 In. • • •
Doorlights, Saloon, Restaurant or Buffet Cars
Fixed Side W indows i n door s or bodyside—
N ot exceeding 1 f t . 6 i n. w i de • • • • • • • • •
Between 1 f t . 6 i n. and not exceeding 2 ft. 6 in. w i de
Exceeding 2 ft. 6 i n. w i de . . . • • • . . . . . .
Curved Windows—gangway ends and Vestibule stock ...
Windows at end o f Brake Vans . . .
• • •
• • •
Toplights and Fanlights • • • • • •
Sliding Shutter s and Venti l ator Glasses
Guards' Projection Lights . • • • •
Clerestory Glass • • • • • • • • •
Mirrors . . . • • •
•
••
In bakelite frame, both br oken
Glass—
...
Photograph and advertising . . .
In bakelite frame, both br oken
Frames—
Bakelite • • • • • •
.
.
.
•••
L
0 0 .
s.
d.
18
1 9
3 16
1 5
0
0
0
0
1 6
1 13
2 14
1 12
1 0
13
9
10
16
13
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
5
7
0
0
6
0
9
4
5
7
5
4
0
0
0
0
0
0
7
0
2 11
1 3
0
0
1 10
0
1
1
0
7
0
0
1
13
5
0
0
3 4
2 13
17
1 13
14
0
0
0
0
0
1 19
0
1
1
1
6
8
0
17
19
13
4
4
16
18
16
10
18
15
13
15
7
18
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
1 1
0
1
• 00
Electric Li ght Fittings—.
Fittings . . . • • • . . . • • • • • •
Fuses above cor r i dor sliding door s . . .
Switches, compartments and corridors
Globes •
•
•
•
Shades
Lamps • • •
Gas Fittings— ...
Glass Globes • . .
Steam Rail Cars—
Droplights—
Unframed • • •
Sliding D oor Lights
Side W indows- Fixed ••• . . .
..•
Inside Par tition W indows—
Not exceeding 2 ft. 6 i n. w i de . . .
Exceeding 2 ft. 6 i n. w i de . . .
Fanlights • • •
End W indows
Pullman Cars—
Doors lights
Side lights ...
Sliding lights
End lights
Pantry lights
•
•
.
—
•
•
•
.
...
•
•
—
.
•••
Mirrors—Lavatory
Electric Carriage Stock—
Droplights ••• • • •
Sliding door lights . . . . . . . . .
*Drivers' and Ar ticulated D oor lights
*Luggage D oor lights . . . . . . . . .
Side W indows • • • • . •
*Drivers' Side Fixed lights
Fanlight • • • . . . • • •
Inside Par tition W indows
*Inter-Saloon D oor lights
End W indows • • •
*Casement l i ght • • •
*Switch Box lights
.
.
.
Destination Glass
*Windscreen Glass
—
—
Bullseye and Tail Lam p Glasses
Clerestory Glass ...
*Spare Fuse Box Glass
—
—
Mirrors • • • . . .
.
.
.
Glass—
Photograph, Advertising and R oute Diagram
2
1
1
1
•••
Electric Li ght Fittings—.
Shade _
• • •
Lamp • • •
—
—
Note—Entries marked * applicable onl y t o Tyneside stock.
•••
•.•
O . !.
0
4
4
0
0
17
PAGE 94,
T R A IN S B EC O M I N G D IVID ED .
AM EN D thi r d paragraph t o r ead:—
' Any broken coupling or drawgear found on the line should be handed over at once to the nearest Station Master,
who m ust forward i t, booked thr ough Parcels Department, w i th a r epor t, t o the local Distr ict Carriage and W agon
Foreman".
PAGE 96.
INSERT after Instruction headed "Rer ailing of Bogie Vehicles":—
B R EA K D OW N C R A N ES.
Cranes, whether capable of moving under their own power or not, must not be moved, when on r unning lines the
gradient of which is 1 i n 150 or steeper, unless coupled t o a locomotive.
W ith either class of crane, the locomotive should, in all cases where no serious inconvenience to the operation would
result, be placed below, r ather than above the crane, i.e., the locomotive should stand lower on the gradient than the
crane.
Where cranes are working on a gradient steeper than 1 In 260, a baulk of timber must In every case be fixed across
the line and secured to the rails by means of chains at the lowest poi nt on the gradient to which the crane, or the locomotive attached t o the crane, may be required t o travel, unless the locomotive is at the lower level.
PAGE 97.
EXPL OSIVES, IN F L A M M A B L E L I Q U I D S, D A N GER OU S C H EM IC A L S, C OM B U ST IB L E M A T ER IA L S,
ETC.—FIRES O R A C C ID EN T S.
INSERT after instruction headed " Aci ds and Corrosive Li qui ds":—
Phosphorous.
W hite or Yellow Phosphorous Is poisonous and Is spontaneously Inflammable when exposed t o air. T ank wagons
and large receptacles bear warning notices Indicating steps to be taken In the event of fire. T he fire should be approached
from the windward side and can be controlled w i th w ater ( at l ow pressure to avoid spattering), but the phosphorous
will inflame again i f not kept w etted; alternatively, i t can be controlled by smothering w i th ear th or sand, preferably
damp or w et.
PAGE 99.
LIN ESID E FIRES.
D ET EC T ION A N D E X T I N G U I S H I N G O F FIRES O N T H E L I N E SID E.
DELETE last tw o paragraphs and IN SER T :Station M ast ers, Perman en t W a y Inspectors and Gangers must report t he circumstances as quickly as
possible. Lineside fires known to be caused, alleged, or suspected of being caused, by a spark or sparks from locomotives
must be r epor ted on Form E.266 in all cases where damage is done to pr oper ty other than that of the British Railways.
All other fires must be r epor ted on the forms provided i n accordance w i th the instructions contained In Chief General
Manager's Circular N o. S.21, dated 1st February, 1946.
Information supplied by the Forestry Commission, showing the danger zones i n the N or th Eastern Region where
the risk of fire appears greatest is shown i n the Sectional Appendices, but, as all points of contact between Forest and
Railway are dangerous, i t must not be understood that danger does not exist in places other than those specified.
PAGE 100.
SIGN A L M EN — SU PER VISION A N D D U T IES.
The first paragraph is cancelled. R ul e 17, clause (v) is applicable, and fur ther instructions have been issued t o each
Station Master as necessary.
PAGE 101.
A C K N OW L ED GEM EN T B Y EM PL OYEES O N PER M A N EN T W A Y O F T R A IN M EN ' S
W A R N I N G SIGN A L S.
DELETE. ( R ul e 127 (v1) applies.)
U N A U T H OR ISED PER SON S I N GU A R D S' VA N S.
DELETE. ( R ul e 130 ( iii) applies.)
PAGE 104.
M O VEM EN T O F R A IL VEH IC L ES B Y R OA D M O T O R VEH IC L ES.
DELETE. ( R ul e 110 (c) applies.)
D OGS— C ON VEYA N C E B Y PA SSEN GER T R A IN .
INSERT additional par agr aphs:W ar D ogs accom pani ed by Escor ts. Except when r equir ing conveyance by "Push and Pul l " trains, Ar m y and
R.A.F. W ar Dogs must not be allowed i nto the passenger compartments but must be securely muzzled and travel In the
Guard's Van w i th the escort, w ho will be required t o sign the usual indemnity.
When war dogs travel by "Push and Pul l " trains on which no Guard is employed, they must be securely muzzled
and travel with the escort in the passenger por tion of the units, care being taken to ensure that ther e is no interference
with the com for t of passengers and that the dogs do not sit on the seats.
GENERAL APFIENDI c o n ti n u e d .
FR EEZIN G M I XT U R ES C O N V
D
B Y PASSENGER T R A IN .
Page 105.
IN SER T Additional Instruction:—
4. N o t more than 12 cartons to be conveyed in any one van in any particular train.
PAGES 108 and 109.
B R EA K D OW N O F W A G O N S U N D ER L O A D O R ST OPPA GE D U E T O L OA D U N SA F E T O T R A VEL
PROCEDURE A S T O A D V I S I N G A N D T R A N SH I PM EN T , ET C ., W H E N L O A D E D W A G O N S A R E
STOPPED I N T R A N SIT O W I N G T O M EC H A N IC A L O R L O A D I N G DEFECTS.
The responsibility for goods traffic loading matters having passed to the Commercial Department, the words "Distr ict
Commercial Officer " to be substituted for "Distr ict Super intendent" in paragraphs numbered 3, 4, 5 and 8.
The following additions to be made to paragraphs 1 and 3 of the instructions under the above heading:—
Par agr aph
The Continental Traffic Manager, Liverpool Street, must also be advised by telegram addressed to EASIDAY 5 UV ST
of
all breakdoWns
Quay)
or Dover. affecting Train Ferry Wagons, w hether loaded or empty, travelling to and fr om Harwich (Parkeston
Paragraph 3.
Form B.795 must be Issued to Harwich (Parkeston Quay) or Dover, as the case may be, as the sending or destination
station according to whether the wagon is inward or outward bound.
PAGES 110 and
C ON VEYA N C E O F PR IVA T EL Y O W N E D EN G I N ES R U N N I N G O N
T H EIR O W N W H EEL S.
R EGU L A T ION S I N REGARD T O T H E A C C EPTA N C E A N D C O N VEYA N C E O F PR IVA T EL Y- OW N ED
L OC OM OT IVES1A N D T R A VEL L IN G C R A N ES R U N N I N G O N T H E I R O W N W H EEL S.
The following regulations must De observed by all concerned in the conveyance of this traffic. I t should be understood
that
n these instructions the ter m privately-owned locomotives embraces privately-owned travelling cranes on thei r
own iwheels.
I. [ E X A M I N A T I O N .
(a) O n receipt of the application, the Goods Agent or Station Master who deals with the Senders In regard to the
transit of locomotives must communicate with his appropriate District Officer, who will arrange for an examination
to be made by the District Motive Power Superintendent: as much ti m e as possible must be allowed for this
examination. I t must be clearly notified w hether the locomotive is t o be wor ked " dead" or under its ow n
power.
(b) T he District Motive Power Superintendent will arrange for the necessary examination t o be carried out, and
as soon as this is completed, for an advice by telephone or telegram to be given to the appropriate District Officer
as to whether the locomotive is fi t or unfit to travel on its own wheels. After the examination has been carried
out, a r epor t form—Diagram and Certificate of Examination of Privately-owned Locomotives r unning on own
wheels (B.R. 87262)—is to be filled in by the examiner and countersigned by a responsible member of the District
Motive Power Superintendent and sent t o the appropriate District Officer.
(c) Befor e a steam focomotive is allowed to run under its own power, the Goods Agent or Station Master must inform
the sender or owner that the examination made by the Railways does not include the firebox and boiler.
(d) Befor e a locomotive Is allowed to r un "dead" the coupling rods, connecting rods and valve rods, and eccentric
straps where fitted, should be removed, the pistons secured to prevent movement and, i f the material removed
is of a suitable size to be conveyed on the locomotive, i t must, in tur n, be properly secured, otherwise i t will
be necessary for a wagon to be attached to carry this material.
2. S P E C I F I C A T I O N .
Privately-owned locomotives m us t com pl y w i t h t h e fol l ow i ng:—
(i
)
The minimum clearance above rail level of any par t of the locomotive, ei ther between the wheels or outside
the wheels, must not be less than the measurements shown in the table below, confined to a width of 3 ft. 6 In.
on either side of the centre of track, except that the clearance may be down to rail level over a width of 2i ins.
on either side of centre of each rail, as shown in sketch depicted on the Diagram and Certificate of Examination.
Any excess over this width of 3 ft. 6 in. to be within the loading gauges of the lines over which the locomotive
is r equir ed t o travel.
Minimum Underclearance.
Six inches
Five i nches_
Four inches
Six inches
B
e
t
w
e
e
n
Centre line of track and 1 f t . 4 In. ei ther side.
1 f t . 4 i n. and 2 ft. 1- i n. ei ther side.
2 ft. 1 i n . and 2 ft. 2- i n. ei ther side.
2 ft. 8 i i n. and 3 ft. 6 i n. ei ther side.
19
GENERAL APPENDI c o n ti n u e d .
Exceptions.
Loftus and W h it b y Line ( M E . Region).
Nine inches
2
ft. 81 i n. and 3 ft. 6 i n. ei ther side.
Manchester & B u ry L in e and Tottington Branch ( L .M . Region).
Six inches
2
ft. 8 i i n. and 3 ft. 2 i n. ei ther side.
Ten inches
3
ft. 2 i n. and 3 ft. 6 i n. ei ther side.
(ii) The height of centre of buffers above rails should not be more than 3 ft. 6 in. nor less than 3 ft. 4 In. unless the
examiner considers the buffer faces ar e sufficiently large t o pr event locking.
"D ead" buffer ed locomotives may be accepted for conveyance over all Regions; such locomotives m ust be
marshalled between spring-buffered vehicles.
The height of the centre of drawgear above rail should be not more than 3 ft. 6 in. nor less than 3 ft. 2 in.
(III) The diameter of the wheels forming the rigid wheelbase should not be less than 2 ft. 6 in. in the case of a twowheel or a four-wheel bogie i n addition t o at least four coupled wheels, the minimum diameter allowed for
bogie wheels t o be 2 feet.
(iv) The minimum thicknesses of tyres t o be as shown below:—
For axle loads under 15 tons
1
i n . on tr ead.
For axle loads 15 tons and under 18 tons i n . on tr ead.
For axle loads 18 tons and above
1
1
i n. on tr ead.
In the case of axle loads under 10 tons, and the tyres formed solid w i th the rims of the wheels, the minimum
thickness on the tr ead may be 1 i nch.
Axle loads should be supplied by the Owner; if details are not available, an estimate is to be made by the examiner.
(v) The rigid wheelbase of any privately-owned locomotive to be conveyed by Freight train to be not less than 5 feet.
(vi) A privately-owned locomotive having a wheelbase not less than 4 ft. 9 in. may be r un l i ght under own power
or hauled by special engine. I f the rigid wheelbase is less than 4 ft. 9 in. the locomotive must be loaded up.
(vii) Steam locomotives w i thout ashpans must not be allowed t o r un i n steam.
3. A C C E P T A N C E A N D C O N VEYA N C E.
(a) Locomot ive wit hin Gauge and A xle weights not excessive. T h e appropriate District Officer, on receipt
of Diagram and Certificate of Examination (B.R. 87262) satisfactorily completed in all respects and being satisfied,
through prescribed Regional channels, that the locomotive is suitable from a loading gauge aspect and axle load
requirements t o tr avel t o i ts destination, m ust make the necessary arrangements for despatch thr ough t he
Operating Department, advising Goods Agent or Station Master accordingly.
In cases of interchange between Regions, the appropriate District Officer must make the necessary arrangements for the acceptance of the locomotive with the other Regions concerned, thr ough the prescribed Regional
channels.
(b) Locomot ive O u t
respects with the loading gauge and axle weight requirements, or present any other features not herein provided
for, the procedure in respect of out-of-gauge loads must be followed, and befor e the locomotive is allowed t o
o f go forward, agreements must be obtained fr om all concerned in the thr oughout transit, thr ough the prescribed
Regional channels.
G
a
u g e al . Privately-owned locomotives must not be allowed t o wor k under thei r ow n pow er over the lines
(c) Gener
a nmaintained
d / oby the
r Railway Executive without at least one axle load of 10 tons or over unless specially authorised
by
the
appr
opr
Regional Headquarters.
A
x Any lnum ber
e iate
of privately-owned locomotives " dead" on own wheels may be conveyed by one fr eight train
W upet o the
i loading
g
capacity available, pr ovided axle weights produced ar e not excessive, having regard t o the
tso be travelled, and that instructions ar e complied w i th respecting clearances, etc., as shown on t he
h route
t
Diagram and Certificate of Examination of Privately-owned Locomotives r unning on own wheels (B.R. 87262).
E Allx other
c cases
e must be referred t o the Civil Engineer for consideration.
s
s A Privately-owned
i
v
locomotive " dead" on its own wheels must not travel at a speed exceeding 25 m.p.h.
e at. any point, and must stop for examination purposes at least once every 25 miles.
A locomotive weighing 30 tons and over must be marshalled next the train engine, and i f more than one such
S locomotive
h
is attached to a train they must be separated by at least tw o ordinary wagons (more if the Engineer
o requires
u them ) .
locomotive weighing below 30 tons must be marshalled next within the rear brake but not more than three
l such A
d
locomotives are to be grouped together ; or i f required by the Civil Engineer they must be separated by a
a stipulated num ber of ordinary wagons.
l
o
c
4. A C C O M P A N Y I N G A N D I N D EM N I T Y.
o
m
o
(a)
privately-owned locomotive forwarded " dead" must be accompanied by a competent caretaker, and in case
t Each
suchi a manv is not provided by the sender or owner, arrangements must be made by the appropriate District
e Officer with the District Motive Power Superintendent to provide a Fireman or other competent person to travel
n on t he footplate.
The person in charge of the locomotive, whether provided by the owner or the Railways, must travel on the
o footplate of the locomotive and not in any other par t of the train. I f the destination is on another Region, the
t Railway caretaker will travel to the junction at wtlich transfer is to be effected, unless otherwise arranged, and the
c appropriate
o District Officer must arrange i n advance with the other Regions concerned t o provide caretakers
over thei r respective Regions. I n every case possible, the caretaker should be provided by the sender or owner.
n (See (c) fbelow regarding Indemnity.)
(b)
locomotive forwarded under i ts ow n pow er must be accompanied by a Railway D r i ver
o Each Privately-owned
r
and Fireman provided by the District Motive Power Superintendent t o tak e charge thr ough t o destination,
m or i f for another Region, to the junction at which i t will be transferred, unless otherwise arranged. A competent
i man pr ovided by senders or owners must accompany each locomotive forwarded under its ow n pow er and
n travel on the footplate. ( See (c) below regarding Indemnity).
(c) Indem ni ty Form (R.C.H. 60040), properly completed. must be obtained in respect of all journeys of locomotives
a travelling under own power and also caretakers in charge of locomotives travelling under own power or " dead" .
(d)
l A sender's or owner's man travelling with a locomotive must have a pass issued to him thr oughout to destination
this m ust be obtained fr om the appropriate District Officer by the most expeditious manner. On the r etur n
l
journey the m an m ust pay his far e.
SECTIONAL AP P E NDI X
C ON T EN T S
PAGE i i
DELETE:—
Engine Whistles
Table Z
P
a
g
e
s
(Separate publication headed "CODES OF ENGINE WHISTLES, dated 27th Apr il, 1952, now applies.)
257- 332
PAGES iii—v
LIST O F L IN ES A N D N U M B ER A L L OC A T ED T H ER ET O.
From
To
I NSERT:—
Shafthoime Junction
DELETE:—
Upton 8( N or th Elmsall ( W r angbr ook)
I NSERT:—
Upton & N or th Elmsall ( W r angbr ook)
DELETE:—
Leeds ( W or tl ey Junction L.N.E.R.)
I NSERT:—
Headingley (Cardigan Road)
DELETE :—
Knaresborough (Goods)
I NSERT:—
Knaresborough (Goods)
DELETE:—
Pickering (Mill Lane)
I NSERT:—
Kirbymoorside
DELETE:—
I NSERT:—
DELETE:—
Darlington ( Hopetown)
I NSERT:—
Darlington ( Hopetown)
DELETE:—
Murton
INSERT:—
Murton
DELETE :—
Hexham ( Bor der Counties)
Alnmouth
Tweedmouth N or th
Morpeth (Station)
INSERT:—
Alnmouth
Coldstream
Tweedmouth N or th
Morpeth (Station)
Scotsgap
PAGE vi
INSERT:—
•••
•••
•••
Line N o.
Knottingley (excluding Knottingley)
lA
Hickleton & Thurnscoe
12
Moorhouse & South Elmsall
12
Northallerton ( Stati on a n d Bor oughbr i dge
Road) via Ar thington and Sinderby, including
W ortley to Geldard, Panal Junction to Bilton,
via Starbeck.
20
Northallerton ( Stati on a n d Bor oughbr i dge
Road), via Ar thington and Sinderby, including Starbeck N or th t o Bi l ton.
20
Pilmoor N or th
29
Brafferton
29
Pilmoor South ( N or th and South Curves)
34
Pilmoor South ( N or th and South Curves)
34
Seamer W est
35
Thornton Dale
35
Penrith ( Eden Val l ey Juncti on) i nc l udi ng
Merrybent Branch, For cett Branch.
49
Penrith ( Eden Val l ey Junction) Incl udi ng
Forcett Branch.
49
Durham Elvet
65
Sherburn N or th
65
Allendale
•
Coldstream
Kelso...
Morpeth (Wansbeck)
75
83
84
85
Ainwick
W ooler
Carham
Reedsmouth Junction
Rothbury
Riccarton South Junction...
83
83A
84
85
86
87
N D EX T O GEN ER A L I N ST R U C T I O N S
A
Page
Aerodromes i n vicinity o f R a i l w a y s
Safety
INSERT:—
A r r a n g e m e n t s
Detonator Placers—Emergency
Draw-ahead Signals i n Semaphore Areas
3
5
4
I NSERT:—
Engine and Engine and Brake Vans coupled together
1
5
21
SECTIONAL AP P E NI * X -- i n u e d .
IN D EX T O G E N E R A L I N S R I O N S — c o n t i n u e d .
INSERT:—
Lines Equipped for Passenger Train W orking over which there is no Booked Passenger Train Service
2
INSERT:—
Propelling of loaded passenger trains into bay platforms
3
INSERT:—
Regulations for W orking on Single Lines by Train Staff and Ticket—Use of Metal Tickets, etc.
3
INSERT:—
Semaphore Areas—Draw-ahead Signals
•
•
•
4
,
PAGES 2 A N D 3.
RULE 55. D E T E N T I O N O F T R A IN S O N R U N N I N G L IN ES.
Referring t o Rule 55. T h e following additional instructions apply:—
Lines n o rmally used b y Freight et c., t rains only and wo rked under Permissive Block, Telegraph B ell o r
" N o Block" Regulations. Rule 55, Notes 6 (11), (iil) and (viii).
Where a Fireman's call plunger or a telephone is provided at signals on Goods lines and Goods Loops, the provisions
of Note 6 (viii) must be complied w i th at all times.
If i n case of accident or other special circumstances Passenger trains are r un over lines not normally used by such
trains, and an intim ation o f such w or ki ng does not appear i n t he W eekly Pr inted Programme o f Permanent W ay
Operations, etc., the Signalman at the diverting poi nt must stop all trains dur ing the time Absolute Block W or ki ng Is
being maintained, advise the trainmen o f the circumstances and instr uct them that the provisions of Rule 55 must be
carried out.
Electr ified Ar eas. I t will not be necessary for the Guard, Shunter or Fireman t o go t o the Signal Box to carry
out Rule 55 when detained at running signals on the N or th and South Tyneside Electrified Areas, but where such signals
are fitted w i th " D " signs to indicate that a telephone or ringing key is provided, use must be made of these appliances
by the Guard, Shunter or Fireman, as the case may be, or where provision of a small platform for the purpose is made,
by the Driver of an Electric train. Should, however, a train be detained an unusually long time at a signal not provided
with a " D " sign, the Guard, Shunter or Fireman must go to the Signal Box.
Other than El ectr i fi ed Ar eas. I t will not be necessary for the Guard, Shunter or Fireman t o go t o the Signal
Box to carry out Rule 55 when detained at the following signals which are not fitted w i th Diamond or " D " signs.
Line N o.
1
Signal Box.
Signal N o.
Nomenclature o f Signal.
Ferryhill N o. 1 . . . . . . . . .
Newcastle Nos. 1, 2 and 3 . . .
49
—
No. 1 Platfor m D ow n Starting.
All signals.
Clause 2 of these instructions headed "Lines Normally
used by Freight, etc., Trains only and W or ked under
Permissive Bl ock, Telegr aph Bel l o r ' N o Bl oc k '
Regulations" will not apply in the case of Passenger
trains when working over No. 3 Up and N o. 2 Down
Goods lines between Nos. 1 and 3 Signal Boxes.
Lines equipped f or Passenger t rain working, over which t here is no booked Passenger t rain service.
The following is a list of Absolute Block lines equipped for Passenger train wor king over which ther e is no booked
Passenger tr ain service. Passenger trains may, however, be allowed t o use these lines w i thout special arrangements,
but Rule 55 must be carried out for all trains at all times.
Lines.
Line N o.
To
From
Down.
20
Starbeck N or th
BiIton
Bilton
Starbeck N or th
Main
24
Cutsyke
Castleford Centr al
Castleford Centr al
Cutsyke
Main
26
Pontefract Baghill
Pontefract Monkhill
Pontefract Monkhill
Pontefract Baghill
Main
Moorthorpe Station
South Ki r kby
South Ki r kby
Moorthorpe Station
Main
Up.
Main
Main
Main
Main
22
SECTIONAL 4F'1
3
Line N o.
DIX—continued.
From
Lines.
To
Down
42
Leeming Bar
Bedale
Bedale
Leeming Bar
Main
43
Norton-on-Tees W est
Norton-on-Tees East
Norton-on-Tees East
Main
45
Norton-on-Tees South
Ferryhill N o. 3
Ferryhill N o. 3
Norton-on-Tees South
Main
Ferryh I I (Coxhoe)
Spennymoor (Merrington Lane)
Spennymoor (Merrington Lane)
Ferryhill (Coxhoe)
Main
Ushaw M oor (New Brancepeth)
Brandon Colliery (Dearness Valley)..
Brandon Colliery (Dearness Valley)...
Ushaw M oor (New Brancepeth)
Main
Durham (ReIly Mill)
Lanchester
Lanchester
Durham (ReIly M ill)
Main
Consett South
Consett N or th
Consett N or th
Consett South
Main
Hartlepool (Cemetery N or th)
Castle Eden W est
Castle Eden W est
Hartlepool (Cemetery Nor th)
Main
Ferryhill N o. 1
Ferryhill (Coxhoe)
Ferryh I (Coxhoe)
Ferryhill N o. 1
Hartlepool
Castle Eden W est
Ryhope Grange
Ryhope Grange
Castle Eden W est
Main
Ferryhill (Tursdale)
Leamside (Auckland)
Leamside (Auckland)
Ferryhill (Tursdale)
Main
Lintz Gr een
Scotswood Br idge
Scotswood Br idge
Linzt Gr een
Main
High W estwood ( W estwood)
High W estwood (Hamsterley)
High W estwood (Hamsterley)
High W estwood ( W estwood)
Main
Benton Station
Benton N or th
Benton N or th
Benton Station
Main
Bedlington N or th
Choppington
Choppington
Bedlington N or th
Main
.• • •
54
57
58
63
64
70
73
78
81
Up
Main
Main
Main
Main
Main
Main
Main
Main
Hartlepool
Main
Main
Main
Maim
Main
Main
* Booked Passenger Train Service i n Summer.
PAGE 3.
INSERT:—
PROPELLING O F L OA D ED PASSENGER T R A IN S I N T O B A Y PLATFORM S.
The propelling of trains conveying passengers into bay platforms is prohibited except at the places shown below:—
Line N o.
1
Place
Remarks
Newcastle
Loaded sleeping cars may be propelled i nto No. 7 platform
36
Guisborough
See separate instructions herein
36
Scarborough
See separate instructions herein
72
Hexham
From Up Main line to Up Bay —Platform
23 /
SECTIONAL APPENDIX—continued.
PAGE 3.
INSERT:—
R EGU L A T ION S F O R W O R K I N G O N SIN GL E L IN ES B Y T R A IN STA FF A N D T IC K ET .
Referring t o pages 1-8 of the General Appendix; the instructions on page 8 headed "SINGLE LINES WHERE METAL
TICKETS ARE IN USE" m ust not be applied on the N or th Eastern Region.
NSERT:—
A ER OD R OM ES I N T H E V I C I N I T Y O F R A IL W A YS: SA FETY A R R A N GEM EN T S.
Special colour light signals, as shown below, will function only when an obstruction occurs within the areas bounded
by the signals on the lines in question. Trainmen must act on the aspects given irrespective of the indications shown by
the semaphore signals. W hen a train is br ought to a stand by one of the special signals showing a red aspect, Trainmen
must act in accordance with Rules 55 and 56.
When no light aspects are exhibited in the special signals, Trainmen must w or k to the semaphore signals only.
Line
No.
1
8
9
40
Signal Boxes
between
Acklington and
Chevington. *
Beverley N or th and
Lockington.
Stamford Bridge and
Fangloss.
Oak Tree and Urlay
Nook.
Telephone
communication
with Signalman
at
Signal.
Emergency
Aspect.
Location.
Down
Main R.2.
Red . . .
Below Acklington No. 2 Down Home
signal, 646 yds. South of signal box.
Acklington or
Chevington.
Up Main
R.33.
Red . . .
Below Acklington N o. 33 Up Home
signal, 285 yds. N or th o f signal
box.
Acklington or
Chevington.
Down Main
D.9 . . .
Yellow . . .
Down side of line, 1,220 yards on
approach s i de o f Ar r am D ow n
Distant signal.
Down Main
0.10.
Red
Down s i de o f l i ne, 7 0 yar ds o n
approach s i de o f Ar r am D ow n
Distant signal.
Up Main
U AL
Yellow . .
Up side of line, 260 yards on approach
side of Arram U p Home signal.
Up Main
U.10.
Red
Up s i de o f l i ne, 1,150 yar ds o n
Beverley side of U.11.
Down Main
D.9.
Yellow . .
Down si de of line, 1,110 yards on
approach side of Full Sutton Gate
Box D ow n Distant signal.
—
Down Main
D.10.
Red
Down s i de o f l i ne, 100 yar ds o n
Market W ei ghton s i de o f F ul l
Sutton Gate Box D ow n D i stant
signal.
Stamford Bridge.
Up Main
U.12.
Yellow . . .
Up side of line, 7 yards on approach
side of Fangfoss U p Home signal.
—
Up Main
U.11.
Red . . .
Up side of line, 1,200 yards on Yor k
side of U.12 and 160 yards on Yor k
side of Full Sutton Gate Box U p
Distant signal.
Stamford Br idge.
Down Main
D.4.
Yellow . .
Down side of line, 740 yards East of
Oak Tr ee Down Starting signal.
—
Down Main
D.5.
Red
Down side of line, 1,200 yards East
of D.4.
Up Main
U.6.
Yellow . .
Up side of line, 1,620 yards on W est
side of Urlay N ook signal box.
Up Main
U.S.
Red
Up side of line, 1,200 yards W est of
U.6.
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
—
Arram.
—
Arram.
Urlay N ook.
—
Urlay N ook.
Note.—W hen the Red Emergency Aspect is displayed at signals R2 and R33 It will restore Acklington Colour Light
Distant signals Nos. 1 and 35 t o Caution, I f not already i n that position.
24.
SECTIONAL APPEND! c o n ti n u e d .
PAGE 3.
T R A IN S C O N V E Y I N G PA SSEN GER S R ET U R N I N G T O T O K E N S T A T I O N I N R EA R I N ST EA D O F
PR OC EED IN G T H R O U G H T H E SEC T ION .
Line N o.
DELETE:—
Electric Token Station
to which tr ai n may r etur n.
4
34
36
56
Trains authorised.
Barlow
Kirbymoorside
Cloughton
Etherley, W ear Valley
*Rail motors proceeding to Drax Hales.
Push and Pull tr ain proceeding to Newton.
*Steam coach proceeding to Hayburn VVyke.
*Steam coach proceeding to W i t t o n
*Author ity not to be exercised i f trailer coach attached, nor when worked
l e as a steam train.
PAGE 4.
INSERT:—
e a r .A L S.
SEM A PH OR E A R EA S—D R A W - A H EA DWSIGN
Draw-ahead Si gnal s. Such signals consisting of a miniature arm painted r ed w i th w hi te band, ar e at pr esent
provided bel ow stop signals not contr olling the entrance t o the section ahead. These signals w i l l i n due course be
substituted by calling-on signals and In the meantime the following instruction is applicable t o such signals:—
"Draw-ahead" signals apply when lowered as far as the line is clear towards the next signal only, but the lowering
of such signals does not authorise the next signal t o be passed at danger.
INSERT:—
RULE 35.
Position l i ght signals w i th tw o white lights In a horizontal position for the normal aspect are i n use in the N or th
Eastern Region. T he proceed aspect Is given by tw o white lights at an angle of 45 degrees.
The Instructions shown below and headed " C ol our Li ght Signalled Areas—Subsidiary Signals" apply.
PAGE 5.
INSERT:—
D ET ON A T OR PLACERS—EM ERGENCY.
Referring t o pages 83 and 84 of the General Appendix. T he following additional instructions apply:—
W ake' s M achine.—Oper ated by pull-up stir r up ( to hold one detonator w i th ti n plate clips, affixed t o a lath).
The instructions i n the General Appendi x regarding Types " B " and " C " apply.
The clearance between the bottom of the lath carrying the detonator and the top of the rail, when the detonator
is
position
orin
bel
ow this.for exploding, Is e in., and Signalmen m ust r epor t at once to the Station Master i f the clearance is above
Only the special detonator s w i th tin-plate clips must be used. Each detonator must be securely fixed t o the end
of the lath, the clips being passed thr ough the holes in the lath, then tur ned upwards and folded together over the top of
the detonator by means of the key provided for the purpose; the key must then be withdrawn and the loop of the clip
made flat with the top of the detonator . T he clip must then be Indented at each underside of the lath.
A supply of not less than six but not more than twelve detonators with ti n clips, and also not less than six laths for
each machine, must always be kept on hand.
A special ty pe of detonator placing machine is i n use at the undermentioned locations:—
Signal Box.
N
o
.
D e n o m i n a t i o n .
High Str eet . . .
7
F r o m Greensfield, Home.
Greensfield . . .
1
4
F r o m Newcastle t o Durham U p Home.
1.
•
•• • • •
2
1
F r o m Newcastle t o Leamside U p Home.
42 F r o m Durham t o Down Slow Pass. Star ting.
45 F r o m Leamside t o Down Slow Pass. Star ti ng.
...
4
6
F r o m Leamside t o Down Main Starting.
Pt
•
••
4
8
F r o m Durham t o Down Main Starting.
Darlington South . . .
D
S
4
3
O u t e r Home fr om Geneva.
Northallerton . . .
N . 1 3 3
D o w n Main.
Naburn . . .
6
D o w n Main Starting.
11 U p Main N o. 1 Bl ock Home.
The detonator placing machine works in conjunction w i th the relative signal. A detonator is normally on the rail
when t he signal is at Danger and is removed automatically w hen the signal is cleared.
pp
•
•• •
•• •
••
In the case of the Greensfield and High Street signals detailed above, should i t be necessary in emergency to replace
the
detonators on the rail after the signal has been lowered, the Signalman must operate the switch provided for that
purpose.
The following general instructions must be observed:—
detonator
provided
for use w i th the machines ar e obtainable from the Stores Superintendent. T hey
mustThe
notspecial
be used
for anysother
purpose.
When placing detonators In the machines car e must be taken t o see that the metal strips are, wher e necessary,
bent in such a manner as to secure the detonators In the machines. T he clearance between the bottom of the detonator
and the top of the rail, when the detonators are In position for exploding must not exceed one-eighth inch and the person
placing the detonators In the machines must adjust the detonators concerned i f the clearance is more than this.
The detonators fixed In the machines must be replaced on the fir st Monday in each m onth and a record made In
the Occurence Book when the change Is made. Those taken from the machines must be r etur ned t o the Stores Super.
intendent w i th a special label supplied for the purpose.
Station Masters must frequently examine each detonator placer under thei r control, In or der to satisfy themselves
that the detonators ar e i n good condition, and should I t be found on making such examination that one ( or both) of
the
detonators
damaged
In the slightest degree, fresh detonators must be at once substituted and the matter reported
to the
Districtare
Oper
ating Superintendent.
The machines
m ust
tested at weekly
intervals
by the
lineman In conjunction w i th the signalman on duty , and
the lineman
will be
heldbe
responsible
for seeing
that this
is done.
The Ganger or other authorised person, when walking his length, must immediately advise t he signalman o f any
detonators which have been exploded, damaged or displaced i n any detonator placer on his length, and In addition must,
25
when passing the signal box, r epor t on the condition of the machine and detonators. O n commencing duty each day the
Signalman must, as far as is practicable, satisfy himself that the apparatus correctly places the detonators on the line.
If at any tim e the detonators ar e exploded, the signalman must take steps t o have fresh detonator s immediately
placed i n the apparatus and will be held responsible for doing so. T he signalman m ust record In the Occurence Book
the time when and the train by which they are exploded, and the time when they are replaced. H e must also r epor t the
circumstances t o the Station Master, a r epor t afterwards being sent t o the District Oper ating Superintendent.
A supply of not less than 12, but not more than 24 detonators must always be kept on hand.
PAGE 5.
EN GIN EER 'S R A IL M O T O R S.
A M EN D p ara. 4 t o read: —
A m otor must not exceed a speed of 25 miles per hour, and must be kept in gear when running down steep gradients.
All existing speed restrictions must be observed. W hen running out of gear every care must be taken to keep the vehicle
under complete contr ol.
PAGE 6.
A M EN D : —
Paragraph 9, reference t o Rule 55A t o read Rule 56.
INSERT the fol l ow i ng as par agr aphs 10, I I , 12, 13, 14 and IS.
10. W hen an Engineer's Rail M otor is approaching or leaving a station and a train is standing on the next adjoining line,
or when approaching any place where shunting operations are in progress on the next adjoining line or siding, the
driver must, on approaching and whilst passing, sound the Klaxon hor n. T he Klaxon hor n must also be sounded t o
caution lengthmen and other s on or near the line on which a rail m otor is r unning, and on enter ing or emerging
from a tunnel, and m ust be repeated occasionally when passing thr ough l ong tunnels.
11. W her e an Engineer's Rail M otor has t o pass in the trailing direction over runaway or spring points the dr iver or
man in charge of the m otor must not drive the motor, or allow i t to be driven over such points, until they have been
closed by hand and so held while the m otor is passing ther eover .
12. W her e an Engineer's Rail M otor has to pass over a crossing fitted with movable wings controlled by springs, the driver
or person i n charge of the m otor must not drive the m otor or allow It to be driven thr ough the crossing, but the
engine m ust be shut off and the m otor propelled thr ough by hand.
13. W her e an Engineer's Rail M otor has to pass in a trailing direction thr ough points worked by a hand lever and which
are not already set for the r oute on which the m otor Is travelling, the points must be reversed by the hand lever
before t he vehicle is allowed t o pass thr ough.
14. W hen not in use the m otor and trailer must be removed from the running line, placed well clear of the line and the
wheels secured by chain and padlock; where arrangements are made for motors to be stabled in a siding they must
be k ept i n t he place agreed w i th t h e Traffic Depar tm ent, and t he chains m ust be passed r ound t he r ai l and
secured thr ough the wheel of the m otor .
15. W hen a m otor Is removed from the r unning line the person In charge of the m otor will be responsible for seeing
the line Is clear, and for advising the signalman accordingly.
PA GE 7.
Between
Line N o.
Signal Box.
INSERT: —
IA
2
4
5
10
34
DELETE:—
49
62
INSERT:—
62
DELETE:—
65
INSERT:—
65
DELETE:—
72
INSERT:—
72
DELETE:—
84
INSERT:—
84
85
87
Knottingley South (L.M.R.)...
.
Boothferry Road . . .
.
.
Potter's Grange . . .
.
.
Boothferry Road . . .
.
.
King Geor ge D ock . . .
.
.
Holderness Drain N or th . . .
.
Alexandra Dock . . . . . .
.
King Geor ge Dock . . . . . . . . .
Springhead (Spring Bank N or th) . . .
W i ng
...
Piercebridge ( M er r ybent)
.Cemetery
.
W est . . .
.Seaham ( Hawthor n)
.Cemetery W est
.
.Murton
Pittington
.
.Murton
.Prudhoe
.
.Prudhoe
.Tweedmouth N or th
.
.Tweedmouth N or th
Morpeth (Wansbeck)
.Reedsmouth
Wall
Reedsmouth
Reedsmouth
Kielder
Signal Box.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
Shaftholme Junction.
Potter's Grange.
Engine Shed Junction.
Oakhill Junction.
Salt End.
Victoria Dock.
King Geor ge Dock.
Holderness Dr ain N or th.
Stairfoot.
Kirbymoorside.
Barton.
Cemetery N or th.
Dawdon, vi a Seabanks
Blackhall Rocks.
Hetton.
Durham Elvet.
Sherburn N or th.
Scotby.
Wetheral.
Sprouston.
Carharn.
Scotsgap.
W oodburn.
Border Counties.
Wark.
Bellingham.
Riccarton South Junction.
--/
SECT! ON/6.- AP DI X — c o n ti n u e d .
PAGE 8. E N G I N E E R ' S RAIL M OT OR S
A M EN D Clauses Nos. 10 and 11 t o read
u e d .
1 6
and 17.
Clause 16, 2nd Li ne. A M E N D "Clauses 1 to 9 will apply" to read "Clauses 1 t o 15 will app ly".
Clause 17, 4th Li ne of Pr eam ble. AM EN D "Clauses 1 to 5 of the General Instructions" to read "Clauses 1 to 6 a n d ,
to 15 of the General Instructions".
PAGE 9.
A M EN D Clause N o . 12 to read N o . 18.
Clause 18, 1st Li ne. AM EN D "Clause 11" to read "Clause 17" .
PAGE 1 0 . '
1 Engineer's Rail Motors are authorised to work over the following lines in accordance with the Instructions
contained in Clauses 10, I I an d
AM EN D "Clauses 10, 11 and 12" to read "Clauses 16, 17 and 18" .
Between
Line NO.
49
49
DELETE:—
62
Signal Box.
Signal Box .
Line on which run-offs
are situated.
Broomielaw
Barnard Castle East
Down.
Barnard Castle East
Broomielaw
Up.
Hartlepool (Cemetery N or th)
Ryhope
Up and D ow n.
Engineer's Rail M ot ors may also wo rk over t he following lines in accordance wit h Special Instructions
Issued in each case:—
Between
Line N o.
DELETE:—
10
PAGE I
DELETE:—
I.
12
22
34
INSERT: —
34
DELETE:—
35
36
INSERT:—
36
DELETE:—
65
75
79
1NSERT:—
79
DELETE:—
83
I NSERT:—
83A
85
86
87
Signal Box.
Signal Box.
Stairfoot.
Springhead (Spring Bank N or th)
Moorhouse and South Elmsall
Nidd Br idge (Ripley)
Hickleton and Thurnscoe.
Pateley Bridge.
Gilling.
Kirbymoorside
Giffin&
Carlin H ow . . •
Seamer W est.
Skinningrove Zig-Zag.
Carlin H ow Mineral Office
Skinningrove Zig-Zag.
Hetton
Pittington.
West Gosfor th
Allendale.
Ponteland.
South Gosfor th W est
Ponteland.
Alnwick
Coldstream.
Coldstream
W oodburn
Scotsgap
Falstone
Bellingham
Wall
W ooler.
Scotsgap.
Rothbury.
Kielder.
Falstone.
Wark.
•••
PAGE I 1.
IN ST R U C T ION S F O R W O R K I N G O V E R C O L O U R L I G H T SIGN A L L ED A R EA S I N C O N N E C T I O N .
W I T H T H E M A I N T EN A N C E O F SIGN A L L IN G.
A M EN D : —
Clause 13 to read Clause 19, and in third line of that Clause AM EN D "Clauses 1 to 9" to read "Clauses 1 to 15" .
PAGE 12.
19".
Italicized notes at the top of the page, "Clauses 1 t o 9" to read "Clauses 1 to 15" and "Clause 13" to read "Clause,
27
SECTIONAL APPEND n t i n u e d •
PAGE 13.
H EA T IN G O F ELEC T C T R A IN S.
DELETE exi sti ng Instr uctions and IN SER T :—
North Tyneside.
Instruction boards have been placed on the barrier railings at N o. 2 platform, Central Station, Newcastle, and at
Gosforth Car Sheds, for the information of the Guards as to the heating to be in service, i f any.
The Station Inspector of the East End of Newcastle Central Station must alter this board according to the temperature
shown by the thermometer on the Inspectors' Cabin at the buffer stop end of Nos. 2 and 3 platforms. T he time at which
the alteration is made must be entered on the record and the Car Shed staff instructed to alter their board in a similar way.
Temperature above 50 degrees—Heaters OFF.
Temperature between 40 and 50 degrees—Half heat. M ai n Switch only ON.
Temperature below 40 degrees—Full heat, both Switches ON .
The Station Master, Newcastle, must advise the Car Sheds the temperature readings at 5.0 a.m., 9.0 a.m., 1.0 p.m.
and 5.0 p.m. daily.
South Tyneside.
Instruction boards have been placed on N o. 2 Signal box, facing East along Nos. 5 and 6 platforms, at the Central
Station, Newcastle, on the platform at South Shields, and at the Gosforth Car Sheds for the information of the Guards as
to the heating to be i n service, i f any.
The Station Inspector, Nos. 5 and 6 platforms, Newcastle Central, must alter this board to conform with the information
received fr om the Station Inspector at the East End, of the temperature shown by the thermometer. H e must enter on
the record the time at which the alteration is made and instruct South Shields Station to alter their board in a similar way
Temperature above 50 degrees—Heaters OFF.
Temperature between 40 and 50 degrees—Heaters SMALL coil onl y.
Temperature bel ow 40 degrees—Heaters LARGE coil only.
The Station Master, Newcastle, must advise the Station Master, South Shields, at 5.0 a.m., 9.0 a.m., 1.0 p.m., 5.0 p.m'
and 9.0 p.m. each day, particulars of the heating to be used on the Electric trains.
The large coil Is contr olled by N o. 1 switch.
The small coil is contr olled by N o. 2 switch.
PAGE I S.
R U N N I N G O F SPEC IA L T R A IN S O U T SI D E N O R M A L TRAFFIC H O U R S.
Line N o.
DELETE:—
83
84
INSERT:—
84
85
Between
Alnwick and Coldstream.
Tweedmouth and Kelso.
Tweedmouth and Carharn.
Morpeth and ReedsmDuth.
PAGE IS.
M O VEM EN T O F R A IL VEH IC L ES B Y R OA D M O T O R VEH IC L ES.
Line N o.
DELETE:—
36
77
INSERT:—
77
DELETE:—
83
Place.
Scarborough Goods Station.
Newcastle—Quay.
Newcastle—Quay and Quayside Yard when tractors ( tow motors) used.
Hedgeley Station.
INSERT ( after Coupling and Uncoupling o f Engines):—
EN GIN E A N D EN G I N ES A N D BRAKE V A N S C OU PL ED T OGET H ER .
Except where prohibited in the Sectional Appendix (Local Instructions) and in the Route Availability of Locomotives
Booklet, tw o engines and not more than tw o brake vans may be run coupled in any of the following positions:—
1st
2nd
3rd
4th
Van
Van
Engine
Engine
Van
Van
Engine
Engine
Van
Van
Engine
Engine
To be signalled 1 pause 1 pause
—
Van
Engine
Engine
3 followed by 2 pause 2.
—
Van
Engine
Engine
Van
Van
Engine
To be signalled 1 pause 1 pause 3.
S H U N T I N G EN G I N ES I N YA R D S—H EA D A N D T A IL LA M PS.
DELETE —Rule 123 applies.
SECTIONAL APOE
IX—continued.
PAGE IS.
LINESIDE FIRES.
DELETE exi sti ng instr uctions and IN SER T :—
Referring to pages 98 and 99 of the General Appendix; the following information supplied by the Forestry Commission
shows danger zones where the risk of lineside fir e appears greatest:—
Location o f Zone.
County and For est.
York—Londesborough ( Line N o. 15)
Selby and Driffield—one m ile south o f Enthor pe
Station.
Pickering and W hi tby l i ne- 4 miles of line between
Levisham and Goathland with special danger points
Rosedale and N ew ton Dale.
York—Rosedale ( Li ne N o. 33)
Durham—Wynyard (Eaglescliffe)
(Line N o. 40).
Durham—Wynyard ( Li ne N o. 44)
Durham—Chopwell (Beamish)
(Line N o. 60).
Northumberland—Ray ( Line N o. 85)
Northumberland—Kielder (Line N o. 87)
PAGE 16.
Line No.
DELETE:—
1
Periods when risks
are greatest.
Location.
Pegswood Station
February t o June
Inclusive.
February t o J une
inclusive. I n dr y
years also July to
September.
Darlington and Saltbur n l i ne- 1 m i l e o f line East February t o J une
Inclusive.
of Eaglescliffe Station.
Thornaby (Bowesfield) and W ellfield l i ne- - 3 miles February t o J une
of line south of Hurworth Burn Station.
Inclusive.
Birtley (Ouston) and C onsett N or th m i l e
February t o June
east o f Beamish Station.
I
Morpeth and Reedsmouth line—Summit Cottages February
t o J une
n
inclusive.
to near Knowesgate.
c
Hexham ( Bor der Counties) and Riccarton l i ne— February t o J une
between Falstone and Deadwater.
l
Inclusive.
u
s
i
v
M AIL B A G A PPA R A TU S.
e
.
Distance fr om Station.
Up or Down Side.
Down
25 yards south.
PAGES 16 and 17.
NUM BER TABLETS F OR E X C U R S I O N A N D SPEC IA L T R A IN S.
D ELETE paragraphs 5 ( b) , (c), ( d) , (e), and 6, and IN SER T :—
5. ( b ) In the case of trains thr ough the N or th Eastern Region between the Scottish and the Eastern Regions, tablets
must not be removed i n the N or th Eastern Region.
5. ( c ) Trains from the London Midland Region will carry London Midland Region tablets (bearing the same number as
that scheduled i n the N or th Eastern Region programme or advices for the wor king i n the N or th Eastern Region),
so far as the places at which London Midland Region engines are changed for Nor th Eastern Region engines. London
Midland Region tablets are not suitable for use on N or th Eastern Region engines, and the Station Master at the Tablet
Depot Station must, ther efor e, send the necessary tablets t o the engine-changing points concerned. T he Stati on
Master at the Tablet Depot Station must also make such arrangements as are necessary to ensure the pr om pt r etur n
of the N or th Eastern Region tablets removed from trains at the engine changing point with respect to trains returning
to the London Midland Region.
5. ( d ) In the case of trains from the Eastern and Scottish Regions to the N or th Eastern Region, the tablets belonging
to those Regions must not be removed at the Junction Station but must be allowed to wor k with the train thr ough
to its destination and be sent back to the owning Region on the return working, or, i f no r etur n working, despatched
as quickly as possible to the Tablet Depot Station.
5. ( e ) In the case of trains from the N or th Eastern Region to the Eastern or Scottish Regions, the tablets should be
allowed to wor k through with the train to its destination and be br ought back to the N or th Eastern Region on thee
return working, or, i f no r etur n working, despatched as quickly as possible to the Tablet Depot Station.
6. G uar ds must ensure that tablets are removed at the place wher e N or th Eastern Region engines are changed f o r
London Midland Region engines in the case of trains to the London Midland Region, and on r etur n to the N or th
Eastern Region, must see that the tablets are replaced at the engine-changing poi nt.
PAGE 17.
Under Sunderland District AM EN D "Seaham H ar bour " t o read "Seaham".
PAGE 18.
C H A R GIN G CARRIAGES W I T H GA S.
DELETE:—
Line N o.
30
Place.
Scarborough.
29 )
SECTIONAL A P P E N c o n t i n u e d .
PAGE 21.
D IM EN SION S O F L OA D S.
W idth of load as
defined i n heading of
table.
Height in centre
from r ail.
Height at side
from r ai l .
DELETE:—
Murton and Durham
Elvert Branch
9 ft. 0 i n.
13 ft. 6 i n.
11 f t . 0 i n.
IN SER T :
Murton
and Sherburn N or th
-
9 ft. 0 i n.
13 ft. 6 i n.
11 f t . 0 i n.
W idth o f l oad as
defined i n heading
of tabl e.
Height i n
centre fr om
rail.
Height a t
side fr om •
rail.
9 ft. 0 i n.
12 ft. 11 i n.
10 ft. 9 i n.
Railway.
D ELETE:
-PAGE 22.
footnote
INSERT:—
r
e
F r e i
g h t
Railway.
S
t
o
c
Morpeth
(Station) and Reedsmouth
kScotsgap and
Rothbur y
(
L (. Bor der Counties) and
Hexham
South Junction.
N Riccarton
.
D IM EN SION S O P L OA D S.
E .
INSERT:—
R
.
a
M IN ER A L W A G O N S F I T T ED W I T H H O PPER ED B O T T O M D O O R S A N D E N D B R A K E L EVER S.
n
The loading of hopper ed bot t om door mineral wagons fitted w i th END BRAKES must be confined to traffic for :—
d
(I) Shipping points in the N or th Eastern Region on the Nor th side of the River Tyne.
o
(ii) Shipping poi nts at Blyth.
(iii) Places South of the River Tyne and N or th of Northallerton; and the Burdale limestone quarries.
t
(iv) Carlisle: Ir on W or ks i n the W or ki ngton and Barrow-in-Furness districts: and the por ts of W or kington and
h
Maryport.
e
PAGE 23.
r
C
o W OR K IN G O F OT H ER C OM PA N IES M A IL VA N S OVER T H E N .E. OPER A T IN G AREA.
AM
m ENpD . Clause ( 1) t o r ead:—
t h e South, as f ar as Yo r k only, by any route."
a "From
n
DELETE:—Clause
( 5) .
i
e
s
. 24.
PAGE
)
OT H ER C OM PA N IES' C O A C H I N G ST OC K W O R K I N G O V E R T H E N . E. OPER A T IN G A R EA .
IN SER T Immediately after heading:—
Guards wor king trains conveying London Midland, Scottish ( ex London Midland), W ester n or Southern Region
stock i nto the N or th Eastern Operating Ar ea must carefully examine thei r trains at the junction station or at the last
stopping station befor e traversing any of the restricted sections shown below. I f any vehicle on the tr ain exceeds the
agreed dimensions the attention of the Station Master or person in charge must be called to the matter, and arrangements
made for the traffic to be transhipped. I f the traffic cannot conveniently be transhipped and permission is given as shown
below for the vehicle to work over the section concerned subject to certain restrictions being applied, the vehicles may be
allowed t o w or k ov er t he section o f l i ne and the appropriate restriction enforced, but particulars must be passed
forward immediately to the District Control in order that the necessary information can be given to the appropriate signal
boxes, etc. I n all cases a special r epor t must be submitted to the District Operating Superintendent.
•L.M.R. Stoc k . Clause 1. D ELET E four th paragraph.
PAGE 26.
D ELETE entr y under G.W . Stock, and IN SER T :—
Former G.W . Stock is accepted, subject to the following conditions:—
Dimensions of Stock.
Conditions of Acceptance.
N ot exceeding 9 feet in width over projections and
60 feet i n l ength over headstocks.
May w or k except over the following sections:—
Newcastle—Carlisle.
Ferryhill—Castie Eden W est.
N ot exceeding 9 feet 0,1 inches in width over handles
and 56 feet i n l ength over headstocks.
May work from the Western Region by all routes into York and
Hull or to Berwick and Scarborough via York.
N ot exceeding 9 feet 3,1 inches i n w i dth over pr ojections and 56 feet in length over headstocks.
May w or k from the W estern Region by all r outes i nto Yor k and
Hull or to Newcastle and Scarborough via Yor k.
Horse Boxes
May work over all lines of the Nor th Eastern Operating Area.
30
SECTIONAL APP I X — c o n t i n u e d .
PAGE 26.
D IVER SION O F O T H E R C OM PA N IES' ST OC K B Y A N A L T ER N A T IVE R O U T E O W I N G
T O A C C ID EN T O R O T H E R C A U SE.
Line No.
1
If obstruction between
Alternative r outes.
DELETE:—
Pitmoor, Starbeck and Ripon. ( D ur i ng Daylight only.)
York and Thirsk
PAGE 28.
LAMPS F OR REPAIRS.
LINES O T H E R T H A N T H O S E PEN ET R A T IN G I N T O L O N D O N M I D L A N D R EG I O N .
Lamps requiring repair must be dealt w i th as under :—
Signal lamps, Level Crossing Gate lamps, and Platform lamps must be addressed to the District Engineer concerne&
Lamps used on D ock Lighters must be addressed t o the Storekeeper, Dockyard, Hull.
Other lamps must be addressed t o the Locomotive W or ks Manager, N or th Road, Darlington.
LINES PEN ET R A T IN G I N T O L O N D O N M I D L A N D R EG I O N .
Lamps at stations on lines penetrating Into the London Midland Region must be addressed as shown below:—
Type.
Tilley and Hand signal
G
e
n
e
r
a
l
Stores, Der by.
Signal
Level Crossing Gate
1
Loc al Signal Engineer's Department.
Platform
L
o
c
a
l
Distr ict Engineer.
Office
L
o
c
a
l
District Engineer (except for Aladdin lamps, dealt with by
Signal Box
5
G e n e r a l Stores, Der by) .
Tail
Side ( L.M . l am ps and E . / N
cisterns.
.
Gener al .
..E. s l i d e s
A
ecor
be kept of the num ber of lamps sent for repairs, and the address labels m ust show clearly the
a rfrom
n dwhich
dm ustthe
station
lamps have been forwarded, and the number in each consignment. Those sent by passenger train
mustCalso have. the standard fr ee passenger tr ai n traffic label B.R.87655 affixed.
All
& lamps sent to the Locomotive W orks Manager, N or th Road, Darlington, must be accompanied by Advice N ote
8.588 fr om the forwarding station. Each class of lamp must be entered on a separate form.
W must be. taken when sending defective hand, roof, tail or side lamps to be repaired, to send all parts belonging
Care
to them
reflectors, etc. O i l m ust not be l eft i n the vessels.
S , e.g.,
t cisterns,
o
r burners,
e
All
repaired
lamps must be r etur ned t o the places for which they are letter ed unless other disposal or der s have
s
,
been received.
D
e
r
b
y
.
BARROW S, R U L L EYS A N D R U L L EY SH A FTS F OR REPAIRS.
Barrows, Rulleys and Rulley Shafts.
D E L E T E : —
Roney Repair Shop, Greensfield W or ks, GATESHEAD.
INSERT:—
Works Manager, W ALKER GATE.
SUNDERLAND DISTRICT D E L E T E : —
Other Stations.
R
u
l
l
e
y
Repair Shop, Greensfield W or ks, GATESHEAD.
INSERT:—
Works Manager, W ALKER GATE.
NEWCASTLE DISTRICT
LOCAL I NS T RUCT I O NS
PAGE 29.
L IN E N o . I — SH A F T H O L M E T O B ER W IC K ( M A R SH A L L M EA D OW S) .
BETW EEN SH A F T H O L M E A N D B ER W IC K .
EN GIN ES W O R K I N G M A I N L I N E T R A I N S R E Q U I R I N G ( I ) O T H E R T H A N N O R M A L P I L O T
ASSISTANCE, O R ( 2) T O C H A N G E EN GIN ES.
A M E N D paragraph 1 t o read as under :—
(I) W hi s tl es t o be gi ven b y D r i ver s:—
N
o
.
(a) F or assisting engine other than nor m al pi l oti ng assistance ( not applicable at Dar lington
of Whistles.
1 cr ow .
(b) T o change engines ( *)
3
crows.
* Assistance is not provided at Darlington Station and Drivers must be prepared to
change engines.
When thr ough unforeseen circumstances Drivers of Up trains not booked t o call at Darlington r equir e a change
of engines at that point they should br ing their trains to a stand on the thr ough line at Darlington South, at which poi nt
the changeover will be effected.
(c) T o cancel ei ther (a) or ( b)
3
short, 1 long.
PAGE 30.
DELETE:—
"Ferryhill No. 2" from the list of signal boxes, at the top of page.
•••777.%•.;,T,
311
SECTIONAL APPINDIX—continued.
YOR K .
PAGE 30.
1NSERT:—
YOR K S I G N A L B O X . R ul e 55. W hen a tr ain is br ought to a stand at any signal oper ated fr om Yor k Signal
Box and equipped w i th a telephone, the Trainmen m ust wait tw o minutes before communicating w i th the Signalman.
This modifies the second paragraph of Clause (a) of Rule 55 so far as these signals are concerned.
YOR K YA R D NORTH.—Provision of Loudspeakers.
Two-way loudspeaker apparatus has been provided at the following points:—
(1) O n N o. 122 signal ( D ow n Shunting line, locally called U p Beck), N or th of Severus Bridge.
(2) O n the Telegraph Post immediately N or th of signals 131 U p W arehouse t o U p Yar d, 132 U p Warehouse t o U p
Mineral, 133 U p W arehouse Starting South of Severus Bridge.
Method o f Communication: T rain men o r Ground St af f t o Signalmen.
The apparatus is always tuned i n for use by trainmen and gr ound staff, and ther e are no switches to oper ate; you
speak towards the loudspeaker.
(a) B e w i thi n, say, 20 yards of loudspeaker.
(b) Gi ve i denti ty and position—Trainmen t o give engine number.
(c) Signalman will acknowledge and messages can be exchanged.
Speak Slowly and Dist inct ly.
In or der to avoid annoyance to residonts in the neighbourhood of the railway, especially during night time, the use
of the loudspeaker apparatus and the volume of speech should be kept dow n t o the absolute minimum necessary t o
ensure efficient wor king.
The loudspeakers ar e sensitive and pi ck up all sounds over a w i de range. D r i ver s ar e requested t o avoid noise
caused by the emission of steam fr om engines when near the loudspeakers and thus assist i n the efficient wor king of
the apparatus.
YOR K STA TION .—Elect rical bells and indicators for starting trains.
PAGE 30.
Reference to "Signal Boxes" to read "Signal box ."
PAGE 31.
DELETE:—all entries and INSERT: —
Guards' "Ready in Front " Indicators.
These are provided as shown below:—
Platform.
P
l
u
n
g
e
r
Indicator.
.
(1) O n gr oup of four pillars
(2) O n second pillar from South end
9
(
14 (Southbound)
1
)
(
1
On Gantr y of Signal Y.131.
O n thir d pillar N or th of Footbridge On ni nth pillar South of Footbridge.
(2) O n t w e l f t h p i l l a r N o r t h o f
Footbridge.
)
Speci al Gantr y o n South e n d
Platform.
of O n second pillar South of Footbridge.
(2) O n si xteenth pi l l ar South o f
Footbridge.
14 ( N or th or East bound)
( 1 )
O n Footbridge
14 (North or East bound)
( 1 ) O n Footbridge
(2) O n s i x t eent h p i l l a r S o u t h o f
Footbridge.
On sixteenth pillar South of Footbridge
Special Gantry on South end of Platform.
15 (Southbound)
(
1
)
Speci al Gantr y o n South e n d o f
Platform.
(2) O n fi r s t pi l l ar South o f Refreshment Rooms.
On first pillar South of Footbridge.
15 ( Nor thbound)
(
1
)
O n fi r s t pi l l ar South o f Refreshment Rooms.
(2) U n d e r Footbridge
Special a n t r y on South end of Platform.
16 (Southbound)
(
1
)
Speci al Gantr y o n South end o f
Platform.
On N or th side of Footbridge.
(2) O n fi r s t pi l l ar South o f Refreshment Rooms.
16 (Northbound)
(
1
)
On fi r s t pi l l ar South o f Refreshment Rooms.
(2) O n Nor th side of Footbridge.
Starting Bells and Indicators t o D rivers.
Starting Bells and Indicators, operated by green plungers, are provided on the Platforms as shown bel ow : Platform.
8.S. (Southbound) ..•
Bell and Indicat or.
Plunger.
Pillar near buffer stops of No. 7 Platform...
Pillar South of South Post Office l i ft,
(1) Pi l l ar next to Nor th end lift
(2) Pi l l ar near buffer stops o f N o. 3
Platform.
Second pillar from South end.
(3) O n gr oup of four pillars
8.N. ( N or th or East bound)
Pillar near buffer stops of No. 7 Platform
Pillar South of South Post Office lift.
9.S. (Southbound)
(1) O n t w e l f t h p i l l a r N o r t h o f
Footbridge.
(2) O n thir d pillar Nor th of Footbridge
(3) O n n i n t h p i l l a r S o u t h o f
Footbridge.
Special Gantry near third lamp standard
South of Umbrella Roof.
9 (Northbound)
On ninth pillar South of Footbridge
On twelfth pillar N or th of Footbridge.
9.N. ( N or th or East bound)
(1) O n ninth pillar South of Footbridge Special Gantry Nor th end.
(2) O n thir d pillar N or th of Footbridge
1
0
1
1
On four th pillar South of Footbridge
12
On thir d pillar Nor th of Footbridge
Special Gantry near thi r d lamp standard,.
South of Umbrella Roof.
On wall near buffer stops of No. 11 Special Gantr y South end.
Platform.
(2) O n fifth pillar from end of Umbrella
Roof.
•••
Special Gantry Nor th end.
14 (Southbound)
Under Footbridge
On s i x t eent h p i l l a r S o u t h o f
Footbridge.
14 (Eastbound)
Under Footbridge • • •
Footbridge.
SpecialGantr y on N or th e J of Platform
14 (North or East bound)
Special Gantr y o n South end o f O n second pillar South of Footbridge.
Platform.
Footbridge.
15 ( Nor th or East bound) •••
Special G a n t r y S o u t h e n d o f O n first pillar South of Footbridge.
Platform.
15 (Southbound)
Under Footbridge . . •
16 ( Nor th or East bound)
Special Gantr y o n South end o f
Platform.
On N or th side of Footbridge.
16 (Southbound)
On N or th side of Footbridge S p e c i a l Gantry on South end of Platform.
The Guard i n charge must operate the appropriate bell push t o indicate to the fr ont Guard, or Driver i f there is
only one Guard, that the train is ready to start.
If the starting signal is at danger, i t is not necessary for the Driver to whistle as the signal will be cleared w hen t he
Signalman is in a position to allow a train to depart.
Communication from Platforms to Signal Box.
Yellow bell pushes communicating with the Signal Box are fixed as shown bel ow : Yellow Bell Pushes. Plat f orms to Signal Boxes.
• Five.
Platform N o.1
Three.
Platform No. 8.5.
Platform No. 13
Three.
8.N. ••• Four.
Pt 1 4 . N .
Three.
14.S.
9.N.
Three.
Two.
9.S.
Five.
15.N.
5
Two.
10
Three.
15.S.
Two.
11
Three.
16.N.
7
Two.
12
Two.
16.S.
Pt
2
tt
3
PP
4
PP
6
PAGES 31 A N D 32.
DELETE:—
YOR K STA TION .—M et hod of Cautioning.
•••
•.•
.••
•••
•••
•••
•
Two.
Three.
Four.
Three.
Three.
Three.
Three,.
33
PAGE 32.
INSERT:—
C L IF T ON M O T I V E P O W E R DEPOT.—Loudspeaker Communicat ion bet ween O u t l et C abin an d L o c
Departure Sidings.
h
Enginemen i n charge of locomotives en r oute t o the Locomotive Depar tur e Sidings must stop and r epor t t o the
.
OUTLET CABIN and give details of trains t o be wor ked by the locomotive. Unless otherwise instructed they must
proceed via the Shed Spur Line to the appropriate Locomotive Departure Siding. Locomotives must be br ought to a stand
clear of the exi t from each siding and should not draw forward from the Departure Siding unless called forward thr ough
the Loudspeaker. Instr uctions will also be given over the Loudspeaker, when i t is necessary, t o alter the sequence of
locomotives on the Locomotive Depar tur e Sidings.
YOR K O L D S T A T I O N .
The ground frame consists of a single lever which operates a semaphore signal situated on the South side of Queen
Street Bridge. T he signal protects the level crossing from Queen Str eet t o the Signal and Telegraph Stores.
I n sThe
t r normal
u c t i oposition
ns
of the signal is " OF F " and when i t is required to use the level crossing or overhead conveyor
the
f staff
o ofr the Signal and Telegraph Stores, when on duty, will be responsible for seeing that the signal will be placed
in
position.
N ogengine or vehicle must pass the signal when i n the " O N " position, and care must be taken
w thedur
o " Oi ng
rN "shunting,
k i nloose
that,
vehicles ar e not allowed t o pass the signal or t o obstr uct the crossing.
G
r
o
u
BETW EEN Y O R K ( C L IF T ON ) A N D D A R L I N G T O N .
n
d
AM EN D heading t o r ead:—
F
r
a
BETW EEN Y O R K A N D D A R L I N G T O N ,
m
e
A
R
R
A
N
GEM
EN
TS
I
N
C A SE O F F A IL U R E O F C O L O U R L I G H T SIGN A L L IN G.
a
York
Supply
A
rea.
t
DELETE
S
iexisting gentr y and INSERTS—
n "Between
a
l
Copmanthorpe
and Nabur n Signal Boxes and Signals D.3 and D.3S ( both inclusive) in the Down dir ection
Between
a
Signals S.102 and U.4S ( both inclusive) and Copmanthorpe and Nabur n Signal Boxes i n the U p direction.
PAGE
33.
n
Opening
d
o f Temporary B lock Posts.
T
e
AM EN D existingl paragraph t o r ead:—
e
g
r
the sections, Signalman t o be provided when necessary at Skelton Bridge stati on' , at the gr ound
a "Also
p toNshorten
h side
frame
at the
or th
of the bridge (Down side), and i n the Station Master's office at C ow ton."
S
t
PAGE 34.
o
r
D A R L IN GT ON .
INSERT:—
e
s
D. A R L IN GT ON N OR TH .—Engines stopping t o t ake wat er.
When Drivers stop to take water on No.1 or No. 2 Down Goods or the Down Main line, they must immediately advise
the Signalman at Darlington Nor th by the telephone on the signal post near the water column.
PARKGATE SIGN A L B O X
ity is given for the Calling-on Signal reading i nto the U p Goods Loop to be cleared, i f circumstances permit.
-after Author
a tr ai n has been br ought near l y t o a stand.
M e t h o d
o
f
INSERT:—
AYCLIFFE.
c a u t i o n i n
g
T r a i n s .
PRESTON SI G N A L B O X— R u l e 39(a):—In clear weather, when the Up or Down Loop line is clear t o t he
-outlet signal, Goods trains ( other than Class C or D Goods) will not be br ought quite or nearly to a stand before the Up
Main
Home signal, or Down Main to Down Loop Home signal, is lowered: Rule 39(a) is modified accordingly.
R uto Up
l Loop
e
4
4
(
b
FERRYH ILL.
DELETE
)
: existing instructions.
INSERT:—
B ETW EEN N o . 3 A N D N o . 2 SIGN A L B OXES. Block working is not in force for any of the lines in t he
Yard Area between No. 3 and No. 2 signal boxes.
Drivers must exercise caution when running on these lines and be prepared to stop clear of any obstruction. W rong
direction working is authorised on any line EXCEPT THE D OW N MAIN GOODS LINE. Before a movement is allowed
to take place in the wrong direction on any line for which signals are provided, the Yard Foreman will be responsible
for
obtaining t he permission of the Signalman concerned and coming t o a clear understanding with any other staff
concerned.
rER R YH ILL N o . I SIGN A L B OX— Gro u n d Telephone. A ground telephone to No. 1 signal box Is provided
opposite the North End of Ferryhill Station Up Platform at the converging point of Nos..1 and 2 Down Goods Lines from
No. 2 Signal Box.
On arrival of an engine rounding its train on either No. 1 o r No. 2 Goods Line the fireman must telephone No.1
Signal Box and the engine must not return in the facing direction towards No. 2 Signal Box until instructed to do so by
No. 1 Box signalman.
In the event of the fireman being unable to contact the signalman at No. 1 Box on the telephone, he must proceed
to No. 1 Signal Box for instructions.
PAGE 35
INSERT:—
BIRTLEY.
O U S T O N SPRINGS.—Henley's Telegraph W o rks Sidings. T h ree Sidings are provided for dealing with the
above firm's traffic. T hey are situated between Birtley Station and Ouston Signal Boxes and the trailing connection off
the Up Main line is worked by ground frame, controlled from Birtley Station Box.
Each siding will accommodate approximately 20 wagons. T he m ost southerly siding, I.e. that nearest the wor ks,
Is dead ended and must be used only for the firm's inward traffic. T he most northerly siding will be used by the firm for
their outward traffic only. The centre line and the approach line from within the gate will be used for shunting purposes
by British Railways' engines. British Railways' engines must not use the curve leading over the concrete bridge.
34
SECTIONAL APP DI X —c onti nue d.
Each siding is wor ked by loose levers. T her e is also a r un off at the bottom of the approach siding leading to the
exchange sidings from the connection, and Guards must ensure that these points are pr oper ly laid befor e thei r train is
propelled over them towards the exchange sidings.
Messrs. Henley's private locomotive will w or k all traffic between the works and the exchange sidings.
A Stop Board situated just within the Tur nout leading to the local Shunting lines is lettered as follows:—
Side Facing N or t h. B r i t i s h Railways' engines must not pass this board.
Side Facing South. M e s s r s . Henley's locomotive must not pass this board i f a British Railways' engine is i n
the sidings.
Traffic for Messrs. Henley's Siding must be marshalled next the engine when the tr ain leaves Birtley, and the total
number of wagons on the train (including Messrs. Henley's traffic) must not exceed 30 and Guard's van.
NEW CASTLE.
INSERT:—
NEW CASTLE N o . 2 SIGN A L B OX— M et h o d o f Cautioning Trains ( Rule 44 (b) ). Aut horit y has been
given for the proceed aspect of Nos. 11 ( N o. 8 Platform), 19 and 61 ( N o. 9 Platform) Calling-on signals to be exhibited,
if circumstances permit, after a train has been br ought near l y to a stand.
N EW C AST LE N O . 3 SIGN AL BO X— C al l i ng Back Signals. Calling back signals are provided near the buffers
of Nos. 11, 12 ,13, 14 and 15 platforms.
These signals control only l i ght engines, and onl y when such l i ght engines are at the buffer stops. Al l other trains
must be regarded by signalmen as being outside the control of these signals, and they must act accordingly.
INSERT:—.
NEW CASTLE CENTRAL STATION.—Engines following trains out of Bay Platforms Nos. I t o 7 inclusive:
Rules 97 and 90.—The driver of a light engine after having worked the train into one of the Bay Platform lines Nos. 1 to 7
inclusive m ust be prepared, unless he receives instructions to the contrary, t o follow the train or empty carriages out
of the platform line as far as the Platform Starting signal. H e must exercise caution and keep the engine under such control
as to be able to stop at once, clear of the last vehicle of train he is following in the event of that train being br ought to a
sudden stand or its speed reduced. T he engine must stop at the Platform Starting signal unti l i t has been replaced t o
Danger behind the preceding movement and the appropriate signal lowered for the further movement of the light engine.
NEW CASTLE N O . I SIGN A L B OX—Engines crossing from N o. 4 Platform Line to N o. 5 Platform Line
or vice versa:—The driver of an engine which has passed through the crossover road at the buffer stop end of the platform
must, after the ground frame has been replaced to normal, proceed immediately to the Platform Starting signal, or as far as
the line is clear. If, for any reason, an engine does not immediately proceed towards the Starting signal, or as far as the line
is clear, drivers must not move thei r engines forward until authorised to do so by the Station Inspector or other person
in charge.
PAGE 36.
INSERT:—
NEW CASTLE CENTRAL YARD.—Electric Bells and Indicators for Starting of Trains. In order to expedite
the starting of trains a visual indicator is provided for Nos. 3 and 4 Up Goods lines on the extreme left of the bridge of
signals at the West end of Newcastle Central Yard underneath the two direction signals reading from the Up Goods lines
to the South and W est. The indicator is Illuminated by push buttons situated on the outside wall of the Central Yard
Inspector's Offi ce.
The visual indicator shows No. 3 READY or No. 4 READY when the respective push button is actuated, thus:—
No. 4 READY
No. 3 READY
The Yard Inspector on receipt of the necessary intimation from the Guard, must operate the starting indicator and
Drivers may accept the indicator as a signal to start instead of a hand-signal or green light referred to in Rule 142 (b).
PAGE 37.
INSERT:—
H EA T ON ,
SO U T H SI G N A L B O X— R u l e 108. Pro p ellin g M o vemen t f rom U p M ain and U p Tynemouth lines
Into H eaton Yar ds. U p to 35 wagons may be shunted from Heaton South Yard to Heaton N or th Yard via the Up and
Down M ai n lines w i thout a van i n r ear .
Banner repeating signals are provided on the Up Main and Up Tynemouth lines to repeat the aspects of signals No. 66
and N o. 8 respectively, and for shunting movements with not more than 35 wagons a Driver should commence to propel
when the appropriate Banner signal is cleared and w i thout a hand signal being given by the Guard or Shunter.
Where more than 35 wagons are Involved a van must be attached and the necessary hand signals given.
H E A T O N N E W YAR D . Bef or e the engine is detached fr om a tr ain after arriving on the Heaton N ew Yard
Down Reception line or Nos. 1, 2 or 3 Marshalling Sidings, the Guard must pin down three wagon brakes next to the van
in addition to putti ng on the van brake.
DELETE:—
Instructions headed " ST A N N I N G T O N ST A T I O N SI G N A L B O X — U p Goods Independent".
INSERT:—
M ORPETH ST AT I O N S I G N A L B O X — D o w n Siding. A Down Passenger train may be shunted to the Down
Siding provided that line is clear thr oughout. A l l points t o be passed over in the facing direction and not fitted w i th
facing poi nt lock and bar must be secured by clip or scotch.
M OR PETH ST A T ION SIGN A L B OX— B lyt h and Tyne Branch Line. An Up Passenger train may be shunted
to the Blyth and Tyne Branch line.
A L N M O U T H ST A T I O N SIGN A L B OX— D o wn Branch Line. A Down Passenger train may be shunted to
the Down Branch Line. A ll points to be passed over in the facing direction and not fitted with facing point lock and bar
must be secured by clip o r scotch.
35
PAGE 38.
DELETE:—
SECTIONAL A P P E N D I X
c ontinue d.
Instructions headed " R EA L S I G N A L B O X — U p Goods Independent ".
I NSERT:—
BER W IC K ST AT I O N S I G N A L B O X — U p Goods Loop. A n U p Passenger tr ain may be shunted t o the U p
Goods Loop provided the line is clear thr oughout.
PAGE 40.
INSERT:—
L IN E N o . 5.— H U L L YA R D S A N D D O C K L IN ES, ET C .
H U L L IN W A R D GOOD S YARD.—W orking Arrangements East End of Nos. I and 2 Down N ort h M ain
lines
W est.and N os. I , 2, 3 and 4 Depart ure lines.—For Trains and Light Engines proceeding towards Dairycoat es
Nos. I and 2 Down N o rt h M ain Lines.
The exits from Nos. 1 and 2 Down N or th Main lines are controlled by colour light signals. T he normal aspect of these
signals will be " O N " . Dr iver s o f trains and l i ght engines must on arrival at these signals immediately telephone the
Signalman at Dairycoates W est giving destination and l i ne occupied.
Nos. I , 2, 3 and 4 Depart ure Lines.
The exits from the Departure lines are controlled by Stop Boards, fl oodl i t at night.
The Stop Boards r ead:—
STOP.
TELEPHONE SIGN ALM AN . G I V E D ESTIN ATION
AND NUMBER OF DEPARTURE LINE.
DRIVERS M UST N O T PASS THIS BOAR D UNLESS
A GREEN LIGH T IS EXHIBITED O R VERBAL PERMISSION OBT AIN ED F R OM T H E SIGN ALM AN .
Drivers of trains and light engines departing from the East end of the yard must on arrival at the Stop Boards immediate?)
,Nos. I and 2 Down N o rt h M ain Lines and N os. I , 2, 3 and 4 Depart ure Lines.
t e The switches to the colour light signals and to the Stop Boards must be kept in the " O N " or "STOP" position and
turned t o the "PROCEED" position i f circumstances permit, only after the Dr iver has r epor ted on t he telephone.
l e The switches must be r etur ned to the " O N " or "STOP" position immediately the train occupies the track circuit
ahead
p h of the colour light signal or Stop Board.
t o proceed will, i f circumstances permit, be given by the Signalman oper ating the appropriate switch
o
n Permission
which
will cause a green light to be exhibited at the colour light signal or Stop Board.
e
t
R EPOR TIN G O F T R A IN S, L I G H T EN GIN ES, ET C .
h
e
Yard
Inspectors
must
advise
District Contr ol of all trains or engines departing from the East or W est ends of the
Yard.
S
i
ARRIVAL
O F T R A IN S O N R EC EPT ION L I N E S F R O M T H E D IR EC T ION O F H ESSL E H A V E N .
g
Trains arriving must be br ought to a stand befor e fouling the connections at the East end of the Reception lines,
n engine to await the arrival of the Guard and not to leave for the Shed unti l the Driver has been instructed by the
the
Yard
Immediately a train is br ought to a stand on the Reception line, the Guard m ust secure the train by the
a oinspector.
use
f the hand brake.
l
m SER T —
IN
a
St. Andrew's Dock Signal Box:—Method of Cautioning.—Drivers of trains leaving the Outward Yard for the
n
direction
of Hessle East either via the Up Goods line or the Shunting Neck will not receive any caution (verbal or otherwise)
and
a must be prepared to stop short of any obstruction before reaching the Home signal worked from Hessle East Box.
t
PAGE
40.
D
L IN E N o . 6.-,--HULL ( W EST PARADE) T O W IT H ER N SEA .
a
INSERT
i
W IL M IN GT ON .
r
W I L M I N G T O N S T A T I O N A N D D A N S O M L A N E S I G N A L B OXES.— W o rkin g o f U p and D o wn
y
Goods
lines betw een. I f either of the Goods lines is partly occupied by a short train or light engine and a second one
iscrequired to enter, the Signalman at the end where the train Is to enter must satisfy himself that ther e is room for the
second
train to stand clear of the points giving access ther eto. Pr i or to any train or wagon being allowed to enter the Up
o
Goods line from the W ilmington Goods Yard, or to any engine returning to its train on the Down Goods line fr om the
a the Foreman, or the Guard i f no Foreman is on Duty, must obtain the permission of the Signalman at Dansom Lane.
Yard,
t As soon as the Goods line is clear, the advance Signalman must inform the Signalman in rear. I n the event of a train
being
e shunted clear of the Down Goods line i nto W ilmington Yard, the Foreman, or Guard i f no Foreman is on duty,
must advise the Dansom Lane Signalman that the line is clear, i n or der that the l atter may advise the Signalman at
s
Wilmington.
Should par t of the train only be shunted from the Down Goods line i nto the Yard, leaving the rear por tion
onWt he Down Goods line, the Signalman at Dansom Lane m ust be advised accordingly.
e
PAGE
41.
s
L IN E N o . 8.— H U L L ( W EST PARADE) T O SEA M ER W EST .
INSERT:—
t
BEVERLEY.
g
i CHERRY TREE S I G N A L B O X — R ul e 39 (a). Exem pti on from the provisions of Rule 39 (a) has been given i n
respect of Cherry Tree Down Intermediate Home Signal No. 28 slotted with Beverley Station Down Starting Signal No.30,
v trains booked to stop or terminate at Beverley Station. Drivers of such trains who sight this signal in the Clear position
for
must
be prepared to find the next Stop signal in the Danger position.
i
n
g
d
e
s
PAGE 43.
LIN E N o . I0.— H U L L
SC U LC OA TES SIGN A L B O X .
/
SECTIONAL S k i
6
P
N GEOR
D I XGE
— D OC K )
( KE
IN G
H U. L L .
c o n ti n u e d
T O C U D W O R T H A N D ST A IR F OOT .
DELETE the instructions headed "Goods Yar d U p Siding Point s" and "Cannon St reet Branch".
I NSERT:—
Goods Yard t o Cent ral Elect ricit y Aut horit y Sidings Points. These points are controlled from a one-lever
ground frame, the lever being secured by a bolt and padlock, one key of which is kept at the Shunter's cabin and the other
at Sculcoates Signal Box. Guar ds or Shunters wor king trains which r equir e admission to the sidings must fir st obtain
one of the keys, and on completion of the work, must restore and pr oper ly lock the points in the normal position. T he
key must then be returned to its proper place. T he Signalman at Sculcoates must be Informed when the movement is about
to take place and when the operations are completed.
Before the Central Electricity Authority' s private locomotive is allowed to pass from their sidings to Sculcoates Goods
Yard, the gr ound frame points must be set i n the pr oper position for the movement and the Signalman at Sculcoates
informed. T he Signalman must lower No. 18 signal for the movement, providing no train is entering or is about to enter
the Goods Yard fr om the Main line. T h e Signalman must be advised when the locomotive has r etur ned t o the C.E.A.
sidings and the gr ound frame points must be restored t o the normal position.
When Sculcoates Signal Box is about to close, the Yard Foreman must set the ground frame points for the C.E.A.
sidings and the lever must be padlocked with the points in that position. T he Signalman, before closing, must lower No. 18
signal to allow the C.E.A. locomotive to pass to and from the Goods Yard as necessary.
When Sculcoates Yard opens each morning, the Yard Foreman must advise the Signalman at Sculcoates i f the C.E.A.
locomotive is in the Goods Yard.
Cannon St reet Branch.
1. A marker board, lettered "Drivers of engines must stop at this point until instructed to proceed by the Pilot Guar d"
is fixed alongside the Down Branch line clear of the fouling point with the Up Branch line.
The line between the marker board and the stop signal at the entrance to Cannon Street Yard is wor ked under the
Regulations for W or king on Single Lines by Pilot Guard, on pages 15 and 16 of the General Appendix. T h e Read
Shunter at Cannon Str eet will act as Pilot Guard, subject t o the following instructions.
2 A l l trains must be br ought to a stand after entering the Cannon Street Branch and the Guard ( or Fireman in the case
of a light engine) must inform the Signalman at Scuicoates when the train has arrived clear on to the Branch complete
with tail lamp attached. T he Driver must br ing the train to a stand w i th the van as nearly as possible opposite the
telephone. W hen this has been done, the Pilot Guard must personally instruct the Driver to proceed as far as the
stop signal at Cannon Street. T he Pilot Guard must accompany each tr ain.
3. I f for any reason the tr ain does not proceed immediately the Guard m ust advise the Signalman at Sculcoates by
telephone.
4. S houl d i t be necessary for a second tr ai n to enter the branch end at Beverley Road, this may be done provided the
Signalman at Sculcoates is satisfied that ther e is room for i t to stand clear of the Main lines and within the marker
board, but in such cases the Sculcoates Down Main t o Branch Home signal must be kept at Danger by the Signalman
at Sculcoates unti l the train has been br ought to a stand as an indication that the tr ain must only proceed t o the
marker board to await the Pilot Guard. Any train additional to the booked trains for Cannon Street must be advised
to the Pilot Guard by the Signalman at Sculcoates immediately he receives information that a train has left any poi nt
for Cannon Str eet.
5. T h e Stop signal at Cannon Street is worked from a ground frame by the yard staff and must not be lowered until they
are in a position t o deal w i th the train. A l l trains must be br ought to a stand at this signal and Guards must pin
down brakes as necessary.
6. T h e signal must be placed t o Danger as soon as the engine has passed i t. T he yard staff must inform the Signalman
at Sculcoates as soon as a train complete with tail lamp has arrived within the signal.
7. I n all cases where an incoming train is stopped at Cannon Street ground frame signal for the purpose of dividing the
train and the engine and fr ont portion have been detached, the rear por tion of such a train may be allowed to gravitate
into the arrival roads under the following conditions:—
(a) T h e operation must not be performed except under the supervision of the Shunter in charge at the time.
(b) N o t more than 15 vehicles must be worked in this manner at one time.
(c) T he Guard must travel in the brake van and only release the brake sufficiently to allow the train to start. Brakes
must also be pi nned dow n as necessary.
8. B e f o r e a train leaves Cannon Street, the permission of the Signalman at Sculcoates must be obtained on t he tel ephone
by the Pilot Guard, who must then authorise the Driver to proceed as far as the Branch Home signal wor ked from
Sculcoates Signal Box and accompany the train t o that point.
D R A X.
PAGE 45.
INSERT below paragraph headed "OUSE BRIDGE SIGNAL BOX" :—
OU SE S W I N G B R I D G E
Coal for use at the Bridge Engine
House is tipped from the Down line thr ough the Bridge i nto the bunkers on the
Bridge Jetty, the Bridge being swung
T I PforP this
I N purpose.
G
ODrivers
F of trains conveying coal for the Bridge Engine House must
come to a stand at Drax Abbey Signal
Box
where
theLGuard must inform the Signalman ther e of the circumstances. T h e
C
O
A
Signalman at D r ax Abbey m ust then advise the Signalman at Ouse Br idge accordingly, after which the train will be
signalled forward in accordance with Block Regulation 8.
On receipt of the "Is Line Clear" signal, the Signalman at Ouse Bridge must then act in accordance w i th Clause 1 of
Circular 0.3172, dated the 7th September, 1937.
The train must come to a stand on the approach side of No. 4 Down Home signal, and after a clear understanding has
been reached with the Trainmen as to the movements to be carried out, the wagons of coal may be detached and the Driver
must be handsignalled by the Guard to draw them forward on to the Bridge, where they must be secured over the bunkers
by brakes and sprags. N o. 4 Down Home signal should then be replaced to Danger.
The engine and fr ont por tion of the train must then be detached and drawn forward clear of the fixed por tion of the
Bridge, and when the Signalman has received an assurance that this has been done and all is in order to permit of the Bridge
being swung, he must send the Special Blocking Back Signal 4-2-4 to the Signal Box in rear for the Up line.
To enable the Bridge to be swung in order to tip the coal, the Signalman must make use of the emergency release.
When the Bridge is br ought back i nto alignment and secured for rail traffic, the engine and fr ont por tion must be
handsignalled back to the wagons on the Bridge and, after attaching, handsignalled back to the rear portion of the train.
The "Obstr uction Removed" signal must be sent for the Up line, after which the Trainmen will be instructed by the
Signalman to proceed.
Care must be taken to ensure that during the detaching movements any por tion of the train left unattended is firmly
secured.
S E CTI O NAL AP P I X — c o n t i n u e d .
Pages 45/46.
DELETE existing instructions headed
" B ETW EEN BRIERLEY A N D SH A F T ON JU N C T I O N ( L.M . R.) SIGN A L B OXES."
and
INSERT:—
BETW EEN BRIERLEY A N D SH A F T ON J U N C T I O N (L.M.R.) SIGN A L B OXES.
The lines between Brierley and Shafton Junction (L.M.R.) Signal Boxes are not worked under any Block System. A
stop signal, worked by Shafton Junction, controlling the entrance to the " U p and D ow n" Through Siding is provided at the
Brierley end of this Siding.
A miniature Distant signal acting as a Repeater signal and worked from Shafton Junction Signal Box is situated 256 yards
in rear of the Shafton Junction Home signal. T hi s Repeater signal is provided w i th a board letter ed " R " in black on a
yellow background and affixed to the post. W hen the Repeater signal is in the Clear position i t denotes that the Home
signal is also "C l ear ", but Drivers must be prepared to stop at the Down Main Starting signal.
Before entering upon the "U p and Down" Through Siding, trainmen of shunting movements and of through movements
from Brierley to Shafton Junction must utilise the adjacent bell communication in accordance with instructions exhibited
to inform the Signalman at Shafton Junction Box of their requirements.
Through movements from Brierley to Shafton Junction must travel over the Up Through Siding between Brierley and
the above-mentioned Stop Signal.
All movements proceeding along the " U p and D ow n" Through Siding from the Shafton Junction end must be br ought
to a stand at the Stop Board adjacent to the first pair of Spring Assisted Facing Hand-points giving admission to Brierley
Sidings, and the Driver will be responsible for ensuring that the two sets of hand-points are correctly set for this movement.
Through movements fr om Shafton Junction t o Brierley must travel over the Down Thr ough Siding between the
Stop Board and Brierley Signal Box.
Bell Communication at B rierley Empt y W agon Sidings.
To enable the Guard t o communicate w i th the Driver dur ing shunting operations necessitating drawing on t o the
"Up and D ow n" Through Siding towards Shafton Junction (L.M.R.) an electric bell is provided on the post of the Repeating
Signal situated about 160 yards from the entrance to the " U p and D ow n" Through Siding, which is operated by means
of a bell push on the telegraph post at the exi t from the Empty Wagon Sidings. T he standard code is in operation w i th
the following addition:—
Set back with train complete
5
PAGE 46
C U D W OR T H .
DELETE the instructions under the heading "South Signal Box".
PAGE 47.
N OR T H SI G N A L B O X .
Monckton C o lliery Branch.
DELETE pr es ent instr uctions and I N SER T : —
M onckton C ol l i er y Br anc h. T h e staff section o f the Branch extends fr om t he illuminated s top boar d fi xed
approximately 250 yards from Cudworth N or th Signal Box to Monckton Main Colliery, and the spring points giving access
to the Branch ar e normally laid for the Branch. T he Guard or Shunter in charge of a train requiring to enter the Branch
must see these points ar e correctly laid befor e passing over them .
Trains r etur ning from Monckton Colliery must not pass the Stop Board unti l verbal permission has been obtained
by telephone from the Signalman at Cudworth North.
When i t is necessary owing to congestion at Cudworth N or th Em pty Sidings, the Branch betw een the Stop Board
and Monckton Colliery must be utilised for the storage of empty mineral wagons during the time this line is not required
for ordinary traffic purposes.
In all cases where this Branch is used for standage purposes, the Yard Inspector-in-charge must take possession of the
train staff and retain it under his personal supervision until the Branch has been cleared. W h en this has been done, the
train staff must be returned t o Cudworth North Signal Box, and normal working resumed.
When wagons are left standing on the Branch, the Shunter-in-charge must satisfy himself that sufficient brakes have
been pinned down.
INSERT:—
Royston D epot Line t o Cudworth N o r t h ,f H . & B .
An illuminated Stop Board with telephone is fixed clear of the fouling point with the Monckton Main Branch, to enable
enginemen to communicate with the Signalman at Cudworth North Box (H. & B.), and no engine must pass this Board
until verbal permission is obtained from t he Signalman there, who must also be informed of the direction the engine
requires to run at Cudworth North Box. Engines entering the Depot from Cudworth North must be turned Into the
Loop line by the Enginemen operating the spring points, and the Signalman advised by telephone from the Stop Board
that the engine is inside clear, giving t he engine number.
Engines entering the Depot must travel via the left-hand route on the triangle (indicated by an arrow) whether
turning on the triangle or from the direction of Cudworth North.
Halt signs are fixed facing in each direction on the Loop line, and Drivers entering or leaving the Depot must satisfy
themselves that the line ahead is clear.
Traffic from Cudworth Yard, H. & B. for Royston Motive Depot may be worked via Cudworth North and the Loop
line during daylight and clear weather only, under the same conditions as apply to Light Engines. Loads must not exceed
10 wagons and brake van, and the Guard or Shunter will be responsible for turning the train into the Loop line at the
spring points and for advising the Signalman at Cudworth North when the whole of the train is inside clear.
LIN E N o . I I . — U P T O N A N D N O R T H EL M SA L L ( W R A N GB R OOK ) T O D E N A B Y A N D
C ON ISB OR OU GH .
W R A N GB R OOK .
W R A N GB R OOK SIGN A L B O X .
AM EN D existing instructions t o r ead:—
Guards of trains stopped at W rangbrook Down Denaby Branch Home Signal must immediately carry out Rule 147. •
The telephone fixed near the Up Branch starting signal may be used for this purpose.
8
SECTIONAL AP NDIX —c ontinue d.
PAGES 47 and 48.
BETW EEN W R A N GB R OOK A N D PIC K B U R N & B R OD SW OR T H .
Auxiliary K ey Token Inst rument .
C AN C EL existing instructions ( the auxiliary Token Instr um ent has been withdrawn).
INSERT:—
W R A N GB R OOK .
When i t is necessary for trains to proceed to the Up Starting signal awaiting acceptance by Pickburn end Brodsworth,
the Fireman m ust wait at the signal box for the Token.
PAGE 48.
PICKBURN A N D B R OD SW OR T H .
ST A T ION SI G N A L B O X .
Brodsworth M ain C olliery.
INSERT after closing paragraph o f existing instructions:—
Drivers must not pass between the empty and loaded sidings w i thout the permission of the Railway Shunter.
Such permission will be given as follows:—
Em pty t o Loaded Si di ngs B y 2 rings on the loud sounding bell near the Empty W eigh Lobby.
Loaded t o Empt y Sidings B y verbal instruction.
A Stop Board is erected near the bell.
The Railway Shunter at the loaded sidings must consult the Colliery Shunter at the empty sidings and satisfy himself
that the line is clear before allowing the Driver t o proceed.
No engine•or vehicle must stand foul of the shunting neck at the loaded sidings.
PAGE 49.
L IN E N o . 12.— U PT ON A N D N O R T H EL M SA L L ( W R A N GB R OOK ) T O H I C K L E T O N A N D
T H U R N SC OE.
AM EN D the l i ne heading t o r ead:—
LIN E N o . 12.— U PT ON A N D N O R T H EL M SA L L ( W R A N GB R OOK ) T O M O O R H O U S E A N D
S O U T H ELM SA LL.
ST A T ION SI G N A L B O X .
M O O R H O U SE & S O U T H ELM SA LL.
DELETE heading of second paragraph: "M oorhouse and South Elmsall Signal B ox open".
DELETE whole of last paragraph: "Moorhouse and South Elmsall Signal Box closed".
INSERT:—
FRICKLEY C OL L IER Y B R A N C H H . & B . SEC T ION
W OR K IN G OF N EW SPOIL TIP.
U N T I L FU R TH ER N OT IC E, a new spoil Tip for Frickley Colliery will be in use. T he line to the ti p connects
with the Single line section of the Branch, facing from the direction of the Colliery, and is controlled by a ground frame
electrically released by Moorhouse and South Elmsall Signal Box. A Stop Board letter ed "Engines must N ot Pass Thi s
Board Until Authorised by the Guard or Shunter " is erected near the exit from the Colliery Sidings.
The Single line commencing at the outl et of the Colliery Sidings t o the connections t o the new Spoil Ti p and t o
Moorhouse and South Elmsall must be worked in accordance with the following instructions:M O O R H O U SE A N D SO U T H ELM SALL SIGN A L B O X OPEN .
The Signalman on taking duty must ascertain the state of the Colliery Branch and advise the Weigh Office by telephone
that the Signal Box is open.
BRITISH R A IL W A YS L O C O M O T I VES.
British Railways trains requiring to leave the Colliery Sidings must draw forward t o the Stop Board and must not
foul t he Single line w i thout permission from the Guard or Shunter, w ho must not give such permission unti l he has
ascertained from the Signalman that no other train or engine is approaching from Moorhouse and South Elmsall or from the
Spoil Tip. F or this purpose Guards or Shunters must use the telephone fixed to the Stop Board. T he Signalman must not
give permission for a train to leave the Colliery unless the release lever for the ground frame is in the normal position.
N.C.B. L O C O M O T I V E S
N.C.B. engines requiring to proceed to the new Spoil Tip must not foul the Single line without the permission of the
Signalman at Moorhouse and South Elmsall. Such permission must be obtained on the telephone fixed to the "Stop Board".
W hen working from the Colliery to the Tip the engine must in all cases be leading, and when working from the Tip to the
Colliery the waggons must be propelled, except as shown below:—
If it is necessary owing to its being impossible for the Colliery engine to run r ound in the Tip Siding, for loads to
be propelled from the Colliery to the Tip Sidings, this may be done provided N.C.B. staff have operated the ground
frame and set the points for the Tip Sidings befor e the propelling movement is authorised t o commence. W hen
this is done and the N.C.B. train requires to r etur n to the Colliery Sidings with engine leading, the N.C.B. staff will
remain at the ground frame and ensure the points are kept set for the Tip Siding until the train has arrived complete
on the Colliery Sidings.
On arrival at the Spoil Tip the train must be drawn i nto the Sidings clear of the Single l i ne in accordance with the
instructions posted at the ground frame. T he Shunter in charge of a Colliery engine requiring to leave the Spoil Tip Sidings,
must carry out the instructions posted at the ground frame.
When returning to the Colliery, the Shunter must advise the Signalman when his train is clear of the Single line by
means of the telephone on the Stop Boards.
39
S E CTI O NAL AP P E N I X — c i n u e d •
M O O R H O U SE A N D SO U T H ELM SALL SIGN A L B O X • S E D .
Before leaving duty the Signalman must place the release lever for the ground frame in the reverse position and advise
•the Colliery Weigh Office that the Signal Box is about t o be closed. Colliery engines m ay the w or k t o and fr om t he
Colliery Sidings and the Spoil Tip as required.
PAGE SO.
DELETE instructions headed: " H I C K L ET O N A N D T H U R N SC O E" .
PAGE 51.
LIN E N o . I4.— H U L L T O LEED S, ET C .
HULL.
PA R A GON SI G N A L BOX.—Engines crossing f rom one plat f orm lin e t o anot her, via Ground F rame.
INSERT additional paragraphs:—
When the engines off a double-headed train require to use a crossover road controlled by a platform gr ound frame,
a separate release must be obtained for each engine.
When t he fir st engine has passed thr ough the crossover road the Fireman m ust fully restore the gr ound frame
and advise the Signalman by means of the push button that this movement has been completed. T he Fireman o f the
second engine, when i t is in a position to cross, must obtain a second release. I f both the engines are to proceed to the
same shed, they must be coupled up immediately both are clear of the crossover and proceed to the platform Starting
signal, or so far as the line is clear, as one uni t. W hen engines are required t o proceed t o different sheds, the second
engine must not pass the platform Starting signal unti l such signal has been restored t o Danger and a second proceed
aspect indicated.
PA R A GON SI G N A L B OX.—Plat f o rm St art ing Signals.
PA R A GON SI G N A L B OX.—Plat f o rm St art ing Signals. W h en a Driver is unable t o observe t he aspect
displayed at the Platform Starting signal when ready to start, he may dr aw forward as far as is necessary to enable him
to see the signal. R ul e 127 ( ix) is modified accordingly.
When the engine of a loaded passenger train is ahead of the Platform Starting signal, the "Pr oceed" aspect of the
relative subsidiary signal will be given and the Station Inspector must arrange to instruct the Driver verbally to start,
but this verbal instruction must not be given unti l the Guard has given his hand signal t o start.
When an engine is ahead of the Platform Starting signal dur i ng shunting operations, the "Pr oceed" aspect of the
relative subsidiary signal will be given and the Signalman m ust inform the Yard Inspector or Shunter by means of the
loudspeaker and the Yard Inspector or Shunter must arrange to verbally instruct the Driver accordingly.
DELETE:—
W EST PA R A D E SIGN A L B OX.—M et h o d o f Cautioning.
Drivers of ingoing trains on A and F lines accepted by the Signalman at Paragon under Regulation 5 will be cautioned
at W est Parade i n accordance w i th the Permissive Block Regulations wher e Subsidiary signals are not provided bel ow
Home signals.
INSERT:—
W EST PA R A D E SIGN A L B OX.—R u le 47.—Shunting Signals.
Drivers of engines leaving Botanic Gardens Locomotive Shed on the author i ty of No. 36 Shunting signal w or ked
from W est Parade Signal Box will not receive any W ar ning or Caution at the Signal Box, and m ust be prepared t o
stop shor t of any obstruction.
PAGE 55.
LIN E N o . 20.—LEEDS ( W OR T L EY JU N C T I O N ) T O N O R T H A L L ER T O N , ET C .
AM EN D the l i ne heading t o r ead:—
LIN E N o . 20.—H EA D IN GL EY ( C A R D IGA N R OA D ) T O N O R T H A L L ER T O N , ET C .
LEEDS..
DELETE the instructions headed " B ET W EEN GELD A R D A N D LEED S " B " SIGN A L B OXES" and " A R M L EY
SIGN A L B O X " .
PAGE 56.
H OR SF OR T H A N D A R T H I N G T O N .
B R A M H OPE T U N N E L .
DELETE fifth, sixth and seventh paragraphs of general instructions andI
N SGas
E pr
R oof
T type
— telephones are provided at Nos. 2 and 4 shafts (1,348 yards from the Ar thington end and 1,080 yards
from the Hor sfor th end respectively), and or dinar y type telephones at each end of the Tunnel on t h e D ow n side,
providing communication w i th Ar thi ngton South and Hor sfor th signal boxes.
Gas pr oof type telephones differ from the ordinary type of receiver, and t h e fol l ow i ng instructions shoul d b e
observed:—
To Call: P r e s s button and give code r i ng befor e raising hand combination.
To Speak: R a i s e hand combination unti l flexible tube is vertical and elbow connection is tur ned against the stop.
The following code of rings must be used t o obtain the attenti on of:—
Signal Boxes.
N
o
.
of Rings.
Arthington South
O
n
e
shor t, one long,
Horsforth
O
n
e
long, tw o shor t, one long.
An ordinary type telephone, which provides communication with Horsforth signal box is also provided at the outl et
signal at the end of the Down Passenger Loop about 700 yards fr om the South end of the tunnel.
PAGE 58.
LIN E N o . 23.—M ELM ERBY T O M A SH A M .
MELMERBY A N D M A SH A M .
DELETE:—
W OR K IN G O F PASSENGER T R A IN S.
40/
S E CTI O NAL AP P E * DI X — c ont i nue d.
PAGE 59.
LIN E N o . 25. — N O R M A N T O N ( A L T OF T S) T O Y O R K ( C H A L ON ER S W H I N ) , ET C .
W H IT W OOD BRANCH.
CASTLEFORD.
"The normal position of the Potter y Street Level Cossing gates is across the line and Drivers when approaching
must sound the engine whistle t o inform the person appointed for the duty that the level crossing gates require to be
reversed".
EAST B R A N C H .
AM EN D "Assistant Guar d" i n paragraphs 1 and 2 t o r ead " Guar d" .
PAGES 59 and 60.
LIN E N o . 26.—B OL T ON - ON - D EA R N E ( D EA R N E JU N C T I O N ) T O B U R T O N S A L M O N , ET C .
M IC K L EY.
M IC K LETON M A I N C OL L IER Y SID IN GS SIGN A L B O X .
DELETE pr esent instructions and IN SER T :- Empty W agon Sidings.
The only approach to the Hickleton Main Colliery Empty Wagon Sidings is via the Empty Wagon Branch (previously
known as " N or t h" Empty W agon Branch), and all em pty wagon trains must be propelled over the Branch Into the
Sidings.
In or der that a tr ain or engine may not r un on the Empty Wagon Branch when ther e is an obstr uction on the line,
the Branch is wor ked by Train Staff w i thout tickets. N o engine or vehicle must be on the Branch unless the Driver
as regards an engine, or authorised person as regards any vehicle other than an engine, is in possession of the Train Staff.
Exception.
On r equest by the National Coal Board's man, permission may be given by the Signalman for the National
Coal Board's engine to travel along the Empty W agon Branch line towards the Shunter's Lobby w i thout being in
possession of the Staff, pr ovided:—
(I) T h e Staff is i n possession of the Signalman at Hickleton Main Colliery Sidings Signal Box
and
(ii) A Lever Collar is placed and maintained on the Staff until the line is clear again.
The N.C.B. Staff will be responsible for advising the Signalman at Hickleton Main Colliery Sidings Box when any
movement which has been authorised t o take place w i thout the Train Staff is clear of the Empty W agon Branch line.
The Train Staff is r ound, black, and l etter ed " H i ckl eton Main Colliery Empty W agon Br anch".
During the tim e the Hickleton Main Colliery Sidings Signal Box (S. & K. line) is open, the signalman on duty is
the person authorised t o have charge of the Staff when not i n use.
For empty wagon trains from any direction the Signalman at Hickleton Main Colliery Sidings Signal Box is responsible
for informing the person on duty at the Empty W agon W ei gh Office by means of telephone when a tr ain or engine
is r eady t o proceed towards the Em pty W agon Sidings.
For empty wagon trains from the Dearne Valley lines, the Guard m ust advise the N.E. Region Shunter, w ho will
obtain the "Staff" from the Signalman at Hickleton Main Colliery Sidings Box and hand i t to the Driver.
SIG NALS.
A signal t o r egulate the r unni ng of trains and engines goi ng towar ds the Empty W agon Sidings is situated as
follows:-For the Empty W agon Branch, a shor t distance on the N.E. side of the Colliery Screens.
This signal must always be kept at Danger, except when i t is necessary to lower i t for a train or engine to pass, but
no train or engine must pass the signal until the Colliery Shunter has arrived at the engine, and authorised the propelling
movement, even though the signal may be i n the " OF F " position.
A " Stop Boar d" is provided at the East end of the crossing controlling movements from the Empty Wagon Branch,
near the Overbridge, which Drivers (except those proceeding t o the S. & K. line) must not pass, except on receiving
the author ity of the Railway Shunter.
A second " Stop Boar d" is erected on t he Overhead Br idge centr e buttr ess contr olling movements out of the
Loaded Sidings which Drivers must not pass except on receiving the author ity of the Railway Shunter.
Loaded W agon Sidings.
When m or e than one train is engaged in the Sidings at the same time, before giving the Guard of the second train
permission to commence shunting, the numbertaker (or in his absence the Guard) must satisfy himself that the first engine
has gone beyond the signal applicable to the shunting neck. This instruction, however, will not apply to the L.M. Region
(DV. Section) trains.
In the case of an L.M. Region ( DN.) train being in the National Coal Board's Sidings at the same time as one of the
other Region's trains, the L.M. Region ( DN.) Guard will be held responsible for satisfying himself that the first train has
gone beyond the signal, applicable to the shunting neck, or is clear on to the Dearne Valley line.
In the event of a train coming to a stand owing to the inability of the engine to draw out of the Sidings, the Guard
must go back and arrange w i th the Numbertaker befor e instructing the Dr iver t o set back.
If the signal controlling the exit from the National Coal Board' s Sidings is not pulled off immediately after an engine
requiring to leave the Colliery has whistled, the Numbertaker (or in his absence the Guard) must telephone to the Signalman i n or der to take any instructions the latter may have to give as to his futur e movements.
PAGE 61.
LIN E N o . 28.—YOR K ( SK EL T ON ) T O: H A R R OGA T E ( D R A GON ) .
D R A GON SI G N A L B OX.— H arro g at e Goods Yard .
Should an engine or train be on the Goods line, or working in the Goods Yard and a second train is required to proceed to the Goods Yard, the Signalman at Dragon must not lower the signal for the direction of the Goods Yard until
such tr ain has been br ought nearly to a stand. W hen the signal has been lowered, the Driver must proceed cautiously
as far as the line is clear but must not foul the outgoing line until he receives a hand signal from the Shunter.
During fog or falling snow the Groundsman at Dragon Signal Box must r ender assistance to the Signalman with trains
entering and leaving the Goods Yard.
•41
S
E
PAGE 61.
C
TGH ( GOOD S) T O PI LM O O R N O R T H .
LIN E N o. 29.— KN AR ESBOR OU
I
AM EN D to r ead:—LIN E N o. 29.—KN
O
AR ESBOR OU GH ( GOOD S) T O BR AFFER TON .
N
A
PAGES 61 t o 63.
L
DELETE instructions headed:—KN AR ESBOR OU GH A N D PI LM O O R .
A
P
PAGES 63 A N D 64.
P•
LIN E N o . 30.—YORK ( W A TER W
E OR K S) T O SC A R B OR OU GH , I N C L U D I N G FOSS ISLA N D S B R A N C H .
N
YORK.
D
B U R T ON L A N E SI G N A L B OX.- - Foss Islands Branch.
I
SU BST IT U T E " 6.20 a.m ." for " 8.0
X a.m ." and " 9.0 p.m ." for " 8.0 p.m ." i n paragraphs 1, 2 and 4.
—
PAGE 64.
c
SC A R B OR OU GH .
o
GASW ORKS A N D W A SH B EC K
n SIGN A L B O XES.
t
DELETE existing instructions and iIN SER T :—
When Gasworks Signal Box is n
closed the signals applicable t o Nos. 1 and 2 Reception lines will be lower ed for
the Up and Down directions to enable
u movements to be made between Washbeck and Gasworks Down Carriage Sidings,
and vice versa. T he hand points connecting the Loco. Yard and N o. 2 Reception l i ne m ust be clamped i n t he nor m al
position and be secured by padlock eto prevent their use during the time Gasworks Signal Box is closed, the key for the
padlock so used t o be kept at Gasworks
Signal Box. D ur i ng this period engines must use the connection worked fr om
d
Washbeck Box.
.
When Gasworks Box is closed and i t is necessary for more than one engine to wor k in the Sidings, an Inspector or
Shunter will be placed in charge of the wor k in the Sidings. N o train or engine must leave Washbeck Box for Gasworks
Down Sidings unti l the permission of the person i n charge has been obtained on the telephone.
After permission has been given t o the Washbeck Signalman t o allow an engine or train t o enter the Sidings, the
Inspector or person in charge of the Sidings must not allow a conflicting movement to take place until the engine or train
for which he has given permission has passed clear i nto the Sidings or has been br ought to a stand.
W ASHBECK, FALSGRAVE A N D ST A T I O N B OXES.—M et hod o f cautioning t rains int o p art ly occupied
Bay Platforms at Londesborough Road and Cent ral Station.—Rule 96.
DELETE pr esent instructions and IN SER T :—
W ASHBECK S I G N A L B O X. - - M et h o d o f caut ioning t r ain s i n t o p ar t l y occupied B a y Plat f o r m a t
Londesborough Road Station.—Rule 96.
In clear weather the green handsignal referred to in Rule 96 will not be given by the Signalman at Washbeck, nor
will trains be actually stopped at the signal controlling the entrance to the line concerned. Drivers, after being br ought
near ly to a stand at such signal, must understand that the lowering of the signal authorises them t o proceed cautiously
only as far as the line is clear.
During fog or falling snow the train will be br ought to a stand and the driver verbally informed of the state of the
lines ahead.
INSERT:—
FALSGRAVE SIGN A L B OX.—M et h o d of cautioning.—Rule 44(b).
Author ity is given for the calling-on signal fi xed under the D ow n Hom e signal t o be lowered, i f circumstances
permit and i n clear weather only, after an approaching tr ain has been br ought near l y to a stand.
INSERT: - SC AR BOR OU GH S T A T I O N S I G N A L BO X. — Method of Cautioning.—Rule 44 (b). A u t h o r i t y is given for
the calling-on signal fixed under the Down Home Signal to be lowered, i f circumstances permit and in clear weather only,
after an approaching tr ain has been br ought near l y to a stand.
PAGE 65.
LIN E N o . 32.—M A L T ON EA ST T O DRIFFIELD W EST .
IN SER T:- R U N N I N G O F PASSEN GER T R AIN S. W h e n i t is necessary for passenger trains to w or k over this branch
special arrangements w i l l be made for the District Engineer's staff t o open and close the level crossing gates at the
undermentioned crossings:—
Little Driffield. S t a t i o n Master, Driffield, t o advise t he Ganger residing at Driffield responsible for t he
Garton Baulk. G a r t o n length of the r unning of these trains and the l atter will pr ovide the necessary
Garton Slack.
J
attendanc e.
Green Lane.
T h e
Station Master, Sledmere & Fimber, t o advise the Ganger residing at the crossing of
the r unni ng of these trains and the l atter will attend.
PAGE 66.
BURDALE.
DELETE:—
Attachi ng. O n arrival of the tr ain, the van may be detached and l eft standing on the Main line whilst the tr ain
is attaching the wagons from the Goods Sidings. W hen attaching or detaching from the coal depot, the tr ain must be
left standing on the Main line, this engine only proceeding on t o the Depot.
INSERT:—
Attachi ng—Goods Sidings. O n arrival of the train, the van may be detached and l eft standing on the Main line
whilst t he tr ai n is attaching the wagons fr om t he Goods Sidings.
Attac hi ng and D etachi ng—C oal D epot . W h e n attaching t he engine onl y m ust pr oceed on t o t he D epot.
When detaching only the engine and wagons t o be detached must proceed on t o the Depot. D ur i ng either attaching
or detaching, the tr ain must not be l eft standing on the Main line but must first be shunted t o the Goods Siding.
PAGE 67.
LIN E N o . 33.—R 1LLIN GTON T O W H I T B Y .
W H IT B Y.
DELETE existing instructions headed:—
STATION.—Coaching St ock Restrictions.
INSERT: -ST AT ION .—C oachi ng Stoc k R estr i cti on. Coaching stock exceeding 52 ft. 4 in. i n l ength over body and/or
exceeding 9 ft. 0 in. and 9 ft. 3 i n. i n w i dth over body and handles respectively, m ust n o t be allowed t o w or k i nto
either Nos. 3 or 4 Platform lines while the adjacent platform line is occupied.
Caution must be exercised when per m itted stock is being wor ked i nto ei ther Bay Platform.
INSERT:—
LIN E N o . 34.— K IR B YM OOR SID E T O P I L M O O R S O U T H ( N O R T H A N D S O U T H C U R V E S ) .
BETW EEN N U N N I N G T O N A N D K 1R B YM OOR SID E.
R U N N I N G O F PASSEN GER T R AIN S. W hen i t is necessary for passenger trains t o w or k over this branch,
special arrangements will be made for the District Engineer's Staff t o open and close the level crossing gates at the
undermentioned crossings:—
Harome. S t a t i o n Master, Kirbymoorside t o advise t he Permanent W ay Inspector,
Pockley. P i c k e r i n g , of the running of these trains and the latter to arrange to provide
Starlitts Lane. J
t h e necessary attendance.
PAGE 68.
LIN E N o . 36.—SC A R B OR OU GH F A L SGR A VE T O M ID D L ESB R OU GH V I A G U I S B O R O U G H , ET C .
STA ITH ES VIA D U C T .
DELETE the words " C r i nkl e o r " fr om the thi r d l i ne of paragraph six and fr om the four th and sixth lines Of
paragraph eight.
PAGE 69.
INSERT:—
BETW EEN PR1ESTCROFT A N D N O R T H SK EL T ON .
' W or king of T hr ough Siding:—The entrance and exi t at each end is controlled by the Signalmen at Priestcroft
and N or th Skelton Signal Boxes. T hi s Siding may be used as a thr ough line i n both directions under Absolute Block
conditions by trains not conveying passengers.
Permission must not be given by either Signalman for a thr ough train t o enter the Through Siding at the opposite
end after he has himself received permission for a train to enter the Through Siding at his own end, until such tr ain has
passed clear of the Through Siding.
When passenger trains are worked over this line for any cause, arrangements must be made for working by Pilotman
in accordance with the Regulations for Working on Single Lines by Train Staff and Ticket as set out in Clause 17, on pages 3
4 and 5 of the General Appendix.
Use o f Standage Siding:—The entrance and exi t at each end is, controlled by the Signalmen at Priestcroft and
North Skelton Signal Boxes. N o movement must be made to or from this siding to foul the Through Siding at either end
without the author ity of the Signalman concerned nei ther must movements be made towards this siding from opposite
ends at the same time.
DELETE:—
BETW EEN B R O T T O N A N D C A R L IN H O W .
GOOD S T R AIN S C O U PLED TOGETH ER .—R ul e 134. T w o Goods trains may be r un coupled fr om Redcar
or Saltburn W est to Carlin H ow signal box i n accordance with Rule 134, provided the total num ber of wagons on the
combined tr ains does not exceed 110.
L IN E N o . 37.—B R OT T ON T O SA L T B U R N W EST .
DELETE:—
BETW EEN SA L T B U R N W EST A N D B R O T T O N .
GOOD S T R AIN S C O U PLED T OGET H ER .—R ul e 134. Two Goods trains may be r un coupled fr om Redcar
or Saltburn W est to Carlin H ow signal box in accordance w i th Rule 134, provided the total number of wagons on the
combined tr ains does not exceed 110.
PAGE 71.
LIN E N o . 40.- - D A R L IN GT ON S O U T H T O SA L T B U R N , ET C .
T H OR N A B Y.
BOW ESFIELD SIGN A L B OX.—M et hod o f cautioning.--Rule 44 (b).
AD D t o existing instructions:—
Drivers will not be advised to which signal box they are being cautioned, but must understand that at any time the
section may extend from Bowesfield to Stillington N or th and must be prepared to stop short of any obstruction between
these points.
43
S E CTI O NAV AP P E NDI X o n t i n u e d .
INSERT:—
W OR K IN G B Y B R IT ISH R A IL W A YS EN GIN ES I N A t c PARKFI,ELb W OR K S.
The
connecting
Messrs.
Ashmore,
Benson,,Kase & Company's Sidings t o the Shunting line, and derailers
IMO
R points
E,
B
E N S
O N
,
fixed on the line giving access t o the W orks and o n
P AE
A giving
S
E
& Signalman at Bowesfield is fixed i n the W eigh Cabin.
telephone
communication
w i th the
C When
O i t is desired
.
'to make
S a movement from the Shunting line towards the W orks line or to the W eigh line, the
tGuard
h e or
W Shunter
e i g must,
h
l i signalling
n e the Driver to set back on to either of these lines, arrange for the Firm's employee
S
I to D
I before
N fromGthe line
S and ,hold them i n that position unti l the whole of the movement has been
concerned
a
r
e l i ft the derailers
w
o
r
k
e
d
completed.
C
ar
e
must
be
taken
on
release
to ensure that the derailers r etur n correctly to the normal position on the
b
y
lines after which the Guard or Shunter must inform the Signalman at Bowesfield by telephone that the Shunting line
a clear.
is
h Ao
d
u
p
CASEl CONTAINING
DETONATORS,
FOR USE I N TH E EVENT OF A DERAILMENT OF A VEHICLE OR
VEHICLES
IS FIXED T O A POST NEAR THE HOLD-UP POINTS GIVING ACCESS
l
e W HICH
v FOUL
e THE rM AIN LINES,
.
TO THE W ORKS AN D WEIGH LINES. T H E KEY OF THE CASE IS UNDER A GLASS COVER WHJCH SHOULD BE
BROKEN IN THE EVENT OF AN Y EMERGENCY NECESSITATING THE USE OF DETONATORS.
PAGE 72.
M ID D LESB R OU GH .
GOOD S YA R D A N D A C K L A M B A N K H EA D .
DELETE present instructions and IN SER T: —
GOOD S YA R D A N D A C K L A M B A N K H EA D : —
1. B e f o r e a train is allowed to leave Middlesbrough Goods Yard for Acklam Bank Head over the Single line, the Signalman
at Middlesbrough Goods Yard Box must advise, by telephone, the Messrs. Dorman Long & Company's man at thei r
Acklam Mineral W eigh Cabin, stating in all cases the composition of the train. T he latter will clear the line as necessary
and having set the points for the siding in which delivery of the traffic is to be given, will place the Siding signal to
the danger position and lower the Acklam Bank Head signal. W hen the Signalman observes this has been done he
may allow the train to proceed.
If the signal repeater indicator is Out of order during fog or falling snow, the Signalman must have an assurance from
the firm's man that the Acklam Bank Head signal has been lowered, and that all is ready for the receipt of the train
before he allows i t t o proceed.
2. W h e n the train has passed No. 33 signal, and the Signalman has replaced i t to danger, he must place a lever collar
on the lever of that signal. N o fur ther movement towards the Bank Head m ust be allowed, nor must a fouling
movement take place on the Single line until the train which has proceeded to Acklam Bank Head has r etur ned and
passed clear of that line.
3. B e f o r e a train wor ked by Messrs. Dorman Long & Company's engine is allowed t o travel fr om the Bank Head t o
Middlesbrough Goods Yard over the Single line, the firm's man must place the Siding signal t o danger and obtain
the permission, by telephone, of the Signalman at Middlesbrough Goods Yard Box. T he Signalman must, before giving
such permission, place a lever collar on the lever of No. 33 signal, and not allow any fouling movement to be made
until t h e tr ain concerned has passed clear of the Single line.
4. T h e Signalman at Middlesbrough Goods Yard Box must observe the conditions of Clause 1 for the r etur n of the
firm's engine--with or w i thout wagons--and the firm's man will comply w i th the requirements for the receipt of
the engine. U pon arrival of the engine at the Bank Head the firm's man must advise the Signalman at Middlesbrough
Goods Yard Box. N o train must be allowed t o leave Middlesbrough Goods Yard for Acklam Bank Head unti l the
firm's engine has r etur ned t o the Bank Head.
5. I n the event of a failure of the telephone, a Pilotman m ust be appointed by Messrs. Dorman Long & Company,
from a member of their staff, and he will be responsible for all movements over the Single line until the telephone
has been repaired and is again in working order. T he Pilotman must travel on the engine of each train working over
the Single line, and no fouling movement on this line must be allowed unless the Pilotman is present. W hen the
Pilotman is at Acklam Bank Head, and is required at Middlesbrough Goods Yard Box, the Local Railway staff must
provide a messenger t o fetch the Pilotman.
6. T h e Signalman at Middlesbrough Goods Yard Box must record all the movements over the Single line i n his Train
Register Book. Messrs. Dorman Long & Company's Signalman will similarly record all movements.
7. W h e n the Middlesbrough Goods Yard Box is r equir ed t o close, the Signalman w i l l advise the firm' s man at the
Acklam Mineral W eigh Cabin, and the l atter will be responsible for working over the Single line during the period
the Signal Box is closed. W hen the Signal Box is re-opened the Signalman must advise the firm's man accordingly and
the latter must not allow any tr ain to leave the Bank Head unti l permission has been obtained i n accordance w i th
the foregoing instructions.
8. G uar ds m ust ensure that wagons ar e l eft securely br aked t o pr event them m oving i n t he sidings allocated by
Messrs. Dorman Long & Company.
GR A N GET OW N .
GR A N GET OW N SI G N A L B OX.— W o rkin g o f Traffic on D o wn Goods Independent f ro m W ilt o n Est at e
Tip and Lackenby Slag Crusher Ground F rame.
DELETE existing instructions.
INSERT:—
GR A N GET OW N S I G N A L B OX.— Permissive B lo ck L in es —Method o f Cautioning—Rule 4 4 ( b ) .
Author ity is given for the Calling-on signals to be lowered after an approaching train has been br ought near l y to a stand.
PAGE 73.
DELETE:—
BETW EEN REDCAR A N D SA L T B U R N W EST .
GOOD S T R AIN S C OU PLED TOGETHER.— Rule 134. T w o Goods trains may be r un coupled fr om Redcar
or Saltburn W est to Carlin H ow signal box in accordance with Rule 134, provided the total number of wagons on the
combined trains does not exceed 110.
SALTBURN.
DELETE:
Entry regarding Propelling of Passenger Trains bet ween Salt burn W est and Salt burn St at ion, and also
item under W es t Si gnal B ox regarding the wor king of the U p Goods Loop.
44
SECTIONAL APFiEN
—continued.
PAGE 75.
LIN E N o . 43.—N OR T H A L L ER T ON ( ST A T ION A N D B OR OU GH B R ID GE R OA D ) T O H A R T L EPOOL ,
ETC.
INSERT:—
B IL L IN GH A M - ON - T EES.
BILLIN GH AM - ON - T EES ST AT I O N — M ar k er Boar ds . D r i ver s o f all tr ai ns calling at Billingham-on-Tees
must be prepared t o stop w i th the engine and leading vehicles beyond the platform end when the length of the tr ain
exceeds five vestibuled vehicles.
Boards marked 6, 7 and 8 respectively, not illuminated, have been erected beyond both the Up and Down Platforms.
Drivers should ensure that trains ar e br ought t o a stand w i th the leading end of the fi r st vehicle opposite the
marker boar d corresponding t o the num ber of passenger vehicles on the tr ai n.
SEA T ON C A R EW .
BETW EEN SEA T O N C A R EW A N D C LIFF H O U S E S O U T H SI G N A L B O XES.
DELETE fi r st tw o paragraphs and IN SER T :—
Empty Coaching Stock trains (consisting of not m or e than ten vehicles) may be propelled on the U p Goods line
rom Seaton Carew Station t o Cliff House South Gr ound Frame under the following arrangements:—
INSERT:—
W EST H A R L T EPOOL .
UP W E I G H L I N E F R OM C H U R C H STR EET T O N EW B U R N . W rong direction working is authorised
from the W eighbridge t o Church Str eet W eigh Independent N o. 11 signal
During daylight and i n clear weather only loads not exceeding 20 wagons w i th or w i thout brake van, after being
weighed, m ay be propelled over this por ti on of line.
.
Trains composed of more than 20 wagons r equir ing t o travel fr om the W eighbridge t o N o. 11 signal at Church
Street m ust be hauled.
The Guard or Shunter must obtain the permission of the Signalman at Church Street by telephone before authorising
the Driver t o commence the wr ong direction movement from the W eighbridge towards N o. 11 signal irrespective of
whether the movement is t o be propelled or hauled.
PAGE 76.
LIN E N o . 44.— T H OR N A SY ( B OW ESFIELD ) T O W EI- I- FIELD , ET C .
RED MARSHALL.
DELETE f irst paragraph and IN SER T: —
BETW EEN S O U T H A N D S T A T I O N S I G N A L BO XES. " T r ai ns i n Section" Indicators:—About 100 yards
East of the Station signal box on the Up side of the Up Goods line and also about 50 yards South of the South signal box
on the Down side of the Down Goods line, numerical indicators worked from the respective signal boxes are provided
and ar e worked as follows:—
INSERT the following as additional paragraph:—
Drivers will not be advised at Redmarshall Station t o which signal box they are being cautioned when proceeding
towards Bowesfield under the author i ty of the Calling-on signal. T hey must understand that at any tim e the section
may extend from Redmarshall Station t o Bowesfield and be prepared t o stop shor t of any obstruction between these
two points.
INSERT: - REDMARSHALL S O U T H A N D W ELLFIELD .
Drivers will not be advised at W el Ifield or W ingate South t o which Signal Box they ar e being cautioned w hen
proceeding towards Redmarshall. T hey must understand that at any time the Section may extend t o Redmarshall South
and be prepared t o stop shor t of any obstruction between these tw o points.
Drivers will not be advised at Redmarshall South or N or th t o which Signal Box they ar e being cautioned w hen
proceeding towards W eH el d. T hey m ust understand that at any tim e the Section may extend t o W eH el d and be
prepared t o stop shor t of any obstruction between these tw o points.
PAGE 77.
INSERT:—
LIN E N o . 45.— ST OC K T ON ( N O R T O N - O N - T E E S S O U T H ) T O F ER R YH IL L N o . 3 , I N C L U D I N G
C H IL T ON B R A N C H .
FERRYH ILL.
Mainsforth C o lliery N .C .B . Sidings.
The entrance to Mainsforth Colliery Sidings is controlled by Mainsforth Signal Box and the Signalman ther e must
not allow trains to proceed on to the Colliery single line until he has obtained the permission of the Colliery staff.
The line leading to the Empty Sidings is crossed by the Colliery Tip line. Movements of trains or engines at this
crossing are controlled by four two-aspect colour l i ght signals which ar e oper ated by the N.C.B. staff. These colour
light signals must not be operated by British Railways' staff. T he normal aspects exhibited by these signals will be " R ed"
to and from the Empty Sidings, and "Gr een to and fr om the Colliery Tip Line.
A telephone for the use of trainmen and N.C.B. staff, fixed on a post at the hand points giving access to the Colliery
Loaded Sidings, provides communication w i th Mainsforth Signal Box.
W orking of C olliery Empt y Sidings.
A tr ai n for the Colliery Empty Sidings must not be allowed t o leave Mainsforth Signal Box until the appropriate
colour light signal has been placed to the "cl ear " position for the passage of the British Railway's tr ain by the member
of the N.C.B. staff who will then telephone the Signalman at Mainsforth Box that the train may enter the sidings.
The member of the N.C.B. staff will remain at the telephone until the train has r etur ned from the Empty Sidings.
Enginemen must be prepared to obey the indication shown by the colour l i ght signal pr otecting the crossing.
W orking of C olliery Loaded Sidings.
Trains are allowed i nto the Colliery Loaded Sidings by the Mainsforth Signalman on the author ity of the Colliery
Weigh Cabin staff.
45 /
S E CTI O NAL APPE
X—continued.
Should ther e already be one or m or e trains i n the Loaded Sidings when a fur ther tr ain is required t o enter and
N.C.B. staff are not in attendance at the telephone, the Signalman must instruct the Guard t o proceed i nto the Sidings
on foot and instruct any other trainmen not to move on to the single line until his train is inside clear. After the Guard
has done so, he must telephone the Signalman accordingly, and providing permission has been obtained from the Colliery
Weigh Cabin staff, such fur ther tr ain may be allowed t o enter the sidings.
Trainmen i n the Colliery Sidings m ust confer w i th one another as t o w hat movements they intend t o make and
telephone t o the Signalman w hen a tr ain is ready t o leave the sidings.
One shunting signal and tw o departure signals are provided on the single line. Trains ready t o leave the Colliery
for the Main line must not do so until both the Departure signals are in the " cl ear " position, nor must the line leading
to the Empty Sidings be fouled by such trains having difficulty in starting and r equir ing to set back.
L IN E N o . 46.—PORT C LA R EN C E A N D B IL L IN GH A M B EC K B R A N C H ES.
B IL L IN GH A M - ON - T EES BECK B R A N C H .
DELETE instructions headed B 1L L IN GH A M R EA C H SID IN GS G R O U N D FRAM E.
PAGE 78.
LIN E N o . 48.—CATTERICK C A M P L IN E.
CATTERICK BRIDGE.
c A r r E R i c k C A M P R A IL W A Y.
DELETE:—
Men are provided at the undermentioned level crossings t o pr otect road traffic dur ing the time trains are running
over the Camp Railway:—
Level Crossing.
P
a
s
s
e
n
g
e
r
Trains. G o o d s Trains.
Camp Station (Crossing t o Station Yar d) F o r e m a n .
F o r e m a n .
Cinema . . . . . . . . .
.
M
i
l
i
t
a r
y
Personnel. L e n g t h m a n .
Walkerville . . .
.
.
.
. . . M i l i tar y Personnel. L e n g t h m a n .
Farmers Arms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . M i l i tar y Personnel S e e note below.
Brompton Lane . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P o r t e r Signalman. P o r t e r Signalman.
The Station Master at Catterick Bridge must advise the Permanent Way Ganger of the approximate hours between
which the Lengthmen are required at the respective level crossings, t o act as Crossing Keepers. T he men stationed at
the level crossings must prominently exhibit a red hand signal against road traffic when a train is approaching.
INSERT:—
Men are provided at the undermentioned level crossings to pr otect road traffic dur ing the time trains are r unning
over t he Camp Railway:—
Level Crossing.
P
a
s
s
e
n
g
e
r
Trains. F r e i g h t Trains.
Camp Station (Crossing t o Station Yar d) F o r e m a n .
F o r e m a n .
Cinema . . . . . . . . . . • • . . .
M i l i t a r y Personnel. M i l i t a r y Personnel.
Colburn . . .
M
i
l
i
t
a
r
y
Personnel. S e e note below.
VValkerville . . .
M
i
l
i
t
a
r
y
Personnel. P o r t e r .
Farmers Arms . . .
.
.
.
M i l i t a r y Personnel. S e e note below.
Brompton Lane . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P o r t e r Signalman. P o r t e r Signalman.
The m en stationed at the level crossings must prominently exhibit a r ed hand signal against r oad traffic when a
train i s approaching.
PAGE 79.
INSERT:—
C OLBU R N LE V E L C R OSSIN G. F r ei ght tr ains proceeding towards Catter ick Bridge m ust be br ought t o a
stand immediately before passing over this crossing.
LIN E N o . 49. — D A R L I N G T O N ( H O P E T O W N ) T O P E N R I T H ( E D E N V A L L E Y J U N C T I O N ) ,
IN C L U D IN G M ER R YB EN T B R A N C H , F OR C ET T B R A N C H .
DELETE MERRYBENT BRANCH fr om l i ne heading.
PAGES 79 A N D 80.
PIERCEBRIDGE.
MERRYBENT SIGN A L B OX— M erryb en t Branch.
DELETE existing instructions.
PAGE 81.
BETW EEN B A R N A R D CASTLE A N D K IR K B Y ST EPH EN .
DEEPDALE VIA D U C T , B ET W EEN L A R T IN GT ON A N D B OW ES, A N D B ELA H VI A D U C T , B ET W EEN
BARRAS A N D K IR K B Y ST EPH EN .
DELETE pr esent instruction and
I NSERT:—
BETW EEN B A R N A R D C A STLE A N D K IR K B Y ST EPH EN
DEEPDALE VIA D U C T , B ET W EEN L A R T IN GT ON A N D B OW ES, A N D B ELA H VIA D U C T , B ET W EEN
BARRAS A N D K IR K B Y ST EPH EN .
The f ollowing instructions ar e applicable i n conjunction wit h t h e inf ormat ion shown i n t h e R o u t e
Availabilit y Booklet and in Table J—Engines Assisting in Rear of Train.
If necessary, an engine and van proceeding from Barnard Castle to Kirkby Stephen or from Kirkby Stephen to Barnard
Castle may be coupled on the rear of a Freight Train and assist to Stainmore Signal Box. O n reaching Stainmore Signal Box
the train must draw i nto the appropriate refuge siding, the engine and van detached and allowed to precede the Freight
train to Kirby Stephen or Barnard Castle as the case may be.
Between Tees Valley and Bowes, and between Stainmore and Kirkby Stephen East Signal Boxes, an engine and van may
only be coupled to an engine and van, or two engines may only be coupled together, if both engines are in Route Availability
Group 4 or a lower group.
S E CTI O NAL APPENDI X—conti nued.
Subject to the instructions shown on page 12 of the Route Availability booklet, i f i t is necessary to convey a dead
engine on a train or two engines are employed in the working of a train between Barnard Castle and Kirkby Stephen, the
engines must be separated by not less than thr ee ordinary empty or loaded wagons, or thr ee freight vans, i f any of the
engines concerned ar e in Class W a8.2- 8- 0, Q.6 or J.39. T h e instructions shown on page 57 of the General Appendix
headed "Hauling of 'Dead' Locomotives owned by British Railways" are modified accordingly.
An engine tender filled with water may be conveyed on a train between Barnard Castle and Kir kby Stephen provided
the filled tender is of a type belonging to an engine in Route Availability Group 4 or a lower Group or in Class WD.8.2-8-0,
Q.6 or J.39. I f any engine hauling or forming part of the train if of Class WD.8.2-8-0, Q.6 or 3.39, three ordinary empty or
loaded wagons must be placed between that engine and any such tender filled with water. I n the case of a double headed
train, thr ee ordinary empty or loaded wagons must be placed between the second engine and any such tender filled with
water.
When t w o engines are employed w i th one set of snow ploughs between Barnard Castle and Ki r kby Stephen, and
either of the engines concerned are in Class WD.8.2-8-0, Q.6 or J.39, the snow plough train must be divided to pass over
the Deepdale or Belah Viaducts, that is, not more than one engine of these classes with one plough must pass over the
Viaducts at one time.
In the event of a Locomotive Department steam crane being required at a breakdown W est of Deepdale or Belah
Viaducts, the 25-ton steam crane from Middlesbrough or the 45-ton steam crane from Darlington must be used. Ei ther
crane may be allowed to pass over these Viaducts in either direction subject to the following restrictions:—
It mus t n o t pass ov er the Vi aduc t at a h i g h e r s peed t h a n IS m i l e s p e r h o u r.
An ordinary wagon or van must be interposed between the crane and the engine, and in no circumstances must
the crane travel over either Viaduct under its own power or with the jib off the match wagon.
Two trains running in opposite directions must not be allowed to cross either of the Viaducts at the same time. Thi s
does not apply to Engineer's Rail Motors.
When a train is approaching Deepdale Viaduct from Barnard Castle at the same time as a train from Bowes, the latter
must be brought to a stand at the Stop signal at the West end of the Viaduct, and must not be started again until the train
in the opposite direction has passed.
When a train is approaching Belah Viaduct from Kir kby Stephen at the same time as a tr ain from Staininore, the
latter must be br ought to a stand at the Stop signal at the East end of the Viaduct, and must not be started again until
the train in the opposite direction has passed.
DELETE instructions.
KIRKBY T H O R E .
PAGES 82 T O 84.
LIN E N o . 52.- - D A R L IN GT ON ( PARKGATE) T O T O W L A W , ETC .
SH IL D ON .
S H I L D O N T U N N E L . — Gr a d i e n t " I i n 2 3 6 " fal l i ng t o w a rd s B i s hop A uc k l and.
The instructions set out below apply between Shildon South and Shildon N or th Signal Boxes. W hen Shildon N or th
Signal Box is closed the instructions will operate between Bishop Auckland East and Shildon South Signal Boxes so far
as they ar e applicable.
1. T r ai ns and light engines must not be allowed to pass each other through the tunnel on the Up and Down lines at the
same time. Befor e a train is allowed to proceed thr ough the tunnel i n ei ther direction the provisions of clause (b)
of instructions i n regard to the wor king of trains conveying "Out-of-Gauge Loads", as shown i n Superintendent' s
circular, dated 15-10-46, must be complied with, except that the "Blocking Back" signal (2-4) need not be sent by
the Signalman receiving t he signal 1-2-4. T h e signal 1-2-4 need not be sent, however , dur i ng t he per i od t he
"Blocking Back Outside Home Signal" signal is in operation in connection with the Engineer's possession of the Down
line shown i n clause 2.
2. ( a ) F or the purpose of repairing the lines and inspecting the track circuits thr ough the tunnel, the Down line will
be closed fr om 1.15 p.m . t o 2.0 p.m . on Monday, Wednesday and Fr iday o f each week, and on Sundays fr om
12.1 a.m . t o 6.30 a.m.
When the Lengthmen and Signal Engineer's men are ready to enter the tunnel the Ganger must communicate with
the Signalmen at Shildon N or th and Shildon South Signal Boxes and arrange for thr ee detonators, ten yards apart,
and a red flag dur ing daylight or a red light during darkness, fog or falling snow, t o be placed on the Down Main line
at the South end of the tunnel. T he Ganger must advise the Signalman at Shildon Nor th Box that these requirements
have been carried out and the Signalman must then send the bell signal "Blocking Back Outside Home Signal" for
the Down line in accordance with Block Regulation 13, and the Ganger must obtain an assurance from the Shildon
South Signalman that this has been done and that the Block Indicator has been placed in the "Train on Li ne" position.
It Shildon Nor th Signal Box is closed the Ganger must arrange to communicate with the Signalman at Bishop Auckland
East Signal Box so that these instructions can be carried out. I f both Shildon N or th and Bishop Auckland East Signal
Boxes are closed the Ganger must arrange for a Handsignalman t o place thr ee detonators and a r ed flag or a red
light, as the case may be, on the Down Main line at Shildon South Signal Box and remain ther e until the men are out
of the tunnel. T he Ganger may, on receiving an assurance that the requirements have been carried out, authorise
the men t o enter the tunnel.
In or der that the Engineer may have possession of the Down Main line at the time stipulated in the first paragraph
of this clause, the Signalman at Shildon N or th Box must, i f no tr ain is signalled on the Block Instrument for the
Down line, send the bell signal 3-3, "Blocking Back Outside Home Signal" t o the Signalman at the r ear Box at
1.15 p.m. on Mondays, Wednesdays and Fridays. I f , however, a train for which the bell signal 1-2-4 " Is Opposite
Line Clear for Out-of-Gauge Load" has been signalled in accordance with Clause 1 o f these instructions is passing,
the 3-3 bell signal must not be sent until the "Tr ain Out of Section" signal for such a train has been received.
(b) I f it is necessary to occupy the tunnel when Shildon N or th Signal Box is closed, previous arrangements may be
made w i th the Signalman at that Signal Box as under :—
The Ganger must attend at the Signal Box immediately pr ior to the closing of the box and ascertain from the
Signalman i f traffic on the Down line has ceased, and then carry out the instructions as set out in Clause (a),
paragraph 3.
(c) I f no previous arrangements have been made the Ganger may authorise the Lengthmen and Signal Engineer's
staff to enter the tunnel when the Signal Boxes at both ends are closed, provided the Down Main line is protected
by detonators and a red flag or red light in accordance with Clause (a), and that a Handsignalman has been provided
in the vicinity of Shildon South Signal Box.
;
SECTIONAL A1,4
'4 D I X — c o n ti nuecL
' 9
the Guard that a skid has been placed in position and the
Guard must give an assurance to the Shunter and Driver
that
the tr ain to be propelled is properly coupled up to the engine. Loads should be br ought to a stand short of the skids.
AM EN D four th paragraph t o r ead:—
If ther e are any wagons standing In the siding i nto which wagons are to be placed the Shunter must satisfy himself
that the skid is in position at the W orks end of the siding and the Guard or Shunter must ensure that the brakes of the
standing wagons are properly applied before allowing the propelling movement. W hen the wagons are against the standing
wagons the whole of the wagons must be coupled together .
INSERT:—
FELL SIGN A L B O X ( C.I.C.) .
W orking o f Ground F rames a t O r e Gan t ry Sidings.
Ground frames are provided at the entrance to the Or e Gantry Line and at the W est end of the Empty Or e Line.
Telephone communication is provided from each Gr ound Frame to Fell Signal Box. T he Ground Frame at the entrance
to the Or e Gantry Line is electrically released fr om Fell Signal Box and that at the W est end of the Empty Ore Line is
free. W hen a movement is required to be made from the Ore Gantry Line to the Empty Ore Line the Guard m ust telephone
the Signalman o r the necessary release, to enable him to operate the Or e Gantry Ground Frame.
When the train is clear of the Ground Frame connections from the Or e Gantry Line the Fireman must restore the
Ground Frame to the normal position. The Guard must proceed to the Ground Frame at the West end of the Empty Or e
Line and operate i t for the entr y of the tr ain to the Spur. W hen the whole of the tr ain is inside the Spur connection
and ready to leave, the Guard must telephone the Signalman for permission to proceed towards Fell Signal Box via the
Empty Ore Line and on receiving this permission, will operate the Ground Frame accordingly.
When the train is clear of the Ground Frame connections the Guard must restore the Ground Frame to the normal
position.
BETW EEN A N N F I EL D PL A IN ( A N N F IEL D EAST) A N D C ON SET T (FELL, C.I.C.) .
orking o f 56-ton wagons bet ween T yn e D o ck and Conset t .
Iron or e is conveyed between Tyne Dock Bottom and Consett i n trains composed of specially constructed 56- ton
wagons w i th pow er operated door s for discharging, and also fi tted w i th the vacuum brake. F or details, see pr i nted
pamphlet "Instr uctions relating to the wor king of 56-ton wagons between Tyne Dock and Consett".
PAGE 90.
LIN E N o . 61.—GA TESH EA D ( GR EEN SFiELD , D U N S T O N L IN ES) T O B L A YD O N V I A N O R W O O D ,
ETC.
INSERT:—
L O W FELL PER M A N EN T W A Y STOR EYA R D . G R O U N D FR A M E.
Drivers of trains leaving the siding must in all cases assume the line is clear to Low Fell Station Home signal only.
D U N ST ON - ON - T YN E.
N O R W O O D SIGN A L B OX— C at ch Point s on D own line.
AM EN D second paragraph t o read as follows:—
" A train must not be allowed to leave Norwood and proceed in the direction of the catch points until the Tr ai n out
of Section signal has been received for the previous train (except where such previous train is assisted by an engine i n
the rear, or is a L.E. or L.E.'s coupled or engine and van) whether such train is to carry out shunting operations or not" .
INSERT:—
Norwood C o ke W o rks N .C .B . Sidings.
Six sidings have been provided for the exchange of traffic between British Railways and the National Coal Board at
Norwood Coke Works. These sidings are numbered 1 t o 6, reading from l eft to r ight from the railway end. Nor m ally
ingoing wagons will be placed i n N o. 6 Siding; traffic for despatch will be placed i n Sidings Nos. 1 t o 5 as necessary by
the N.C.B.
A telephone has been provided at the N or th ( or Main Line) end of the exchange sidings, connected w i th the Coke
Works W ei gh Cabin.
All tr ains will be propelled i nto the Sidings.
Between the hours of 6.0 a.m. and 10.0 p.m., Mondays t o Fridays, 6.0 a.m. and 5.0 p.m., Saturdays, and 6.0 a.m.
and 2.0 p.m. on Sundays, no movement must take place i nto the exchange sidings unti l the Guard has communicated
with the Coke W orks W eigh Cabin by telephone and has received permission t o place his train i n N o. 6 Siding, or In
another siding if No. 6 is occupied. I f the Coke Works Weighman specifies any road other than No. 6 for the reception
of the inward load, the Guard must tell him the number of wagons requiring to be placed on the road, and receive his
assurance that i f these wagons are propelled In clear of the N or th end connections they will not foul any other road or
any movement by the Coke W or ks engine.
At other times there will be no weighman on duty. T he N.C.B. will leave No. 6 Siding clear of traffic at close of work
and one train may be placed ther ein, not fur ther than is necessary just to clear the connections at the N or th end of the
Sidings. I f a second train requires to be disposed of, or for any reason Siding No. 6 is not available, the Guard must examine
the siding/s to be used in disposing of his tr ain, and ensure that no wagons are l eft foul at the South ( or Coke Works)
end o f the Sidings.
IN N O CASE MUST W AGONS BE PROPELLED THROUGH A ROAD AN D BE FOUL OF AN Y OTHER ROAD
AT THE SOUTH ( OR COKE W ORKS) END OF THE EXCHANGE SIDINGS.
D U N ST O N PO W ER ST A T ION .—D elivery o f Coal and Goods t o Exchange Sidings.
Working i n the Dunston Power Station Exchange Sidings is controlled by the Central Electricity Author i ty and
Trainmen must w or k t o t he instructions given by the Signalman, Dunstan W est and/or the C.E.A. Commissionaire.
'When advised by the Signalman that a train is approaching, the Commissionaire will inform him wher e the load is
to be detached. T he Signalman will instruct the Guard who will be responsible for placing the traffic where it is required.
During busy periods i t may be necessary for an incoming tr ain engine t o move other traffic i n the sidings befor e the
load can be detached.
50
To assist the Guards in carrying out the instructions a diagram boar d is provided at the entrance t o the sidings.
This boar d shows the nomenclature of the sidings, the position of points, the disused " A " Station Crossing and the
ungated level crossing at " B " Station.
The Commissionaire will be responsible for setting points West of the disused " A " Station Crossing, and for ensuring
that n o c onfl i c ti ng mov ements b y C.E .A . engi nes a re tak i ng pl ac e wh e n B ri ti s h Rai l way s ' engines a re w o rk i n g i n t h e
Sidings. H e will take up a position on the disused " A " Station Crossing and will assist the Guard by giving hand signals
as necessary. These arrangements will enable the Guard to remain in a position where he can keep i n touch w i th hi s
Driver, but he will be responsible for seeing that hand points at the East End of the sidings are correctly set.
When propelling beyond the disused " A " Station Crossing, great care must be exercised to ensure that no wagons
foul the ungated level crossing at " B " Station.
A " Li m i t of Shunt" board is erected approximately 25 yards east of " B " Station Crossing to mark the limit of this
propelling movement.
24 X X wagons can be accommodated between the " Li m i t of Shunt" boar d and the disused " A " Station Crossing
on each o f the thr ee ingoing coal lines.
Immediately the delivery of the load has been completed the Commissionaire will advise the Signalman, D unston
West, w ho will control the departure of the engine, from the loaded sidings.
TR A IN S F O R C .E.A . G R O U N D F R A M E, B ET W EEN N O R W O O D A N D D E R W E N T H A U G H : —
Drivers of all trains required t o detach or attach at the above gr ound frame must stop at Nor wood Box and advise
the Signalman accordingly.
B L A YD ON .
Diversion o f Trains via N orwood o r via Blaydon M ain and South.
When in wse of emergency trains are diverted via Norwood or via Blaydon Main and South, the following restrictions
on coaching stock m ust be observed:—
Via Norwood.
Passenger trains and trains conveying empty coaching stock made up of London Midland (including all for m er L.M.S.
stock wor king t o or from the Scottish Region), W estern and/or Southern Region coaching stock, or former L.N.E.R.
stock bearing plates letter ed "RESTRICTION 2 " or "RESTRICTION 3 " must not pass any other train on the opposite
line between Blaydon Main and Blaydon Signal Boxes.
Via Blaydon M ain and South.
No tr ain conveying coaching stock having a w i dth exceeding 9 ft. 3 in. over maximum pr ojection must be allowed
to pass via this r oute.
PAGE 91.
INSERT:—
D ER W EN T H A U GH ,
D er w enthaugh and Sw al w el l C ol l i er y Br anch. T he Staff ( with r ound handle) k ept at Derwenthaugh Signal
Box applies to the single line between Derwenthaugh Signal Box and the connection w i th the Swalwell Opencast Coal
Sidings which is worked in accordance with the Regulations for working Single Lines of Railway by one engine in steam.
Beyond this poi nt Drivers must be prepared to proceed at Caution and t o stop shor t of any obstruction.
PAGE 92.
LIN E N o . 62.— W EST H A R T L EPOOL ( C EM ET ER Y W E S T ) T O G A T ESH EA D ( GR EEN SFIELD ) V I A
H OR D EN , I N C L U D I N G SEA B A N K S B R A N C H , N O R T H D O C K B R A N C H , T I L E S H E D T O
H A R T ON , A L L H U SEN ' S B R A N C H , H I G H ST R EET T O GR EEN SF IEL D C U R VE.
SEA H A M .
INSERT:—
VAN E TEM PEST C OLLIER Y SIDINGS:—Tr ap points are provided on the Single line leading into Vane Tempest
Colliery Loaded Sidings, Seaham, at a point near the N.C.B. Weigh Cabin. These trap points are facing to trains approaching
the Sidings. A semaphore Stop signal controlling facing direction movements over the tr ap points is provided on the
left-hand side of the Single line, 50 yards before reaching the trap points. T he points and signal are worked by the N.C.B.
staff and ar e controlled from the W eigh Cabin.
Drivers of trains from the direction of Hall Dene Signal Box must give one long engine whistle on approaching, t o
enable the N.C.B. staff to operate the trap points and Stop signal.
H A W T H O R N SIGN A L B O X .
INSERT as 2nd paragraph:—
Emergency Telephone.
A telephone is provided i n the porch of the signal box for use by trainmen i n emergency when the signal box is
closed.
H A W T H O R N L I M EST O N E Q U A R R Y SID IN GS.
AM EN D Li ne 5 t o r ead:—
"Safety Swing chocks ar e pr ovided at the entrance t o the four sidings. . . . . .
DELETE the following instructions:—
SEA H A M H A R B OU R ST A T I O N .
5 points.
coaches and an engine can be accommodated at the Platform side of the Stop signal situated near the sand
drag Only
facing
This signal is connected t o and works i n conjunction w i th the hold-up lever operating the sand dr ag points. W hen
a movement past the signal is required the Fireman must wor k the hold-up lever; this operation will set the points and
lower t he signal simultaneously.
INSERT:—
SU N D ER LA N D .
Station Signal Box.—Rule 39 ( a) .
Drivers
ofSignals
trains should
note that exemption from the first paragraph of Rule 39 (a) has been granted at Sunderland
Station
Home
as follows:—
Down Direct ion. F o r all t rains booked t o stop at Sunderland Station.
For trains fr om t he W est Hartlepool dir ection, the Outer Distant signal at the South end of Sunderland South
Tunnel w hen i n the off position indicates that the signals ar e off to the Station platform, but does not indicate the
position of the Starting signal at the N or th end of the platform.
Up Direct ion.
All trains.
51
PAGE 93.
INSERT:—
PELAW A N D GA T ESH EA D ( ST. JA M ES BRIDGE) SIGN A L B OXES.
Cautioning o f Trains on Goods Lines.
Drivers of trains will not be advised at Pelaw or St. James Bridge Signal Boxes t o which signal box they are being
cautioned. T hey must understand that at any time Felling Signal Box may be closed and be prepared t o stop shor t of
any obstruction between Pelaw and St. James Bridge Signal Boxes when proceeding with trains in either the Up or the
Down direction.
GATESHEAD.
INSERT:—
ST. J AM ES' BR ID GE SID IN GS G R O U N D FRAME:—Drivers of trains leaving the Sidings must i n all cases
assume the line is clear only as far as the first stop signal of the next Signal Box open.
GATESHEAD EAST STATI ON :—Electric Bells and Indicators for Starting of Trains.—Referring to Table X.
An electric starting bell and a double-sided visual indicator are provided on the gantry carrying the colour light signal at the
North end of the Down platform.
The push button which operates the bell also illuminates the visual indicator.
The visual indicator shows the letter R when the bell is rung.
LIN E N o . 63.—H A R T L EPOOL ( C EM ETER Y S O U T H ) T O F ER R YH IL L N o .
DELETE:—
BETW EEN H A R T A N D H ESL ED EN •
H ESLED EN B A N K SID IN G. Tr affi c for this siding must be attached i n fr ont of the tr ain. O n arrival at the
siding and after the train clears the catch points leading to the run-away siding, i t must be set back with the brake van
resting against the buffer stops of the latter siding before w or k is commenced.
HESLEDEN.
DELETE existing instructions regarding U p Freight Trains and IN SER T : —
UP F R EIGH T T R AIN S. Al l U p Freight trains must travel over the Up Goods Loop. I f the Loop is not already
occupied by another train, No. 25 tr ap points must be maintained in the run-off position until the Signalman at Hesleden
station Box receives intimation from the trainmen by telephone that the train has come to a stand. Dr iver s of Freight
trains which r equir e brakes to be applied must advise the Signalman by telephone as soon as they are ready to depar t.
PAGES 93 A N D 94.
W IN GA T E.
W IN GA T E C OL L IER Y SIGN A L B OX.—W in g at e C olliery Branch.
DELETE:—
The Signalman at W ingate Colliery and the Crossing Keeper at Wingate Grange must advise each other by telephone
when a train is leaving for or departing from the Colliery.
The Brick W or ks traffic must be dealt w i th w i thout fouling the line used by trains travelling fr om the Colliery
direction.
INSERT:—
W I N G AT E GR AN GE LEVEL C R OSSIN G. T he level crossing gates will be opened and closed by the Signalman
from W ingate Colliery Signal Box, w ho will accompany each tr ain.
PAGE 95.
LIN E N o . 64.—R YH OPE GR A N GE T O CASTLE ED EN W EST , I N C L U D I N G SIL K SW OR T H C OL L IER Y
BRANCH, T H O R N L E Y C OL L IER Y B R A N C H .
T H ORNLEY.
W H EA T L EY H I L L C OL L IER Y B R A N C H .
INSERT as second Paragraph.
The National Coal Board have provided a wheel chock at the East end of the outgoi ng sidings and a safety switch
at the W est end of the ingoing sidings near the Colliery W eigh Office t o pr event wagons r unning out of the sidings
towards the level crossing. T he safety switch and wheel chock will be operated by a man from the Colliery Weigh Office,
who will also act as hand-signalman at the level crossing for trains proceeding to and from the Colliery and dur ing any
shunting movements over the level crossing.
The signalman at W heatley Hill Signal Box must, when accepting a tr ain for the Colliery, immediately advise t he
Traffic Manager at the Colliery W eigh Office by telephone, w ho will send a man t o act as above. T he signalman m ust
not lower No. 8 Down Main t o Colliery signal unti l assurance has been received that a man has been sent.
In the event of the telephone being out of order, the signalman m ust stop any tr ain proceeding i nto the Colliery
and advise the driver to bring his train to a stand at the level crossing and satisfy himself that all is safe before proceeding
over the crossing, and t o stop clear of the safety switch adjacent to the Colliery W eigh Office.
DELETE T H E H EA D IN G: —
LIN E N o . 65 M U R T O N T O D U R H A M EL VET , ETC .
and
INSERT:—
LINE N o . 65.— M U R T ON T O SH ER B U R N N O R T H .
SHERBURN C OL L IER Y.
Sherburn N o r t h Signal Box.—Rule 39 ( a) .
Exemptions from the provisions of Rule 39 (a) has been given when advancing a train from Nos. 4 or 6 U p Branch
Home Signals.
52
SECTIONAL APPE 1 X —c ontinue d.
PAGE 96.
LIN E N o . 66.—SU N D ER L A N D T O P E N S H A W N O R T H , I N C L U D I N G P A L L I O N T O D EPT F O R D
BRANCH. L E A M S I D E ( A U C K L A N D ) T O D U R H A M ( N E W T O N H A L L ) .
PALL1ON.
DEPTFORD B R A N C H .—J. A . Jobling & C o. Lt d., Glass W o rks Siding.
DEPTFORD BRANCH.—.J. A . Jobling & C o. Lt d., Glass W o rks Siding.
The siding is situated on the Up line between Deptford and Ogden's Lane Signal Boxes. T he points are worked from
a ground frame locked by an Annett' s key. T he key is kept in Pallion Station Signal Box.
Shunting movements in the Sidings are regulated by a 3-aspect colour light signal giving the following indications:—
RED
S
T
O
P
.
YELLOW . • •
S E T BACK.
GREEN
M
O
V
E
FORWARD.
The
can be
worked
by either
two
switches
located in wooden boxes which are normally kept locked. T he
Guard
issignal
the only
person
authorised
t o of
w or
k the
switches.
When
t is switch
necessary
to shunt
the at
Guard,
before entering the branch, must obtain the Annett' s key and
the key
to ithe
boxes
from the
the Siding,
Signalman
Pallion.
The
engine must not enter the warehouse and a sufficient number of vehicles must be attached to obviate the necessity
for so
doing.
Whilst attaching or detaching movements ar e taking place a por ti on of the tr ain and/or brake van m ust be l eft
secured on the U p l i ne t o pr otect the shunting movements.
The Guard will be responsible for switching off the signal, locking the switch box, locking the gr ound frame, and
returning the keys t o the Signalman at Pallion w hen leaving the branch.
PAGE 97.
INSERT:—
L IN E N o . 68.— SOU T H D O C K B R A N C H ES.
SO U T H D OC K .
The Guard or Shunter i n charge of a tr ain fr om South D ock Bottom which requires a clear r un across H endon
Junction must advise the Signalman at Hendon accordingly on the telephone provided near Hendon " D ock to U p Mains
or Branch D i stant" signal, and must not signal the Driver t o start unti l the Distant signal has been lowered.
Londonderry Signal B ox.
DELETE fir st thr ee paragraphs of existing instructions and IN SER T :—
"W hen propelling loads on to Nos. 21, 22 and 23 Jetties. Drivers must keep a sharp look- out for, and be prepared
to act immediately upon, hand signals given by Shunters or Guards".
Note.—The semaphore signal referred t o in the previous instructions has now been dispensed w i th.
INSERT:—
LIN E N o . 69.—TYNE D OC K T O A N N F IEL D PL A IN ( A N N F IEL D EAST) VIA STELLA GILL, I N C L U D I N G
T YN E D O C K B O T T O M B R A N C H , W H I T B U R N B R A N C H , G R E E N L A N E T O B O L D O N
COLLIERY, H E D W O R T H L A N E T O EA ST S O L D O N ( T IL E SH ED ) .
BETW EEN T Y N E D O C K B O T T O M A N D A N N F IEL D PL A IN ( A N N F IEL D EAST) .
W orking of 56-ton wagons bet ween T yn e D o ck and Consett.
Iron Or e is conveyed between Tyne Dock Bottom and Consett in trains composed of specially constructed 56- ton
wagons with power operated doors for discharging and also fitted with the vacuum brake. F o r details see printed pamphlet
"instructions relating t o the wor king of 56-ton wagons between Tyne Dock and C onsett".
PAGE 98.
LIN E N o . 70.—PELA W T O F ER R YH IL L ( TU R SD A LE) V I A L EA M SID E, I N C L U D I N G B E L M O N T T O
D U R H A M G O O D S , FER R YH 1LL ( C O X H O E ) T O C O X H O E S T A T I O N .
W A SH I N G T O N .
W A S H I N G T O N S O U T H SI G N A L B O X .
W A S H I N G T O N S O U T H S I G N A L B OX.—W ashingt on C ollieries Branch. A n Annett's key which i s
attached t o the Train Staff has been pr ovided t o release the one lever gr ound frame which controls the South end
connection of the Glebe Colliery W eigh Siding w i th the Single line.
The N or th end connection of the W eigh Siding with the Single line is controlled by a 2-lever ground frame. T he
levers are free and are worked by the National Coal Board Fatfield Road level crossing keeper.
LIN E N o . 71.—PELAW T O S O U T H SH IEL D S.
INSERT after entr y headed " H ebbur n" :—
JA R R OW .
JA Rfor
R OW
EA STwit
EhN tDrafLfIic
GH
WAY
D B.P.
M ERCCo.
AN
IL E D R Y D O C K C OM PA N Y.—In st ru ct io n s
dealing
f oTr tRhAe IL
Shell
MA
e xN &
LtTd.
1. T Street
w o Exchange
Sidings ar
e situated
W est side of
Branch
Level Crossing.
Eac
h siding on
willthe
accommodate
30the
tank
cars. Single line at the South side of Jarrow High
2. T h e sidings ar e i n the form of Loops connected t o the r unning line by points wor ked by throw-over levers. T he
points w hen not i n use must be l eft normal for the r unning line.
3. T exchange
h e sidingpoi
next
the INW
Branch
line
is the exchange
nt for
ARD
Installation
traffic. poi nt for OUTW ARD Installation traffic and the other siding the
4. T h e Installation private locomotive will w or k all traffic between the exchange sidings and the Installation.
for
in Clause
10. engines must not pass o ver Jarro w H ig h St reet Level Crossing except as provided
British
Railways'
-,
5. Afollows:—
STOP BOARD situated 40 yards South o f the South end connection t o the Exchange Sidings is l etter ed as
Side Facing South. " Br i ti sh Railways' engines must stop at this point and not proceed until signalled forward.
by the Guard i n charge". ( A white light is exhibited at this board dur ing hours of darkness).
Side Faci ng N o r t h . " M ovem ents beyond thi s poi nt by Installation engines ar e pr ohi bi ted"
531
SECTIONAL APPEK61X—continued.
6. T h e British Railways' Guard, giving the signal to his Driver to pass the STOP BOARD, must satisfy himself that no
conflicting movement is taking place ahead, and that the points are set for the correct siding.
7. B r i t i s h Railways' engines arriving w i th trains i n the Inward Siding must not proceed beyond the fouling poi nt of
that siding with the outwar d siding until i t has been ascertained that no fouling movement is in progress.
8. T h e Shunter i n charge of the Installation private locomotive will, befor e commencing a shunting movement over
Jarrow High Street Level Crossing, assure himself that no conflicting movement is taking place ahead. T he Installation
locomotive will carry an electric head-light at night.
9. W h e n the Inward Installation siding is clear of tank cars the Installation locomotive will not again enter or place
cars in that siding from the Jarrow High Street end until fur ther cars are placed ther e by a British Railways' engine,
except in special circumstances by pr ior arrangement with the Station Master, Jarrow. T he Installation engine may,
however, enter the Inward Siding from the South end provided no conflicting movement Is being made by a British
Railways' engine.
10. W hen the Installation locomotive is out of commission for any reason the Station Master, Jarrow, will be notified
accordingly by the Installation staff, and will noti fy trainmen befor e enter ing the Li ght Railway that on arriving in
the Inward Siding they will be met by a Conductor provided from the Installation staff and may, under his author ity,
cross Jarrow H i gh Str eet Level Crossing and pr oceed t o shunt t he Installation sidings i n accordance w i th hi s
directions, the Conductor remaining w i th the British Railways' enginemen unti l the British Railways' engine ,hu
returned t o the sidings South of the Level Crossing. T H E ENGINE MUST N OT ACTUALLY ENTER THE OIL
COMPOUNDS. CAPSTANS ARE PROVIDED W ITHIN THE OIL COMPOUNDS TO ENABLE THE OIL COMPANY'S
STAFF T O PLACE THE TANKS IN POSITION, W HICH W ILL ENABLE THE ENGINE T O ATTACH W ITH OU T
PASSING BEYOND THE GATES.
PAGE 99.
INSERT:—
S O U T H SH IEL D S.
Stati on Signal Box. Drivers of trains approaching South Shields on the Down Main should note that, when the line
is clear to the bridge carrying the outl et signals fr om the Station Sidings, Rule 39 (a) will not be carried o u t at the
undermentioned signals:—
No. 1. D o w n Main t o D ow n Platform Hom e.
No. 26. D ow n Platform.
No. 2. D o w n Main t o Middle Line.
No. 3. D o w n Main t o U p Platform Home.
LIN E N o . 71— N EW C A ST L E N o . 3 T O CARLISLE.
ELSW ICK.
Light Engines and Emp t y Coaching St ock Trains f o r t h e direct ion o f N ewcast le, et c.
Drivers of Empty Coaching Stock trains and Li ght Engines must slacken speed on passing Elswick Station Signal Box
and give t he following infor m ation:—
(a) I n the case of Empty Coaching Stock trains, the forward wor king of the set from Newcastle.
(b) I n the case of a Li ght Engine, the forward wor king of the engine from Newcastle.
This information m ust be telephoned t o Newcastle N o. 3.
In the case of an Empty Coaching Stock tr ain for beyond the Central Station, the Signalman at Newcastle N o. 3
must instruct the Signalman at Forth whether the train is required to travel by the Main l i ne or the Goods line. I n the
absence of such instructions the tr ai n m ust tr avel vi a the Main line.
Guards of Empty Coaching Stock trains will be held responsible for reminding Drivers t o slacken speed at Elswick
and for ensuring that Drivers are in a position to give the Signalman cor r ect information on the forward working of the
set.
INSERT:—
SC OT SW O OD.
UP G O O D S L I N E B ET W EEN S C O T S W O O D A N D ELSWICK.—Scotswood St at ion B ox, R ule 69.
After an engine has r un r ound a freight train on the U p Goods line and the train has been drawn clear of that line,
the Guard m ust so advise the Signalman at Scotwsood Station Signal Box i n accordance w i th Rule 69.
For this purpose Guards may use the telephone fixed on the post of the signal br idge situated 250 yards East of
Scotswood Station Signal Box.
SC OT SW OOD B R ID GE SID IN GS— L IGH T EN G I N ES R E Q U I R I N G T O T R A VEL F R O M T H E W E S T
T O T H E EA ST EN D .
W hether running from Blaydon Loco. Shed or after haling been detached from a train In the Sidings, no light engine
must travel fr om the W est t o the East end w i thout the Driver having fir st obtained, If possible, the author ity of the
Yard staff.
In or der to contact the Yar d Foreman or Shunter the telephone at the W est End of the Sidings must be used, and
a clear understanding reached as t o the Siding on which t he engine m ust r un.
If the attention of the Yard staff cannot be obtained, engines must travel from W est to East via No. 8 New Side only.
The exact location of this line, which has been allocated for use as an engine line, is indicated by a notice board on a lighting
pole near the W est End of the Washing Bench and close t o the telephone box.
The engine line must not be used for any other purpose unless there are exceptional circumstances, in which case the
following precautions must first be taken:—
1. A detonator and a red flag by day, or red light by night, must be placed to pr otect the W est End of the engine line.
2. L o c o . S hed staff must be advised that the engine line is blocked, w i th an indication as to how light engines should
proceed t o the East End.
PAGE 100.
INSERT:—
B R A M PTON J U N C T I O N .
Level Crossing O ver U p Siding.
This level crossing is pr otected on the East side by a swing chock on the Up Siding.
Before a shunting movement is made over t h e level crossing t he m an i n charge o f t he r ai l m ovem ent m ust.
first close the level crossing gates t o road traffic and then remove the swing chock from across the line.
54
On completion of the shunting operations the swing chock must be replaced across the line, after which the gates
may be re-opened t o r oad traffic.
The man i n charge of the rail movement must remain at the level crossing and pr event access over i t unti l the
shunting operations have been completed and the crossing is again clear.
L IN E N o . 73.- - SC OT SW OOD B R ID GE T O C O N S E T T N O R T K , V I A L I N T Z GR EEN , I N C L U D I N G
B LA YD ON S.W . A N D S.E. C U R VES.
L IN T Z GR EEN .
DELETE:-Station Signal Box —
Victoria Garesfield Colliery Single Li ne:—
When i t is necessary for a tr ain t o leave Victoria Garesfleld Colliery.
INSERT:—
Station Signal Box—
South Garesfield Colliery Single Li ne:—
When i t is necessary for a tr ain t o leave South Garesfield Colliery.
DELETE:—
H IGH W EST W OOD .
H am ster l ey C ol l i er y Sidings. Ow i ng to the gradient of the line, trains working traffic into and out of Hamsterley
Colliery Sidings m ust always have the engine at the lower end, or the whole of the train must be placed i n the sidings
clear of the Main line before any shunting operations are commenced. I n no circumstances must the van, or any por tion
of the train, or any wagons, be left on the Main line during the time the engine is engaged in the sidings.
PAGE 101.
EBCHESTER.
Stati on Sidings.
DELETE Instructions.
I NSERT:—
B L A YD ON S.W . C U R VE ( B ET W EEN B L A YD O N S O U T H SIGN A L B O X A N D B L A YD ON M I N ER A L
YARD G R O U N D FRAM E) .
Trains conveying em pty coaching stock must not pass any other train on the opposite line between Blaydon South
No. 14 signal and Blaydon Mineral Sidings Gr ound Frame. Trains in the Up direction must be br ought to a stand at the
Mineral Sidings Gr ound Frame t o per m it of the passing of Down trains, or alternatively trains i n the Down direction
must be br ought to a stand at Blaydon South N o. 8 signal t o per m it of the passing of Up trains.
Trains conveying l oaded coaching stock must not travel via this r oute.
INSERT:—
LIN E N o . 74. — S C O T S W 000 T O W EST W Y L A M V I A N O R T H W Y L A M .
L EM IN GT ON .
W ALBO T T LE SI G N AL B O X . Ow i ng to the gradient no train or part of a train is allowed to stand on the Down
Main Li ne unless the engine is attached at the Newbur n end.
If i t is necessary for an engine to r un r ound a train, or par t of a train, the tr ain or par t ther eof must be placed on
to the U p Main Li ne via the W est crossover, and firmly secured befor e the tr ain engine is detached and the r unning
round movement commenced.
DELETE:—
LIN E N o . 75. — H EXH A M ( B OR D ER C O U N T I ES) T O A L L EN D A L E.
L A N GL EY- ON - T YN E.
ST AT ION SID IN GS. Ow i ng t o the gr adient any tr ain e t c .
LIN E N o . 76.—H A L T W H IST L E T O A L ST O N , I N C L U D I N G L A M B L EY FELL B R A N C H .
INSERT:—
LAMBLEY FELL B R A N C H .
LAMBLEY FELL C OL L IER Y LINE.—Public Road L evel Crossing.
When approaching the public road level crossing, drivers and guards must exercise due care and be prepared t o
act on the signals of the Colliery handsignalman.
PAGE 102.
LIN E N o . 77.—N EW C A STLE Q U A YSI D E B R A N C H .
M A N OR S.
Ar gyl e St. Signal Box.—Quaysi de Br anch.
INSERT as second paragraph:—
On weekdays the Train Staff when not required for tr ai n wor king is retained i n the Yar d Inspector's Cabin at
Trafalgar Yard.
PAGE 104.
LIN E N o . 80.—B A C K W OR T H ( EA R SD ON ) T O N O R T H U M B ER L A N D D O C K , ET C .
INSERT:—
B A C K W OR TH .
A L GER N ON S I G N A L B OX.— M et h o d o f Cautioning.—Rule 44 ( b ) . Authority has been given f or the
Calling-on signal fixed under the Down Home signal t o be lowered after a train has been br ought near l y t o a stand,
although the section ahead is occupied.
PAGE 105.
INSERT:—
BETW EEN PER C Y M A I N N O R T H A N D EA R SD ON SI G N A L B OXES.
When i t is necessary in case of emergency for trains composed of coaching stock to be diverted via Percy Main Nor th
and Earsdon, such tr ains must not exceed a speed of 30 miles per hour , and must not pass another train composed of
coaching stock on t he opposite line.
55
S E CTI O NAL AP P E NDI X c ont i nue d.
The coaching stock must conform to the dimensions laid down in the "Dimensions of Loads" issued by the Railway
Clearing House in April, 1941, namely 9 ft. wide and 13 ft. high in centre from rail and l i f t , high at side from rail excepting
that i n an emergency, stock 9 ft. 3 i n. w i de may be allowed.
INSERT:--T YN E C O M M I S S I O N Q U A Y : PA SSEN GER ST A T I O N .
Drivers must keep a good look- out for the Rolling Bridge which fouls the r unning line when br ought i nto use at
the East end of the Station, and be prepared to stop shor t as necessary.
In the event of its being necessary for an engine to proceed beyond the Rolling Bridge, and the latter be placed across
the line between the engine and tr ain, a responsible member of the T.I.C. staff will inform the Driver what is being done.
After the engine has proceeded forward the Driver should not again m ove until verbally instructed by the responsible
member of the T.I.C. staff.
LIN E N o . 8I.— B A C K W OR T H T O M O R P E T H , I N C L U D I N G H A R T L EY T O M O N K S E A T O N W EST ,
N EW SH A M T O B L Y T H , B E D L I N G T O N T O C A M B OIS, N O R T H B L Y T H A N D N E W B I G G I N ,
A SH I N G T O N C OL L IER Y L IN ES.
PAGE 105.
INSERT:—
BEBSIDE
Horton Grange Siding.
A telephone is provided near Bebside Down Home signal to enable the Guard to inform the Signalman in accordance
with Rule 147 whenever a train, complete with tali lamp attached, has been shunted i nto the above siding clear of the
Down Main line.
PAGE 106.
INSERT:—
N EW SH A M .
ISABELLA SIGN A L B OX.— C OL L IER Y L I N E, PU B L IC R OA D L EVEL C R OSSIN G.
When leaving Isabella Colliery Sidings Drivers and Guards must exercise due care on approaching the public road
level crossing and be prepared t o act on the signals of the Colliery Handsignalman appointed t o pr otect the crossing.
DELETE:—
Present instructions headed " A S H I N G T O N C OL L IER Y C OM PA N Y' S L IN ES B ET W EEN EL L I N G T O N
COLLIERY and L Y N E M O U T H C OL L IER Y" .
INSERT:—
N.C.B. A S H I N G T O N L I N E B ET W EEN EL L I N G T O N C OL L IER Y A N D L Y N E M O U T H C OL L IER Y.
The N.C.B. lines between Ellington Colliery Signal Box and Lynemouth Colliery Signal Box are worked under the
Permissive Block System.
The line between Lynemouth Colliery No. 1 and No. 7 Colour light signals is used for traffic in both directions, the
controlling signals bei ng electrically interlocked.
SO U T H B L YT H ST A IT H S.
SIN GLE L I N E B ET W EEN N O T I C E B OA R D F I XED S O U T H O F N o . I S P O U T A N D N O T I C E B OA R D
NEAR C OA L SH I PPI N G F OR EM A N ' S OF F IC E.
SINGLE L I N E B ET W EEN N O T I C E B OA R D F I X E D N E A R C O A L SH I PPI N G F OR EM A N ' S OF F IC E
A N D N O T I C E B OA R D W EST O F N o . 8 SPOU T .
The Coal Shipping Foreman is i n charge of the Train Staff W or king.
Separate Train Staffs are provided for the sections of line specified above and no engine must foul ei ther of these
sections of line unless the Driver is i n possession of the appropriate Train Staff.
Receptacles for the Train Staffs are provided in the Guard's Room and also near to No. 1 Spout and W est of No. 8
Spout.
In the event of an engine requiring to leave the Staiths for the purpose of working Crofton Mill, Gas Works Siding,
or for Loco. duties, ther eafter r etur ning to the Staiths, the Train Staff must be placed by the Fireman or Guard i n the
receptacle provided i n the Guard's Room or , w i th the permission of the Coal Shipping Foreman, may be placed i n the
receptacle near No. 1 Spout or W est of No. 8 Spout.
•
In every case when w or k ceases on the Staiths the Train Staff for each section must be taken to the Guard's Room
and placed i n the receptacle provided, wher e they must remain unti l required again.
PAGE 107.
LIN E N o . 82.— C H EVIN GT ON T O A M B LE.
AM EN D BROOMHILL COLLIERY BRANCH t o r ead " A M B L E B R A N C H " and A M E N D second paragraph t o
read:—
A Gr ound Frame is pr ovided at Broomhill Colliery which will be operated by the W or king Foreman as required.
DELETE thi r d paragraph.
LIN E N o . 83.— A L N M OU T H T O C OL D ST R EA M .
AM EN D l i ne heading t o r ead:—
LIN E N o . 83.— A L N M OU T H T O A L N W IC K .
DELETE entries i n respect of EDLINGHAM AN D KIRKNEW TON.
INSERT:—
LINE N o . 83A.—COLDSTREAM T O W O O L ER .
K IR K N EW T ON .
STATION SIDINGS:—Owing t o the gradient, any tr ain stopping to shunt must be br ought to a stand w i thi n the
safety points in the loop, which must then be placed i n the run-off position, and no shunting must, in any circumstances,
be done outside these points.
INSERT:—
LINE N o . 85.—M OR PET H ST A T I O N T O R EED SM OU T H J U N C T I O N .
When i t i s necessary for Passenger or M ilitar y trains t o w or k over the branch the Station Master, Reedsmouth
will arrange attendance at Buteland Level Crossing for the passage of such trains. Dr iver s must keep a sharp l ookout
:for hand signals in the vicinity of the crossing.
) 56
SECTIONAL P . 1
. D I X —
M EL D ON .
c o n t i n u e d .
Down L in e Siding.
An intermediate key token instr um ent is provided. W hen i t is necessary t o refuge a tr ain or an Engineer's rail
motor in the Down Line Siding, and when a train or Engineer's m otor requires to leave the Siding, the instrument must
be operated i n accordance w i th the instructions exhibited at the gr ound frame.
M ID D L ET ON ST A T I O N .
Train W orking.
During shunting operations, the engine must always be at the M or peth end of the wagons.
Down Passenger trains must not stop at Middleton unless the automatic brake is working on the rear vehicle.
Down Goods trains may stop at the platform for the purpose of leaving or lifting road van traffic, but only if sufficient
brake pow er is applied at the rear of the tr ain t o hold i t.
SCOTSGAP JU N C T I O N .
Train W orking.
No Freight train may stand on the Main l i ne w i thout an engine attached. Befor e shunting operations by a Freight
train ar e commenced, the entir e train, including brake van, must be shunted from the Main line i nto the sidings.
Down Passenger trains must not stop at Scotsgap Junction unless the automatic brake is working on the rear vehicle.
Goods trains leaving the Yard at Scotsgap going in the direction of Reedsmouth must first be drawn forward on t o
the Rothbury Branch line, and from ther e propelled thr ough the crossover road on t o the Platform line. T he backward
movement fr om the Rothbury Branch line to the Platform line being on a falling gradient, the Guard, dur ing the time
the tr ain is being propelled, must r ide i n the brake van and give close attention t o the brake.
KN OW ESGAT E.
Intermediate Token Inst rument .
An intermediate token instrument is provided i n the office. W hen a train has been shunted clear of the Main line
and the points r etur ned to their normal position, the instrument must be operated i n accordance with the instructions
exhibited at the ground frame, which will admit of electric token working between W oodburn and Scotsgap being resumed'
R EED SM OU T H J U N C T I O N .
Platform f o r Messrs. Vickers Armst rong, Lt d.
This platform is situated about one and a half miles east of Reedsmouth Station.
When passengers are to be taken up or set down at the platform, timeous notices must be made by Messrs. Vickers
Armstrong, Ltd., workmen or guests, to the Station Master at Reedsmouth, w ho will give the necessary instructions to
the Guard and Driver.
Guards of trains stopping at the platform t o take up or set down passengers must r epor t such stoppages i n thei r
Train Journals.
Passengers alighting or joining trains at the platform must pay the fare to or from the station beyond.
When i t is necessary for trains t o stop at the platform after dark, Vickers Armstrong staff will arrange t o l i ght
the lamps.
LIN E N o . 36.—SCOTSGAP T O R OT H B U R Y.
L ON GW IT T ON .
Station Sidings.
During shunting operations, the engine must always be at the Rothbury end of the wagons.
Up Trains.
Up Passenger trains must not stop at Longwitton unless t he automatic brake is wor king on the rear vehicle.
Up Goods trains may stop at the platform for the purpose of leaving or lifting road van traffic, but only i f sufficient
brake power is applied at the rear of the train t o hold i t.
LIN E N o . 8 7 . — H E X H A M ( B O R D E R C O U N T I E S ) T O R I C C A R T O N S O U T H J U N C T I O N .
H E X H A A VIA D U C T .
Two engines coupled together must not be allowed to pass over Hexham Viaduct. T he loads of Passenger and Goods
trains proceeding over the Viaduct m ust not exceed t he w ei ght for one engine.
When the steam crane requires to r un over Hexham Viaduct a tool van must be placed between i t and the engine
and the l atter must be of a type per m itted i n the r oute availability.
W ALL.
Acomb C olliery.
A noti ce board is erected indicating the poi nt beyond which engines must not pass.
CH OLLER TON .
Cocklaw Siding.
Notice boards are erected at the east end of the hoppers, beyond which engines and vans exceeding 12 feet in height
above rail level m ust not pass.
Traffic to and from the outer siding of the Alston Limestone Company must be worked through the crossover between
the inner and outer sidings, and not over the Hexham Rural District Council Siding.
FALSTO NE.
Trains ent ering Goods Loop.
A tr ain requiring to enter the Goods Loop will be br ought to a stand at the relative Home signal. T he Signalman
will exhi bi t a green hand signal t o authorise the Driver to pass the Home signal at Danger to enter the Goods Loop.
PLASHETTS.
Intermediate Token Inst rument .
An intermediate token instrument is provided i n the office. W hen a train has been shunted clear of the Main line
and the points r etur ned to their normal position, the instrument must be operated in accordance with the instructions
exhibited at the ground frame, which will admit of electric token working between Kielder and Falstone being resumed.
KIELDER.d
Trains ent ering Goods Loop.
A tr ain requiring to enter the Goods Loop will be br ought to a stand at the relative Home signal. T he Signalman
will exhi bi t a green hand signal t o authorise the Driver to pass the Home signal at Danger to enter the Goods Loop.
5
SECTIONAL APP
—conti nued.
TABLE A .
LIN E N o . I.— SH A F T H OL M E T O B ER W IC K ( M A R SH A L L M EA D OW S) .
The Speed Limits and Permanent Speed Restrictions shown on pages 108 to 120 of the N.E. Sectional Appendix and
amendments ther eto, have been cancelled and the following substituted;—
Station, Junction, Signal Box, etc.
Speed Lim its
and Speed
Restr•ctions.
Miles per hour.
Up
Down
SH A F T H OL M E A N D ER YH OL M E
90
60
90
60
Arksey and Shaftholme Junction
Shaftholme Junction
Selby...
60
20
50
10
60
20
50
40
40
45
50
60
50
25
45
50
60
50
25
25
25
15
15
15
15
20
15
10
25
20
15
10
25
15
15
15
15
50
45
30
30
Naburn Swing Bridge
Chaloners W hi n
Ho!gate and Yor k Station
YOR K H O L G A T E J U N C T I O N
A N D SK EL T ON
Holgate Junction
York Yard South
York Station and Skelton
Skelton Signal Box and Thirsk (South
end o f Station)
Skelton Signal Box and Signal S.171
Skelton Bridge—between Signals S.171
and D.3.S...
Beningbrough
25
40
30
40
Raskell
40
Thirsk
20
35
30
20
20
30
Thirsk and N or thal l er ton
30
30
Wiske M oor W ater Troughs
70
70
80
60
so
Darlington
15
15
Aycliffe
60
60
ER YH OL M E A N D D U R H A M
( N EW T O N H A L L )
60
Location.
SPEED L I M I T . M A I N L IN ES.
SPEED L I M I T . PA SSEN GER L IN ES OT H ER
T H A N M A I N L IN ES.
Main Lines, 159 miles 36 chains t o 160 miles 22 chains.
To and fr om Knotti ngley Lines.
Main Lines, 174 miles 16 chains to 174 miles 30 chains.
Connection fr om U p Fast t o U p Slow Line ( U p Platform
Line) at 174 miles 30. chains.
Selby Swing Br idge, 174 miles 30 chains t o 174 miles
36 chains.
Passenger Lines, 174 miles 36 chains to 174 miles 78 chains.
174 miles 78 chains t o 175 miles 50 chains.
All connections Doncaster t o Leeds Lines and Leeds t o
Doncaster Lines, 186 miles 15 chains to186 miles 20 chains.
Up and Down Main Lines, 187 miles 50 chains to 188 miles
11 chains, i n R i ght D i r ec ti on onl y.
Up and Down Main Lines, 187 miles 50 chains to 188 miles
11 chains, i n W r ong D i r ecti on only.
All Lines other than M ain Lines, 187 miles 50 chains t o
188 miles 11 chains.
SPEED L I M I T . G O O D S L IN ES.
Goods Lines, 0 miles 0 chains to 0 miles 20 chains.
Goods Lines, 0 miles 20 chains to 0 miles 29 chains.
Up and D ow n M ain Lines, 0 miles 0 chains t o 0 m iles
42 chains, i n R i ght D i r ecti on only.
Up and D ow n M ain Lines, 0 miles 0 chains t o 0 miles
42 chains, in W rong Direction only.
All Lines other than Main Lines, 0 miles 0 chains t o 0 miles
42 chains.
Up and D ow n M ain Lines, 0 miles 42 chains t o 1 m i l e
9 chains.
All connections Fast to Slow and Slow to Fast Lines used by
Passenger trains, 1 m i l e 50 chains to 22 miles 10 chains.
Down Goods Line, 1 m i l e 46 chains to 2 miles 40 chains.
Down Goods Line, 3 miles 4i chains to 3 miles 23 chains.
Up and Down Slow Lines through Station, 5 miles 40 chains
to 5 miles 47 chains.
Down Slow through Station, 13 miles 23 chains to 13 miles
32 chains.
Connection, Down Fast to Down Slow at Thirsk Signal Box
(22 miles 31 chains).
Up Slow Line, 22 miles 12 chains t o 22 miles 6 chains.
Connection Down Slow to Down Fast, immediately N or th
of Thirsk Signal Box at 22 miles 36 chains.
Connections D ow n Sl ow t o D ow n Fast N or th o f Signal
0.22 CS at 22 miles 57 chains.
Connections U p Slow to U p Fast, South o f Signal U.22.5
at 22 miles 32 chains.
Connection U p Fast t o U p Slow, South o f Signal U.22 at
22 miles 27 chains.
All connections Fast t o Sl ow and Sl ow t o Fast used by
Passenger trains, N or th end of Thirsk Yard to South end
of Northallerton Up Platform inclusive, between 22 miles
60 chains and 29 miles 64 chains.
Up and D ow n Main Lines, 31 miles 63 chains t o 32 miles
11 chains.
SPEED L IM IT . PA SSEN GER L IN ES O T H ER
T H A N M A I N L IN ES.
Up and D ow n Lines thr ough Station, 43 miles 70 chains
48 miles 0 chains to 49 miles 26 chains.
SECTIONAL APPE — c o n t i n u e d .
TABLE A—(continued).
LIN E N o . I .
S H A F T
H O L M E
T Station, Junction, Signal Box, etc.
O
B
E
R
W
I
C
Preston
K
(
M
A bury
R
Brad
Ferryhill
S
H N o. 3
A
L
Ferryhill
L
Ferryhill
o. 1
M
E NA
Speed Lim its
and Speed
Restrictions
Miles per hour.
Up
Location.
Down
20
10
Trains enter i ng and tr avel l i ng ov er U p Goods Loop.
Trains enter i ng and tr avelling ov er D ow n Goods Loop,
To and fr om Dar lington, vi a Ferryhill Stati on, 56 miles
23 chains t o 56 miles 32 chains.
Leamside Lines 0 miles 37 chains to 0 miles 74 chains and
Through Platform Lines.
To and from Durham, via Ferryh ill Station, 57 miles 15 chains
61 miles 21 chains t o 61 m iles 67 chains.
62 miles 20 chains to 63 miles 0 chains. (Browney Colliery
Curve.)
75
25
75
25
25
25
15
15
D
O and Durham
Ferryhill
W
S
)
—
(RellycMillo
nDurham
t South
i
n
u
e
dD U R) H A .M ( N EW T O N HALL) A N D
NEW CASTLE V I A K . E . B . O R
H IGH L EVEL BRIDGE
75
70
75
70
70
50
30
70
50
30
75
60
80
60
Newton Hall
65
25
55
King Edward Br idge
Gateshead W est and Junction
65
25
55
70
55
50
20
10
Newcastle
15
15
15
15
NEW CASTLE A N D F A L L O D O N
80
60
80
60
Newcastle Central
Manors
15
25
30
45
60
75
40
60
70
65
60
70
15
25
30
45
90
60
90
60
70
80
50
30
60
70
80
50
60
SPEED L IM IT . PA SSEN GER LIN ES OT H ER T H A N
M A IN L IN ES.
57 miles 1 chai n t o 58 miles 67 chains.
70
60
70
60
Bensham
Heaton South
Benton Bank
Plessey and Stannington
Morpeth Curve
Morpeth and Pegswood
Acklington and W ar kw or th
Inmouth
Alnmouth and Longhoughton
Longhoughton and Li ttl e Mill
F A L L OD ON A N D M A R SH A L L
M EA D OW S
Lucker W ater Troughs
Beal Curves
Scremerston and Berwick
Berwick
Berwick-Marshall Meadows
55
35
20
10
75
40
60
70
65
60
70
70
SPEED L IM IT . M A I N L IN ES.
M A IN L IN ES.
All connections Main t o Slow and Slow t o Main.
Through Bridge, 79 miles 26 chains to 79 miles 42 chains.
All Lines, 79 miles 42 chains to 79 miles 57 chains.
Up and D ow n Lines thr ough Station and enter i ng D ow n
Slow, 0 miles 16 chains t o 0 miles 0 chains ( G.N. 8( B.
Mileage).
All Lines, 79 miles 70 chains t o Station, via Ki ng Edward
Bridge.
All Lines, 101 miles 45 chains t o Station, vi a High Level
Bridge (Leeds N or ther n Mileage).
M A IN L IN ES.
All Lines, 0 miles 0 chains t o 0 miles 25 chains.
Main Lines, 0 miles 25 chains to 0 miles 51 chains.
Tynemouth Lines, 0 miles 25 chains t o 0 miles 51 chains.
1 m i l e 76 chains t o 2 miles 7 chains.
59
TABLE A .
SPEED L I M I T S A N D R EST R IC T ION S, ET C .
PAGES 108 T O 189.
Speed Limits are not available for certain branches. U nti l this information is available, Drivers of trains over these
lines must wor k to the allowances shown in the W orking Time Table, and in no case must a maximum speed of 60 m.p.h.
be exceeded.
LIN E N o . I.— SH A F T H OL M E T O B ER W IC K ( M A R SH A L L M EA D OW S) .
(See pages 57 and 58 herein for alterations to Speed Limits and Speed Restrictions.)
Station, Junction,
Signal Box.
Speed Limits
and Speed
Restrictions
Engine
on Running Turntable.
Lines.
Catch
W ater
Points and Gr adi ent
Columns Spring or ( R i s i n g
or
Unworked u n l e s s
Trailing ot her w i s e
Troughs.
points. s h o w n ) .
Location.
Miles per hr.
Up. D ow n. Diameter.
PAGE 108.
Selby.
PAGE 109.
York.
W. or T.
CS. or U.
One i n.
50' 0"
5 2 ' 0'
DELETE:—
INSERT:—
-
DELETE:—
— 5 0 ' 0"
Inside N o. 1 Engine Shed.
Inside N o. 1 Engine Shed.
No. 1 D o w n G oods Y ar d
9S platform, Middle.
Nos. 9, 12, 14 and 16 platforms,
North End.
Up M ai n fr om Scarborough,
East E n d o f Scar bor ough
Bridge.
Down and U p lines, South End
of Locom otive Yar d Signal
Box ( fr ont) .
Nos. 9 and 12.
No. 14 (South of footbridge).
No. 16 ( N or th of footbridge).
INSERT:—
PAGE 110.
York.
DELETE:—
1680
(Falling)
1680
(Falling)
1680
(Falling)
INSERT:—
1680
(Falling)
1680
(Falling)
1680
(Falling)
PAGE 114.
Darlington.
PAGE 117.
Newcastle.
INSERT:—
Clifton Up Goods Independent.
Holgate.
Down Goods Independent.
Down G o o d s Independent.
Near Holgate Road Br idge
(Worked fr om Locom otive
Yard Signal Box.)
Down Doncaster Goods, 350
yards befor e reaching Yor k
Yard South H om e Signal.
(Worked fr om Locom otive
Yard Signal Box.)
Down Leeds Goods, 370 yards
before reaching Yor k Yar d
SouthHomeSignal. (W orked
from Locomotive Yard Signal
Box.)
Up Goods betw een Skel ton
and Clifton.
Holgate.
Holgate D ow n Loop.
Holgate D ow n Loop. N e a r
Holgate R oad Br idge.
(Worked fr om Yor k Signal
Box.)
Down Doncaster Goods, 350
yards befor e reaching Yor k
Yard South H om e Signal.
Box.)
Down Leeds Goods, 370 yards
before reaching Yor k Yar d
South H om e Signal.
Box.)
Up Goods and U p Reception.
(North End of Station.)
Under the heading Eas t End.
DELETE:—Reference t o
Nos. 2 and 3 platforms.
SECTIONAL1APP DI X —c onti nue d.
LIN E N o . I.— SH A F T H OL M E T O B W I C K ( M A R SH A L L M EADOW S) —( cont inued) .
W ater
Columns
or
Troughs.
Catch
Gradient
Points and
(Rising
unless
Spring or
Unworked otherwise
Trailing
shown).
points.
W. or T.
CS. or U.
One i n.
—
—
C
204
Down M ai n l i ne, 6 0 yar ds
ahead of Benton Bank Down
Advance Starting Signal.
42' 0
—
—
—
Behind Station near Rothbury
line.
Up Main line, 1 mile 358 yards,
before reaching Widdrington
Up Home Signal.
Down Goods.
Speed Limits
and Speed
Restrictions
Engine
Lines.
Station, Junction,
Signal Box.
Miles per hr.
Up.
Down. Diameter.
Location.
PAGE 118.
INSERT:—
Benton Bank . . . . . .
Morpeth.
PAGE 119.
—
—
-
-
—
—
—
—
S
330
INSERT:—
-
-
-
W
-
-
D EL ET E:
-
-
-
—
—
—
D EL ET E:
-
INSERT:—
W iddrington N or th . . .
Ainmouth.
PAGE 120.
42' 2"
Siding betw een D ow n Main,
and Alnwick Branch.
INSERT:—
LIN E N o . IA .— SH A F T H OL M E J U N C T I O N T O K N O T T I N G L EY ( EXC L U D I N G K N O T T I N G L EY) .
SH A F T H OL M E J C T .
AND
K N OT T IN GL EY
SO U T H .
Shaftholme Junction . . .
Nor ton . . . . . . . . .
Criddling Stubbs ... . . .
45
45
—
—
—
20
—
—
20
—
—
—
—
—
—
W
—
—
—
C
SPEED L IM IT .
—
—
220
Knottingley lines.
Down Main.
Down l i ne, 706 yards befor e
reaching C r i ddl i ng Stubbs
Down H om e N o, 1 Signal.
LIN E N o . S.—N EPT U N E STR EET T O SPR IN G HEAD B R A N C H .
PAGE 123.
INSERT:—
Springbank N o r t h a n d
Springbank South.
15
15
Level
Springbank N or th
Level
LIN E N o . 6 .
PAGE 124.
INSERT:—
H U L L
W EST PA R A D E A N D ( W
55 E 55
W IT H ER N SEA .
T
West Parade and BotanicS 35
35
Gardens.
P
A
R
40
Stepney and W ilmington...A 40D
E
30
Wilmington a n d South- ) 30
coates.
T
O
W
I
T
H
E
R
N
S
E
A
Springbank East l oop, 4 miles
805 yards (Alexandra Dock
and Stai r foot Branch m ileage) t o 2 miles 400 yards.
Neptune St. Branch mileage.)
Up W es t Branch. 3 3 0 yards
before reaching Springbank
West U p Home. ( W or k ed
from Spr i ngbank N o r t h
Signal Box.)
Up South Branch. 3 0 8 yardsbefore reaching Springbank
South U p Home. ( W or k ed
from Springbank N or th
Signal Box.)
—
—
—
—
SPEED L IM IT .
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
0 miles 48 chains t o 1 m i l e
4 chains.
2 miles 9 chains t o 2 miles
39 chains.
69 chains.
s.
61
LIN E N o . 6.— H U L L ( W EST PARADE) T O W 1THERNSEA—(continued).
Station, Junction,
Signal Box.
Speed Limits
and Speed
Restrictions
Engine
Lines.
Miles per hr.
Up.
Down. Diameter.
W ater
Columns
or
Troughs.
Catch
Gradient
Points and
(Rising
unless
Spring or
Unworked otherwise
Trailing
shown).
points.
W. or T.
CS. or U.
One i n.
Location.
. . .
25
25
—
—
—
—
t o 3 miles
'Southcoates and Marfleet
40
40
—
—
—
—
t o 4 miles
Southcoates . . .
Hedon
3 miles 25 chains
60 chains.
3 miles 60 chains
36 chains.
—
—
—
—
8 miles 15 chains
11 chains.
45
45
16 miles 51 chains
35 chains.
The above restri ctions are addi ti o nal t o the existing r e striction at West Parade.
O Patrington.
t
'Withernsea
t
D EL ET E:
r
i
IN SER T :
n
g
h
a
m
a
RAGE 124.
n
INSERT:—
dW I L M I N G T O N A N D
. H OR N SEA .
Nilmington Junction and
. Sutton.
. Nilmington Junction and
Sutton.
-
46' 0
-
-
-
-
S
-
Level
t o 8 miles
to 16 miles
End o f platform l i ne.
East end o f N o. 3 pl atfor m
line 6 0 f e e t f r om buf f er
stops, l eadi ng t o d e p o t
sidings, nor m ally l ai d f o r
platform l i ne.
LIN E N o . 7. — W I L M I N G T O N T O H O R N SEA .
t
60
60
—
—
—
—
SPEED L I M I T .
30
30
—
—
—
—
45
45
-
-
-
-
2 miles 45 chains t o 2 m ile
63 chains.
2 miles 63 chains t o 3 m ile
12 chains.
LIN E N o . 8.— H U L L ( W EST PARADE) T O SEA M ER W EST , ET C .
PAGE 125.
Cottingham South Jct.
DELETE:—
40
40
INSERT:—
50
50
15
15
—
—
—
—
C
Level
Up W es t Br anch, 255 yards
Signal Box.)
—
—
—
—
C
Level
—
—
—
—
C
Level
Up W est Branch. 3 3 0 yards
Signal Box.)
Up South Branch. 3 0 8 yard!
South U p Home. ( W or k ed
Signal Box.)
—
—
50' 0 '
—
—
—
Station Yar d.
—
—
—
—
W
—
—
—
—
Loco. Yar d.
Loco. Yar d—Engine P i t and
Turntable l i ne; C oal Stage
and Shed l i nes; Outgoi ng
line.
LIN E N o . 1 0 .
PAGE 126.
H UINSERT:—
L L
Springbank( N K
or thI .N. .
G
G
E
O
R
G
E
PAGE 127.
D DELETE:—
O
SpringbankCN or thK . . .
)
T
O
C
U
D
W
O
R
T
H
'Carlton Towers.
A D E LE TE :—
PAGE 128.
N
DELETE:—
'Cudworth D
S
T
A
I
R
F
O
O
T
.
2 miles 5 chains t o 2 m iles
12 chains.
2 miles 5 chains t o 2 m iles
12 chains.
To a n d f r om H essle R oad
direction..
LIN E N o . I I . — U P T O N & N O R T H EL M SA L L ( W R A N GB R OOK ) T O D EN A B Y & C O N I SB O R O U G H -
Station, Junction,
Signal Box.
Speed Limits
and Speed
Restrictions
Engine
Lines.
W ater
Columns
or
Troughs.
Catch
Gradient
Points and
(Rising
unless
Spring or
Unworked otherwise
Trailing
shown).
points.
Location.
Miles per hr.
Up.
Down. Diameter.
PAGE 128.
Hampole Viaduct.
DELETE:—
—
20
(Both directi ons) —
INSERT:—
10
(Both direct' ons)
W. or T.
CS. or U.
One i n.
—
—
—
—
—
—
48 chains.
60 chains.
LIN E N o . I 4. — H U L L T O L EED S I N C L U D I N G A N L A B Y R O A D L O O P , H ESSL E R O A D T O
C O T T I N G H A M S O U T H , ET C .
PAGE 129.
INSERT:—
Cottingham South
Junction.
PAGE 131.
DELETE:—
Swing Bridge
Selby W e s t a n d C anal
Signal Boxes
INSERT:—
Swing Bridge
Selby W e s t a n d C anal
Signal Boxes.
PAGE 132.
Leeds City South Station.
DELETE:--
15
15
1 m i l e 45 chains t o 1 m i l e
53 chains.
30
30
1
0
1
0
72 chains.
Reception Lines.
40
40
10
(Both directi ons)
INSERT:—
15
15
10
10
30 miles 67 chains to 30 miles
72 chains.
Reception Li ne.
All lines, 20 miles 25 chains to
West end of Canal Bridge.
West end of Canal Bridge.
LIN E N o . IS.—SELBY (BARLBY N O R T H ) T O D R IFFIELD ( ST A T ION JU N C T I O N ) .
DELETE:—
SELBY ( BARLBY
N OR T H ) A N D
DRIFFIELD
( ST A T ION JCT.) .
INSERT:—
SELBY (BARLBY
N OR T H ) A N D
DRIFFIELD
( ST A T ION JCT.) .
Bubwrth and M enthor pe
Gate.
DELETE:—
Market W ei ghton
65
65
SPEED L I M I T .
60
60
SPEED L IM IT .
16 chains (over Bridge No. 4).
35
35
INSERT:—
Market Weighton
3
5
Everingham and M ar k et
Weighton.
Market W eighton...
30
35
16 miles 17 chains (Selby and
Market W ei ghton mileage)
to 0 miles 6 chains (Market
Weighton a n d D r i f f i el d
mileage).
0 m i l es 6 c hai ns ( M ar k et
Weighton and Driffield mileage) t o 16 miles 17 chains
(Selby and Market Weighton
mileage).
38 chains.
16 miles 38 chains (Selby and
Market W ei ghton mileage)
to 0 miles 6 chains (Market
Weighton a n d D r i f f i el d
mileage).
63!
S E CTI O NAL AP P E NDI X — _ c oZt i nue c L
T ABLE A—( conti nued) .
LIN E N o . 16.—SELBY W EST T O C A W O O D .
Speed Limits
and Speed
Restrictions
Engine
Lines.
Station, Junction,
Signal Box.
Miles per hr.
Up. D o w n . Diameter.
W ater
Columns
or
Troughs.
W. or T.
Catch
Points and Gradient
Spring or
(Rising
Unworked
unless
Trailing otherwise
points.
shown).
CS. or U.
Location.
One i n.
PAGE 133.
INSERT:—
SELBY W E S T A N D
2
C A W OOD .
(Both 0di r ec ti ons)
SPEED L I M I T .
PAGE 135.
LIN E N o . 211—LEEDS ( W O R T L EY J U N C T I O N L .N .E.R .) T O N O R T H A L L ER T O N ( S T A T I O N A N D
B OR OU GH B R ID GE R O A D ) V I A A R T H I N G T O N A N D SIN D ER B Y, I N C L U D I N G W O R T L E Y T O
GELDARD A N D PA N N A L J U N C T I O N T O B I L T O N J U N C T I O N V I A STARBECK.
A M EN D L I N E H E A D I N G T O READ: —
L IN E N o . 20. — H EA D I N G L EY ( C A R D I G A N R O A D ) T O N O R T H A L L E R T O N ( S T A T I O N A N D
B OR OU GH B R ID GE R OA D ) V I A A R T H I N G T O N A N D SIN D ER B Y, I N C L U D I N G STARBECK N O R T H
T O B IL T ON .
DELETE:—
LEEDS ( W O R T L EY
JU N C T I O N ) A N D
HARROGATE V I A
A R T H IN GT ON .
Geldard and Leeds " B " ...
Geldard
.
.
.
. . .
—
—
—
SPEED L I M I T .
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
C
140
(Falling)
—
—
—
C
98
(Falling)
20 chains. ( W o r t l e y Jct .
to " B " Box Jct. m ileage.)
Up Goods Indept. to Whitehall
LMS, 41 yards from Geldard
Signal Box. ( W or k ed fr om
Signal Box.)
Up N.E. Goods line t o Yar d.
200 yar ds befor e r eaching
Yard entr y signal. ( W or ked
from Signal Box.)
Connections betweenLN ER
and L M S lines.
Scarborough Sidings, Ar m l ey
Bridge. S h e d Road, Loco.
Yards.
60
60
20
20
—
•
W ortley Junction... . . .
20
20
—
—
—
—
Armley
—
—
—
W
—
—
60
60
—
—
—
—
SPEED L I M I T .
—
—
—
—
S
245
—
Up Main. T r ai l i ng poi nts at
Parma' Junction.
SPEED L IM IT .
.
.
.
. . .
INSERT:—
H EA D IN GL EY
( CARDIGAN RD.)
A N D H A R R OGA T E
VIA A R T H I N G T O N
DELETE:—
Parma! . . .
. . .
PAN NAL JC T. A N D
B IL T ON JC T. V I A
STARBECK.
Pannal Junction . . . . . .
50
50
—
40
40
—
—
—
—
Starbeck . . . .
.
.
INSE
STARBECK -N O R T H
AND B IL T ON
Starbeck . . . R. T. :. . . .
PAGE 136. —
Harrogate.
DELETE:—
Ripon.
DELETE:—
PAGE 137.
Northallerton South Jct.
DELETE:—
—
—
50' 0"
—
—
—
52 chains..
Loco. Yar d.
SO
50
—
—
—
—
SPEED L I M I T .
—
—
52' 0"
—
—
—
Loco. Yar d.
—
—
50' 0"
—
—
—
Up Sidings, N or th End.
—
—
47' 3'
—
—
—
Yard Sidings.
30
30
—
—
—
—
25
—
—
—
—
To and fr om Yor k and N ew castle Main lines.
To and fr om Yor k and N ew castle Main lines.
INSERT:—
25
64
SECTIONAL APPE
ontinued•
LIN E N o . 21.— A R T H IN GT ON ( S O U T H A N D N O R T H ) T O IL K L EY.
Station, Junction,
Signal Box.
Speed Limits
and Speed
Restrictions
Engine
Lines.
Miles per hr.
Up.
Down. Diameter.
W ater
Columns
or
Troughs.
Catch
Gradient
Points and
(Rising
unless
Spring or
Unworked otherwise
Trailing
shown).
points.
W. or T.
CS. or U.
One in.
PAGE 137.
Ar thington South.
DELETE:—
—
—
—
—
S
277
(Falling)
.INSERT:—
—
—
—
—
U
277
(Falling)
.
Location.
West Junction Trailing Points
from South and Nor th Signal
Boxes.
West Junction Trailing Points
from South and Nor th Signai
Boxes.
LIN E N o . 22.—N ID D B R ID GE ( R IPLEY) T O PA T EL EY BRIDGE.
PAGE 137.
INSERT:—
—
N ID D B R ID GE . . .
25
(RIPLEY) A N D
(Both directi ons)
PATELEY BRIDGE.
Pateley Bridge.
—
—
DELETE:—
42' 6"
—
—
—
—
—
—
INSERT:—
—
—
—
SPEED L I M I T .
—
W
W
—
—
—
—
—
—
Loco. Yar d.
Engine Shed line and Main line.
Main line.
LIN E N o . 24.—M ELM ERBY N O R T H T O T H IR SK , ET C .
PAGE 138.
Thirsk.
DELETE:—
20 1 2 0
INSERT:— 2 0
30
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
37 miles 49 chains.
49 chains.
L IN E N o . 2 5 . — N O R M A N T ON ( A L T O F T S ) T O Y O R K ( C H A L O N E R S W H I N J U N C T I O N
IN C L U D IN G W H I T W O O D T O M E T H L E Y , C A ST L EF OR D S T A T I O N T O C U T SYK E, ET C .
PAGE 139.
INSERT:—
CASTLEFORD ( C EN .)
A N D C U T SYK E
JU N C T I O N .
Milford Yar d.
DELETE:—
INSERT:—
20
20
SPEED L I M I T .
Up Goods Main to Normanton;
Up M ai n t o N or m antom
(two) D ow n Main to Yor k;
Down Main t o Hull.
Up Goods Main to Normanton;
Up M ai n t o N or m anton;
Up Branch t o N or m anton;
Down Goods Main to Yor k,
S E CTI O NAL AP P65
EN /
—conti nued.
LIN E N o . 26.—B OL T ON - ON - D EA R N E ( D EA R N E JU N C T I O N ) T O B U R T O N SA L M O N , I N C L U D I N G
M OOR T H OR PE ST A T I O N T O S O U T H KIRKBY, FERRYBR1DGE T O K N O T T I N G L EY, B R A C K EN H IL L
BRANCH.
Station, Junction,
Signal Box.
Speed Limits
and Speed
Restrictions
Engine
Lines.
W ater
Columns
or
Troughs.
Catch
Gradient
Points and
(Rising
unless
Spring or
Unworked otherwise
Trailing
shown).
points.
W. or T.
CS. or U.
One i n.
—
—
—
SPEED L I M I T .
—
—
—
SPEED L IM IT .
—
—
—
—
SPEED L I M I T .
—
—
—
—
Miles per hr.
Up.
Down. Diameter.
• Location.
PAGE 140.
DELETE:—
DEARNE JU N C T I O N
AND
M OOR T H OR PE.
INSERT:—
W A T H R OA D . . .
JU N C T I O N A N D
M OOR T H OR PE.
75
75
45
45
—
—
PAGE 141.
INSERT:—
(After entry for Moorthorpe
Station.)
SOU T H K IR K B Y
BRANCH.
M OOR T H OR PE ST N .
S O U T H K IR K B Y
JU N C T I O N .
•
15
15
DELETE:—
3rackenhill Li ght Railway
near Ac k w or th M o o r
Both direct i ens)
LIN E N o . 28.—YOR K ( SK EL T ON ) T O H A R R OGA T E ( D R A GON ) .
PAGE 142.
Knaresborough (Goods).
DELETE:—
Down Main and Siding.
PAGE 143.
LIN E N o . 29.—K N A R ESB OR OU GH ( GOOD S) T O P I L M O O R N O R T H .
AM EN D LI N E H EAD I N G T O R EAD :—LIN E NO. 29.—KN AR ESSOR OU GH ( GOOD S) T O BR AF F ER T ON .
INSERT:—
K N A R ESB OR OU GH
25 '
—
GOOD S A N D
(Both direct i ions)
BRAFFERTON.
1
SPEED L IM IT .
LIN E N o . 30.—YOR K ( W A TER W OR K S) T O SC A R B OR OU GH , ET C .
PAGE 143.
York Station
INSERT:—
15
15 1 1
-
Station to 0 miles 26 chains.
LIN E N o . 31.— M A L T ON ( SC A R B OR OU GH R OA D ) T O GIL L IN G.
PAGE 144.
INSERT:—
30
M A L T ON ( SC A R .
B OR OU GH R OA D ) (Both directi ons)
A N D G1L L IN G.
20
Malton (Scarborough
Road Junction).
(Both directl ens)
SPEED L IM IT .
49 chains.
66
Station, Junction,
Signal Box.
LIN E
—
Ncoo
. 32.—M
n t i n AuLeT ON
d . EA ST T O DRIFFIELD
Speed Limits
and Speed
Restrictions
Engine
Lines.
W EST .
Gradient
Catch
Points and
(Rising
unless
W ater
Spring or
otherwise
Columns Unworked
or
Trailing
shown).
Troughs.
points.
Location.
Miles per hr.
Up.
Down. Diameter.
W. or T.
CS. or U.
One i n.
—
—
—
SPEED L IM IT .
-
-
-
16 miles 46 chains to 16 mile!
51 chains.
PAGE 144.
INSERT:—
—
M A L T ON EA ST A N D
25
DRIFFIELD W EST .
(Both directi ons) 20
Through Wharram Station.
(Both directi ons)
LIN E N o . 33.—R IL L IN GT ON T O W H I T B Y.
PAGE 144.
Pickering.
PAGE 145.
Gosmont.
DELETE:—
DELETE:—
50' 0"
Turntable line.
Siding near H i gh M i l l Signal
Box.
42' 0"
Deviation Gr ound Frame.
PAGE 145.
LIN E N o . 34.—PICKERING ( M IL L L A N E) T O P I L M O O R S O U T H ( N O R T H A N D S O U T H C U R VES)
A M EN D L IN E H EA D IN G T O
READ:—
L IN E N o . 34.—K IR B YM OOR SID E T O P I L M O O R S O U T H ( N O R T H A N D S O U T H C U R VES) .
PAGE 145.
DELETE:—
INSERT:—
K IR B YM OOR SID E
A N D G1L L IN G.
ALL ENTRIES.
30
30
SPEED L IM IT .
15
15
289
(Falling)
ALL C O N N E C T I O N S
SIN GLE T O D O U B L E
LINES.
Up L i n e 2 2 0 y ar ds befor e
reaching Star ti ng signal.
(Worked from signal box.)
Kirbymoorside Line.
SPEED L IM IT .
888
ALL C O N N E C T I O N S
SIN GLE T O D O U B L E
LINES.
Down South curve to Sunbeck
clear of Junction w i th Main
Line.
0 miles 31 chains to Junctions
with Main Li ne.
Helmsley
Gilling
GIL L IN G A N D
PIL M OOR S O U T H
40
40
15
15
Pilmoor South
Pilmoor N or th and South
Curves.
25
25
PAGE 145.
LIN E N o . 35.—PICKERING ( M IL L L A N E) T O SEA M ER W EST .
A M EN D L IN E H EA D I N G
T O READ: —
LIN E N o . 35.—PICKERING ( M IL L L A N E) T O T H O R N T O N D A L E.
PAGE 145.
DELETE:—
PICKERING A N D
25
SEAMER.
(Both direct' ons)
Seamer W est
INSERT:—
PICKERING A N D
2
T H O R T O N D A L E.
(Both directi ons)
SPEED L IM IT .
326
Down Passenger Independent,
etc.
SPEED L I M I T .
67
?
I
f
LINE N o . 36.—SC A R B OR OU GH ( FALSGRAVE) T O M ID D L ESB R OU GH V I A G U I SB O R O U G H, ETC.
Station, Junction,
Signal Box,
Speed Limits
and Speed
Restrictions
Engine W a t e r
on Running Turntable. C ol um ns
Lines.
or
Troughs.
Miles per hr.
Up. D ow n. Diameter.
W. or T.
Catch G r a d i e n t
Points and ( R i s i ng
Spring or u n l e s s
Unworked other w i se
Trailing s h o w n ) .
points.
CS. or U.
Location.
One in.
PAGE 146.
INSERT:—
20
—
Scarborough, Falsgrave
and Gallows Close.
(Both di r ec t' ons)
10
—
Hayburn W y k e
(Both di r ec ti ons)
0 m iles 0 chains t o 0 miles
21 chains.
Level C r ossi ng a t 6 m i l es
461 chains.
PAGE 147.
INSERT:—
Loftus and Staithes
Brotton.
D ELET E:
Brotton and Boosbeck
INSERT:—
30
15
—
20
—
-
3 6
miles 14 chains to 36 miles
25 chains.
3 6 miles 40 chains to 36 miles
76 chains.
-
5 0 ' 0'
-
20
G o o d s Yard.
-
DELETE:—
Kiltonthoroe Branch
110
143
128
1 N SER T :
2
Kiltonthorpe—Kilton
Mines.
(Both irecti ons)
2
(Both
irectl ons)
Kilton Mines
20
Lingdale Branch—Lingdale Mines.
(Both directi ons)
Lingdale
Lingdale Mines
—
C
9
8
8
4
—
C
43
1 3
miles 0 chains t o 14 miles
44 chains.
Clear o f foul i ng p o i n t o f
Junction w i t h M ai n l i ne.
(Worked from Kiltonthor pe
Signal Box.)
Exit f r o m Li ngdal e M i nes
Sidings.
Exit from Ki l tonthor pe Mines
Sidings.
25 chains.
1 chain.
Exit fr om Mines Sidings.
(Worked by Hold-up Lever.)
9 chains.
Clear o f foul i ng p o i n t o f
Junction with Lingdale Mine
Branch. ( W o r k e d f r o m
Ground Frame.)
Exit fr om Mines Sidings.
Priestcroft
DELETE:—
144
1NSERT:—
114
Priestcroft Branch
DELETE:—
55
55
55
INSERT:—
55
, 5 5
(Falling)
Up l i ne. 3 0 8 yar ds befor e
reaching Pr i es tc r oft U p
Home Signal.
Home signal.
Up line. Clear of fouling point
with M ai n l i ne a t N or t h
Skelton ( w o r k e d f r o m
North S k e l t o n S i g n a l
Box.)
Up l i ne. 4 0 y ar ds a f t e r
passing N or th Skel ton U p
Advanced Starting signal.
Home Signal.
Through Si di ng. C l e a r o f
fouling poi nt with Main line
at N or th Skelton ( W or ked
from N or t h Skelton signal
Box.)
Through Si di ng. C l e a r o f
fouling point with Main line
at Priestcroft (Worked from
Priestcroft Signal Box .)
68
SECTIONAL APPEN X—continuecL
L IN E N o . 39.—PIC T ON T O G R O SM O N T .
T
A
Catch
Speed Limits
B
Points and Gradient
and Speed
W ater
(Rising
L
Restrictions
Spring or
Station, Junction,
Engine
Location.
unless
on Running Turntable. Columns Unworked
Signal Box.
E
or
Trailing otherwise
Lines.
A
shown).
Troughs.
points.
—
Miles per hr.
(
One i n.
Up. Down. Diameter. W. or T. CS. or U.
c
oPAGE 149.
DELETE:—
—
n
—
—
—
—
W
Down l i ne; U p line.
Stokesley . . . . . . . . .
—
—
—
—
—
\A/
Down platfor m and Bay.
t Battersby . . . . . . . . .
INSERT:—
i
—
—
—
—
Down l i ne.
W
—
—
nStokesley . . . . . . . . .
—
—
—
W
Down platfor m and Bay; U p
Battersby . . . . . . . . .
platform, W est end.
u
e
dL IN E N o . 40.—D A R L IN GT ON S O U T H T O SA L T B U R N , I N C L U D I N G F I G H T I N G C OC K S B R A N C H ,
)
GEN EVA C U R VE.
.
PAGE 149.
Eaglescliffe N or th and
Bowesfield.
Over Juncti on t o and fr om
15
15
INSERT:—
Goods l i nes, 1 0 m iles 3 0
chains to 10 miles 34 chains.
PAGE 150.
Thornaby and N ew por t.
55
INSERT:—
55
53 chains.
Newport,
Nos. 4 and 5 D ow n Goods
\A/
DELETE:—
Independents, N o. 2 D ow n
Goods Yar d.
No. 4 Down Goods line, No. 2
INSERT:—
Down Goods Yard.
PAGE 151.
INSERT:—
Connections D ow n M ai n t o
20
20
Eston W est and GrangeDown Goods and Up Goods
town.
to U p M ai n. 1 7 m i l es
74 chains.
Connections Goods Lines t o
25
25
Dorman, Long at Co.'s Beam
Mill Lines. 1 8 miles 4 chains
-Grangetown.
Connections M ai n L i n e t o
INSERT:—
20
20
Goods Li nes a n d G oods
Lines to Main Lines immediately East o f Gr angetow n
Signal Box . 1 8 m iles 6 5
chains t o 1 8 m i l es 7 5
chains.
Down Goods Li ne over Junc20
tion with W o r k s Lines.
19 m iles 4 0 chains t o 1 9
miles 45 chains.
406
Up Main. T r ai l i ng poi nts o f
Connection from U p Goods
Line, W est of Junction with
Beam M ill Lines.
406
Connection U p Beam Mill line
to U p Goods line.
406
DELETE:—
Up Goods Indept. C l ear o f
fouling p o i n t w i t h D ow n
Main. ( W or ked fr om signal
box.)
LIN E N o . 43.— N OR T H A L L ER T ON ( ST A T ION A N D B OR OU GH B R ID GE R OA D ) T O H A R T L EPOOL ,
IN C L U D IN G L O N G L A N D S L O O P , ET C .
PAGE 153.
Northallerton East . . .
DELETE:—
—
—
—
—
To and from Nor thaller ton.
35
35
INSERT:—
—
—
25
—
—
To and from Nor thaller ton.
35
"
Station, Junction,
Signal Box.
Speed Limits
and Speed
Restrictions
Engine
Lines.
Miles per hr.
Up.
Down. Diameter.
Catch
Gradient
Points and
(Rising
W ater
unless
Spring or
Columns Unworked otherwise
or
Trailing
shown).
Troughs.
points.
W. or T.
CS. or U.
One i n.
Location.
PAGE 153.
I NSERT:—
Boroughbridge Road . . .
Longlands Loop . . . . . .
30
30
25
30
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
DELETE:—
—
—
50' 0
—
— •
—
INSERT:—
North Shore Branch . . .
—
—
—
—
S
' 78
Newburn Junction and
Cliff House Branch.
10
10
—
—
—
—
PAGE 154.
Stockton.
PAGE 155.
To and fr om Longlands Loop.
66 chains.
Phoenix Sidings.
Up line, 26 yards N or th W est
of Portrack Level Crossing.
Over connecti ons, 1 m i l e
0 chains t o 1 m ile 6 chains.
LIN E N o . 44.—T H OR N A B Y ( B OW ESFIELD ) T O W EL L F IEL D , I N C L U D I N G R ED M A R SH A LL N O R T H
T O R ED M A R SH A LL EA ST.
PAGE 157.
Bowesfield.
D EL ET E:
-
-
-
-
-
C
628
IN SER T :
-
-
-
-
-
C
628
I NSERT:—
Redmarshall East ... . . .
—
—
—
—
C
100
(Falling)
Welifield . . . . . •
—
—
—
—
C
270
• • •
Down l i ne, cl ear o f foul i ng
point a t Bowesfield.
(Worked fr om Signal Box.)
Up line, clear of fouling poi nt
at Bowesfield. ( W o r k e d
from Signal Box.)
Down Li ne cl ear o f foul i ng
point w i th Ferryhill line.
Up Branch line clear of fouling
point w i th Main lines.
LIN E N o . 45.— ST OC K T ON ( N O R T O N - O N - T E E S S O U T H ) T O F ER R Y HILL N o . 3 , I N C L U D I N G
C H IL T ON B R A N C H .
PAGE 157.
DELETE:—
ST OC K T ON
(IN ORT•0 N - ON TEES SO U T H ) A N D
FERRYH1LL N o . 3.
and Redmarshall.
INSERT:—
ST OC K T ON
( N OR T ON - ON TEES SO U T H ) A N D
FERRYHILL N o . 3.
Stillington N or th.
D EL ET E:
-
45
45
—
—
—
—
SPEED L IM IT .
35
35
—
—
—
—
15 chains.
35
35
—
—
—
—
SPEED L IM IT .
35
35
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
W
—
—
21 chains.
Near U p M ain advanced
Starting Signal.
—
10
(Both directl ons)
—
—
—
PAGE 158.
INSERT:—
(Before Chilton Crossing.)
Gipsy Lane. . .
. . .
.
When approaching the crossing. T h e Engi ne W hi stl e
must be sounded approaching the W arning Boards.
r
-
/70
SECTIONAL "OP D1X—continued.
L IN E N o . 46.—POR T C LA R EN E A N D B IL L IN GH A M B EC K B R A N C H .
Speed Limits
and Speed
Restrictions
Engine
Lines.
Station, Junction,
Signal Box.
W ater
Columns
or
Troughs.
Catch
Gradient
Points and
(Rising
unless
Spring or
otherwise
Unworked
shown).
Trailing
points.
Location.
Miles per hr.
Up.
Down. Diameter.
PAGE 158.
Port Clarence.
DELETE:—
W. or T.
CS. or U.
One i n.
Sidings.
50' 0"
PAGE 159.
L IN E N o . 49.— D A R L IN GT ON ( H O P E T O W N ) T O P E N R I T H ( ED EN VA L L EY J U N C T I O N ) ,
IN C L U D IN G M ER R YB EN T B R A N C H , F OR C ET T B R A N C H .
DELETE:—
MERRYBENT B R A N C H .
PAGE 159.
DELETE:—
Barton Goods . . . . . .
PAGE 161.
INSERT:—
KIRKBY ST EPH EN
A N D ED EN
VA LLEY JC T.
—
—
45
45
—
W
—
—
Sidings.
—
—
—
SPEED L IM IT .
LIN E N o . SO.—BARNARD C A STLE ( TEES VA L L EY) T O M ID D L ET ON - IN - T EESD A L E.
PAGE 161.
INSERT:—
Tees Valley Junction
To and from Main line.
0
(Both di recti ons)
LIN E N o . 51.—KIRKBY ST EPH EN T O PEN R IT H .
PAGE 161.
INSERT:—
KIRKBY ST EPH EN
TEB A Y
40
SPEED L IM IT .
40
LIN E N o . 52.—D A R L IN GT ON ( PARKGATE) T O T O W L A W .
PAGE 163.
Shildon South.
D EL ET E:
-
423
(Falling)
220
INSERT:—
Crook.
DELETE:—
LIN E N o . 5 5 .
PAGE 164. B A R N A R
DELETE:—
Gibbs Neese D
C A S T
L E
PAGE 165.
A
Cockfield Fell.E
INSERT:—
S
T
T
O
D
U
R
H
A
M
(
R
E
L
Up Reception, Clear of fouling
point w i th M ai n Li ne.
Up Reception, Clear of fouling
point w i th M ai n Li ne.
Outside Station.
42' 0"
119
Down M ain 473 yards befor e
reaching Gibbs Neese Down
Home Signal.
119
Down Main; 1 mile 1700 yards
before r eachi ng C ockfi el d
Fell Down Hom e Signal.
SECTIONAL A P P E N D O i
—
c ontinue d.
PAGES 169 A N D 170.
L IN E N o . 6I.— GA T ESH EA D ( GR EEN SFIELD , D U N S T O N L I N ES) T O B L A YD O N V I A N O R W O O D ,
IN C L U D IN G B E N S H A M C U R V E A N D N O R W O O D T O L O W F EL L , R E D H E U G H B R A N C H ,
T A N F IEL D B R A N C H A N D B L A YD ON L O O P .
The fol l ow i ng speed restrictions w i l l appl y t o passenger o r coaching stock tr ai ns w hi ch may be di ver ted i n
emergency via the routes shown.
Route.
S
p
e
e
d
not to exceed
m.p.h.
Between Blaydon and K.E. Bridge via Nor wood, ex c epti ng between 1 m i l e 60 chains and 2 miles
Between Blaydon and K.E. Bridge via Norwood, between 1 mile 60 chains and 2 miles 44 chains . . .
Between Blaydon and Low Fell via N or w ood . . . . . .
2
0
Between Low Fell and K.E. Br idge via Bensham Cur ve . . .
2
0
Between Blaydon Main and Blaydon South . . .
. . .
1
0
20
1
0
LIN E N o . 62.— W EST H A R T L E P O O L ( C EM ET ER Y W E S T ) T O GA T ESH EA D ( GR EEN SFIELD ) V I A
H OR D EN , ET C .
Station, Junction,
Signal Box.
Speed Limits
and Speed
Restrictions
Engine
Lines.
Miles per hr.
Up.
Down. Diameter.
W ater
Columns
or
Troughs.
Catch
Points and Gradient
Spring or
(Rising
Unworked
unless
Trailing otherwise
points.
shown).
W. or T.
CS. or U.
One i n.
W
—
—
Location.
PAGE 171.
Monkwearmouth.
DELETE:—
—
—
INSERT:—
—
—
—
W
—
—
DELETE:—
Monkwearmouth . . •
—
—
—
—
S
Level
Connection from Up Goods to
Turntable. Li e normally for
Up Goods. Tr ains may pass
through poi nt s f r om U p
Goods o r Sidings w hen i n
reverse position.
—
—
—
W
—
—
—
—
—
Down Goods Yard and N o. 1
Siding, W ear m outh Yar d.
SPEED L I M I T .
Inside Engine Shed.
PAGE 172.
Wearmouth.
INSERT:—
—
‘
•
10
10
—
—
—
45' 0 '
—
—
—
15
15
—
—
—
—
INSERT:—
ugh Street and Gateshead
Junction.
—
15
—
—
—
—
;ateshead Junction and
Park Lane.
15
-
-
-
-
-
N OR T H D O C K . . .
BRANCH.
3orough Gardens.
DELETE:—
PAGE 173.
DELETE:—
-ligh Street and Gateshead
Junction.
Up Main—Passenger Stati on;
No. 12 Siding Goods Yar d;
No. 1 Si di ng a n d D o w n
Independent—Goods Yard.
Up Main. Passenger Station.
No. 1 2 Siding and Engi ne
Pit, Goods Yar d.
Trains passing thr ough Station
and trains entering Passenger
Independent, 101 m i l es 13
Trains passing thr ough Station
and tr ai ns enter i ng D ow n
Slow l i ne, 101 m i l es 1 3
75 chains.
SECTIONALP E N D I X — c o n t inued.
LIN E N o . 63.—H A R T L EPOOL ( C EM ETER Y S O U T H ) T O FER R YH ILL N o . I .
Station, Junction,
Signal Box.
Speed Limits
and Speed
Restrictions
Engine
Lines.
Catch
Gradient
Points and
(Rising
unless
Water
Spring or
or
Trailing
shown).
Troughs.
points.
Location.
Miles per hr.
Up.
PAGE 173.
Hart.
Down. Diameter.
W. or T.
CS. or U.
One In.
—
—
—
—
C
50
—
—
—
—
C
50
—
—
—
—
'C
180
—
—
—
—
S
162
INSERT:—
—
—
—
—
C
180
DELETE:—
Castle Eden . . . . . .
—
—
—
W
—
—
—
—
—
—
C
160
(Falling)
Castle Eden W est . . .
—
—
—
—
C
160
(Falling)
INSERT:—
Castle Eden . . . . . .
-
-
-
W
-
PAGE 174.
Hesleden.
DELETE:—
DELETE:—
-
Down line. 1 m i l e 258 yards
after passing Hart Signal Box.
Down line. 1 m i l e 600 yards
before r eac hi ng H esl eden
Signal Box.
Down Goods Loop. C l ear o
fouling point with Main line.
Down M ai n e n d o f tr ai l i ng
connection D o w n G o o d s
Loop t o Down Main.
Down line. 6 6 5 yards befor e
reaching H esl eden Si gnal
Box.
Up Goods Independent; U p
Main; Down Main.
Up Goods Loop. C l e a r o f
fouling point with Main line.
(Worked from Station Signal
Box.)
Up Goods Independent. Clear
of fouling poi nt w i t h M ai n
line. ( W or k ed fr om W est
Signal Box.)
Up Main; Down Main.
PAGE 175.
LIN E N o . 65.—M U R T ON T O D U R H A M EL VET , I N C L U D I N G B R OOM SID E T O SH ER B U R N N O R T H
A M EN D L IN E H EA D I N G T O READ: —
LIN E N o . 65.— M U R T ON T O SH ER B U R N N O R T H .
PAGE 175.
INSERT:—
—
25
M U R T ON T O
SHERBURN
(Both directions)
COLLIERY
—
10
Pittington and
Sherburn N or th
(Both direct i ons)
DELETE:—
—
—
50' 0'
Durham Elvet•
—
—
. —
—
—
—
SPEED L IM IT .
—
—
—
35 chains.
—
W
—
—
—
—
Sidings ( U p Side).
ab
No. 4 Siding and Turntable.
LIN E N o . 68.— SOU T H D O C K B R A N C H ES.
PAGE 177.
South D ock.
INSERT:—
42
42
Up line from Dock Bottom to
Hendon. C l e a r o f fouling
point w i th D ow n line.
Up line from Dock Bottom to
Hendon. 1 7 0 yards befor e
reaching Hendon U p Home
signal.
73
S E CTI O NAL AP P E NDW- Lc ont i nue d.
LIN E N o . 69. —TYNE D O C K T O A N N F I E L D P L A I N ( A N N F I E LD EAST ) V I A ST ELLA G I LL, ET C .
Station, Junction,
Stria! Box.
Speed Limits
and Speed
Restrictions
Engine
Lines.
Miles per hr.
Up.
Down. Diameter.
W ater
Columns
or
Troughs.
Catch
Gradient
Points and
(Rising
unless
Spring or
Unworked otherwise
Trailing
shown).
points.
W. or T.
CS. or U.
One i n.
Location.
PAGE 178.
Washington South.
INSERT:—
—
—
—
W
—
—
Durham Turnpike.
INSERT:—
25
25
—
—
—
—
D EL ET E:
Stella Gill ... - . . . . . .
23 chains.
—
60' 0"
—
—
—
NAeat K i p near H aus Signal
, Box.
Stanley Level . . . . . .
Peiton Level . . . . . .
IN SER T :
Stella Gill ... - . . . . . .
Stanley Level
eiton Level . . .
—
—
60' 0"
—
—
—
—
—
—
W
—
—
—
—
—
—
-—
W
W
•—
—
—
—
—
—
60' 0"
W
—
—
,
—
W
—
—
W
—
—
Pontop line; Down Pontop
inc.
South si de near H aas Signal
Box.
South K i p T ur ntabl e l i n e ;
West Ki p Turntable line.
Ur line near Louisa Pit.
Cc al line from Pontop.
W eat Side Turntable line near
latts Signal Box.
UF line near Louisa Gr ound
1
Frame.
0 : tside Engine Shed.
LIN E N o . 70.—PELA W T O F ER R YH IL L ( TU R SD A LE) V I A L EA M SID E, I N C L U D I N G D E L M O N T T O
D U R H A M G O O D S , ET C .
PAGE 179.
Washington.
DELETE:—
Up Pontop line: Up Main line;
Down M a i n l i n e ; D o w n
Pontop line.
•
Up Main line; Down Main line.
INSERT:—
Belmont and Durham
Goods.
PAGE 180.
DELETE:—
Peiaw
Pelaw
INSERT:—
••• • • • •
Jarrow
High Shields.
IN SER T :
-
10
(Both direct' ons)
LIN E N o . 7 1 .
P E L A W
T
O
30 S 30O
U
T
H
25 S 25H
I
E
L
D
30
30
S
.
1 m i l e 1 0 chains t o 1 m i l e
16 chains, D ur ham Goods
Branch.
To and fr om Leeds and Newcastle line.
To and fr om Leeds and N ew castle line.
27 chains.
Between N o r t h a n d S out h
Shunt Spur s, East end o f
Station Yar d.
No. 1 Reception Siding, Goods
Yard.
L IN E N o . 72.—N EW C A STLE N o . 3 T O CARLISLE.
Speed Limits
and Speed
Restrictions
Engine
Lines.
Station, Junction,
Signal Box.
Catch
Gradient
Points and
(Rising
unless
W ater
Spring or
or
Trailing
shown).
Troughs.
points.
Location.
Miles per hr.
Up.
PAGES ISO A N D 181.
DELETE:—
INSERT:—
N EW C A STLE A N D
H A Y D O N B R ID GE.
Newcastle N o. 3 ... . . .
Down. Diameter.
W. or T.
CS. or U.
lane i n.
All ex i s ti ng entries i n respect of speed l i m its and sp eed restrictions, and
—
—
—
SPEED L IM IT .
55
SS
15
15
—
—
—
—
Newcastle C entr al a n d • 45
Elswick
35
Elswick . . . . . . . . .
45
--
--
—
—
—
—
—
—
Elswick and Blaydon . . .
45
45
—
—
—
—
Btaydon Curves . . . . . .
35
35
—
—
—
—
Blaydon and Ryton . . .
45
45
—
—
--
—
Wylam Curves . . .
. . .
40
40
—
—
—
—
.
50
50
—
—
—
40
40
—
—
—
—
Riding Mill and Corbridge
45
45
—
—
—
—
Corbridge and Hexham ...
50
50
—
—
—
—
Fourstones
. . .
50
50
—
—
—
—
H A Y D O N BRIDGE
A N D GR EEN H EA D .
Haltwhistle and
Greenhead.
GR EEN H EA D A N D
CARLISLE.
Naworth and Br am pton
Junction.
Heads N ook and
Wetheral.
Wetheral Cur ve ... . . .
60
60
—
—
—
—
55
55
—
—
—
—
SO
SO
—
—
—
—
45
45
—
—
—
—
45
45
—
—
35
35
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
W
--
—
Stocksfield ...
.
Stocksfield Cur ve
. . .
PAGE 181.
Blaydon.
.
. . .
DELETE:—
—
Newcastle Central Station t o
0 miles 23 chains.
32 chains.
1 m i l e 5 6 chains t o 1 m i l e
65 chains.
17 chains.
0 chains.
73 chains.
78 chains.
17 chains.
42 chains.
8 chains.
64 chains.
7 chains.
SPEED L I M I T .
32 chains.
SPEED L I M I T .
19 chains.
67 chains.
3 chains.
Down Main; Redheugh line.
LIN E N o . 73.— SC OT SW OOD B R ID GE T O C O N SET T N O R T H V I A L I N T Z GR EEN .
PAGE 182.
Swalwell.
DELETE:—
140
140
INSERT:—
140
140
Up l i ne, 1 m i l e 1414 yar ds
before r eaching Lockhaugh
Up Home Signal.
Up l i ne, 1070 yar ds befor e
reaching Loc k haugh U p
Home Signal.
Up l i ne. 2 miles 842 yar ds
before r eachi ng Rowlands
Gill U p Home Signal N o. 1.
Up l i ne. 1 m i l e 488 yards
before r eachi ng Rowlands
Gill U p Home Signal N o. 1.
LIN E N o . 74.— SC OT SW OOD T O W EST W YL A M V I A N O R T H W YL A M .
Speed Limits
and Speed
Restrictions
Engine
Lines.
Station, Junction,
Signal Box.
Miles per hr.
Up.
Down. Diameter.
Water
Columns
or
Troughs.
Catch
Gradient
Points and
(Rising
unless
Spring or
Unworked otherwise
Trailing
shown).
points.
W. or T.
CS. or U.
One i n.
Location.
PAGE 183.
DELETE:—
Newburn Curves . . .
30
30
—
—
—
—
INSERT:—
SC OT SW OOD A N D
W EST W YL A M .
Scotswood ... . . . . . .
14 chains.
45
45
—
—
—
—
SPEED L I M I T .
15
15
—
—
—
—
Lemington and N ew bur n
30
30
—
—
—
—
Newburn Cur ve ... . . .
30
30
—
—
—
—
Heddon-on-the-Wall and
North Wylarn.
North W ylam and W est
Wylam and over Junction w i th Main line.
30
30
—
—
—
—
15
15
—
—
—
—
5 chains.
43 chains.
14 chains.
44 chains.
35 chains.
PAGE 183.
L IN E N o . 75. — H EXH A M ( B OR D ER C O U N T I ES) T O A L L EN D A L E.
DELETE:—The lin e heading and all ent ries in respect o f same.
LIN E N o . 76.—H A L T W H IST L E T O A L ST O N , ETC .
PAGE 183.
DELETE:— All e xisting entries.
INSERT:—
H A L T W H IST L E A N D
3
A L ST ON .
(Both directi ons)
—
Haltwhistle and Feather25
stone Park.
(Both direct' ons)
Featherstone Park and
25
Coanwood.
(Both di recti ons)
20
Coanwood and Slaggyford.
(Both directi ons)
—
30
Lambley and Slaggyford
(Both di recti ons)
Alston
SPEED L I M I T .
0 miles 17 chains
72 chains.
3 miles 67 chains
8 chains.
4 miles 56 chains
13 chains.
6 miles 10 chains
33 chains.
Engine Shed line.
t o 0 miles
t o 4 miles
t o 5 miles
t o 6 miles
LIN E N o . 78.— M A N OR S T O T Y N E M O U T H V I A B A C K W OR T H , I N C L U D I N G B E N T O N N O R T H
W EST, S O U T H W EST A N D S O U T H EA ST C U R VES, ET C .
PAGE 184.
Jesmond.
DELETE:—
75
Down l i ne, 440 yards befor e
reaching W e s t J es m ond
Down Hom e Signal.
Down line. 3 9 6 yards befor e
reaching W e s t J es m ond
Down Hom e Signal.
INSERT:—
—
DELETE:--South Gosforth East Jct.
35
35
INSERT:—
South Gosforth East Jct....
74 chains.
30
30
74 chains.
40
40
3 chains.
75
PAGE 185.
INSERT:—
Howdon-on-Tyne Viaduct
SECTIONAL APF'E DIX—continued.
L IN E N o . 79.— SOU T H GOSF OR T H T O P O N T E L A N D A N D DARRAS H A L L , I N C L U D I N G S O U T H
GOSF OR T H EA ST T O W EST .
Station, Juncti )n.
Signal Box.
Speed Limits
and Speed
Restrictions
Engine
Lines.
W ater
Columns
or
Troughs.
Catch
Gradient
Points and
(Rising
unless
Spring or
Unworked otherwise
shown).
Trailing
points.
Location.
Miles per hr.
Up.
Down. Diameter.
W. or T.
CS. or U.
One i n.
—
—
—
SPEED L I M I T .
—
—
—
SPEED L I M I T .
—
—
—
SPEED L IM IT .
—
—
—
SPEED L IM IT .
PAGE 185.
INSE RT:—
—
30 3 0
S O U T H G O S F )RTH
ST A T ION A N D
C OXL OD GE.
—
30 3 0
S O U T H G O S F )RTH
EST.
EAST A N D
-3
0
C O XL O D G E A 41D
PON T EL A N D
(Both di r ec t ons)
30
DARRAS H A L L
BRANCH.
(Both di r ec t on:)
LINE N o . 80.—B A C K W OR TH ( EA R SD ON ) T O N O R T H U M B ER L A N D D OC K , ET C .
PAGE 187.
INSERT:—
Tyne Improvement
—
Commissioners N o. 1.
67
Up l i ne fr om Al ber t Edward
Dock, 2 5 5 y ar ds bef or e
reaching T.I.C. N o . 1 U p
Main Home Signal.
LIN E N o . 81.—B A C K W OR TH T O M O R PET H , I N C L U D I N G N E W S H A M T O EIL YT H , ET C .
PAGE 187.
INSERT:—
Seghill South
Isabella.
INSERT:
249
(Falling)
Down Main, 150 yards ahead
of Down Main Home Signal.
218
Up Main, 106 yards in advance
of Blyth U p Starting Signal.
L IN E N o . 82.— C H EVIN GT ON T O A M B L E.
PAGE 188.
INSERT:—
C H EVI N G T O N A N D
AM BLE
Amble
3
l ( B o t h
DELETE:—
0
directi ons)
SPEED L I M I T .
Single line.
PAGE 188.
L IN E N o . 8 3 . — A I N M O U T H T O C OL D ST R EA M , A M E N D L I N E H E A D I N G T O R EA D : —
LIN E N o . 83.— A L N M OU T H T O A L N W IC K .
PAGE 189.
DELETE:—
5
A L N W IC K A N D
2
COLDSTREAM .
(Both di recti ons)
—
Whittingham
0
Learchild Level Crossing
(Both di recti ons)
10
Rosedene Level Crossing
(Both directi ons)
10
W ooler Haugh Level
Crossing.
(Both directi ons)
10
Brewery Road Level
Crossing.
(Both directi ons)
10
W ooler South Level
Crossing.
(Both directi ons)
SPEED L IM IT .
Down l i ne.
*W hen passing.
*W hen passing.
*W hen passing.
*W hen passing.
*W hen passing.
77
,
Station, Junction,
Signal Box.
Speed Limits
and Speed
Restrictions
Engine
Lines.
Miles per hr.
,
Up. I 1Down. Diameter.
,
PAGE 189.
Alnwick.
DELETE:—
—
—
INSERT:—
—
—
PAGE 189.
INSERT:—
Water
Columns
or
Troughs.
Catch
Gradient
Points and
(Rising
unless
Spring or
Unworked otherwise
Trailing
shown).
points.
W. or T.
CS. or U.
Location.
One In.
50' 0"
—
—
50' 0
—
—
In siding between i In mouth
and Coldstream Bra nch lines.
In si di ng betw een / Inmouth
and Ainwick Br? lc h lines.
THE FOLLO WING LIN E HEADIN G (above t
existing entry in respect of NA ooler):—
LIN E No. 8 3A.—CO LDSTREA M T O W he
OOLER.
PAGE 189.
L IN E N o . 84.— T W EED M OU T H N O R T H T O K EL SO, A M E N D L I N E H E A D I N G T O READ: —
LIN E N o . 84.— T W EED M OU T H N O R T H T O C A R H A M .
DELETE:—
T W EED M O U T H A N D
KELSO.
Sprouston ... . . . . . .
INSERT:—
T W EED M O U T H
AND CARHAM.
45
45
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
W
—
—
Up line.
45
45
—
—
—
—
SPEED L IM IT .
SPEED L IM IT .
PAGE 189.
INSERT:—
LIN E N o . 85.—M OR PET H ( ST A T I O N ) T O R EED SM O U T H J U N C T I O N .
Scotsgap Junction...
W oodburn
6
6
45' 0 '
300
In Yar d Platform.
W hen lifting or leaving Tablets.
Up line, 240 yards i n r ear of
Starting Signal. ( W o r k e d
from Signal Box.)
LIN E N o . 86.—SCOTSGAP T O R OT H B U R Y.
Rothbury
Rothbury, C r ook Level
Crossing.
42' 0"
-10
(Both directi ons)
Platform Engine Shed.
Approaching Level Crossing.
LIN E N o . 87.—HEXHAPol ( B OR D ER C O U N T I ES) T O R IC C A R T ON S O U T H JU N C T I O N .
H E X HAM (BORDER
C OU N T IES) T O
RICCARTON
SOU T H .
Hexham (Border
Counties)
Wall and Humshaugh
Wark and Reedsmouth
Reedsmouth Junction
35
35
—
10
(Both direct ions)
25
(Both directi ons)
—
25
(Both directi ons)
45' 0"
Fa!stone
Plashetts
Plashetts and Lewiefleld
Kielder Forest
Riccarton
—
25
(Both di recti ons)
2
(Both d recti ons)
1
0
0
75
SPEED L I M I T .
32 chains.
35 chains.
5 chains.
Wansbeck Platform.
Up and D ow n Platfor m and
Wans beck Platform.
On Loop. ( W o r k e d f r om
Signal Box.)
Platform.
59 chains.
10 chains
Branch l i ne cl ear o f foul i ng
point w i t h U p M ai n l i ne.
(Worked from South Signal
Box.)
TABLE B .
LINES W OR K ED U N D E R PERMISSIVE B L OC K SYSTEM .
Line.
PAGE 190.
INSERT:—
1
DELETE:—
1
1NSERT:—
1
To
From
Line N o.
Down.
Up.
Barlby N or th
Bariby
No. 1 Goods
No. 2 Goods
South Points
Loco. Yar d
York
Locomotive Yar d
Platform
Locomotive Yar d
Leeman Road
Platform . • •
Waterworks
Leeman Road
Clifton
Waterworks
Clifton
Locomotive Yar d
Loco. Yar d
South Points
Locomotive Yar d
Platform
Locomotive Yar d
Leeman Road
Locomotive Yar d
Waterworks
Platform
Clifton
Leeman Road
Clifton
Waterworks
York Yar d So.
—
Goods Independent
—
—
Main and No.8 Platform
—
Nos. 14 and 15 Platrins.
York Yar d So.
Locomotive Yar d
York Yar d So.
Leeman Road
Leeman Road
York Yar d So.
Leeds Goods
Doncaster Goods
Goods independent
Goods
York
York Yar d So.
York Yar d So.
York
York
York Yar d So.
York Yar d So.
York
Main
Station
—
Doncaster Goods.
Leeds Goods.
Goods Independent.
Goods.
Goods.
Leeds Goods.
Doncaster Goods.
Doncaster Goods
Leeds Goods
Scarborough Goods
Scarborough Goods.
• • •
•••
••
••
••
••
•••
Geldard
W ortley
Leeds " B "
Geldard
Fighting Cocks
S. & D . Crossing
Lingfield Lane
S. & D . Crossing
Fighting Cocks
Lingfield Lane
Nos. 14 and 15 Platrms.
—
Main and No.9 Platform.
No. 8 Platform.
Station.
Main.
Main
PAGE 191.
DELETE:—
Wooden Gate
Goods Independent
1 A l n m o u t h South...
PAGE 192.
DELETE:—
Manor House
5 N e p t u n e Str eet
Goods
Manor House
Neptune Str eet
—
Hessle Road
Dairycoates East
Goods
Hessle Road
Dairycoates East
I NSERT:—
•• Dairycoates East... •••
5
Hessle Road
• Goods
•• Hessle Road
Dairycoates East
—
•
• Springbank N or th
Springbank South
•
•
•
•
Main
South
Springbank N or th
••• Main
•• Springbank
Springbank W est
Springbank South
•••
•
•
•
Springbank South
Springbank W est
•••
• Albert Dock
Springbank South
•• Main
•• Springbank South
Albert Dock
DELETE:—
••• Springbank Nor th
10
Spri ng ban k South
Main
• Springbank South
Springbank Nor th
Main
Springbank West
Springbank South
••• Springbank South
Spri ng ban k West
••• Albert Dock
Springbank South
Main
•• Springbank South
Albert Dock
PAGE 192.
The author ity for working Passenger Trains under the Permissi ve Block System has be
be deleted fr om the e xisting Appendi x entr i e
of the following lines and the asterisk sho uld
Outward G.
West Parade
14
Hull, Paragon
Inward A . & F.
West Parade
Hull, Paragon
PAGE 193.
DELETE:—
20 * W o r t l e y
*Geldard
• * G e l d a r d
*Leeds " B "
40 S . & D . Crossing
Fighting Cocks
• IN SER T :
S . 8( D . Crossing
-• 4 0
Lingfield Lane
Lingfield Lane
Fighting Cocks
Goods Independent.
—
Goods Independent.
Main and No.9 Platform.
•
••
•••
•••
•••
••
Main
Main
Goods.
Goods.
Goods.
Main.
Main.
Main.
Main.
Main.
Main.
en withdrawn in the case
a:—
Main.
Main.
Main.
Main
Main.
Main
Main
Main.
81 („„
TABLE D.—(continued).
Line
DELETE:—
64
INSERT:—
64
Staff Station.
(Custodian o f Staff is Signalman unless
otherwise shown.)
Section o f Line.
Nimmo's Branch
Shotton Colliery Branch
Wellfield.
Shotton.
Shotton Colliery Stop Signal and Shotton Colliery
Sidings.
DELETE:—
65
Durham Elvet
I NSERT:—
69
Pelton Colliery Branch
DELETE:—
75
*Allendale Branch
77
*Newcastle Quay Side
I NSERT:—
77
*Newcastle Quay Side
Shotton.
Broomside.
Pointsman at South Side Box.
Border Counties.
Argyle Street.
Argyle Street Signalman or Trafalgar Yard inspector.
TABLE E.
W OR K IN G I N W R O N G D IR EC T ION .
Line N o.
From
Line.
To
Up.
Down.
PAGE 202.
DELETE:—
1
Selby South
Selby Canal
I NSERT:—
1
No. 1 Goods Indept.
No. 2 Goods Indept.
Selby South
Selby Canal
No. 1 Goods.
No. 2 Goods.
(No. 2 Goods may be
used with or without
Brake Van.)
York N o. 1 U p
York Yar d South
York N o. 2 U p
Locomotive Yar d
Locomotive Yar d
York (Platform)...
Waterworks
York (Platform)
York (Platform)
Waterworks
York (Platform)
Locomotive Yar d
No. 3 Independent.
Leeds Goods.
Goods Independent.
DELETE:—
1
INSERT:—
1
DELETE:—
1
I NSERT:—
1
DELETE:—
20
I NSERT:—
25
DELETE:—
40
I NSERT:—
40
PAGE 203.
I NSERT:—
62
DELETE:—
64
Main
Main
Main.
9 Platform.
—
Leeds Goods.
Goods.
Goods Nos. 1 & 2.
*Ferryhill N o. 1
Ferryhill N o. 2
*Fixed signals pr ovided at No. 2, but fixed signals only provided at No. 1 from U p Goods No. 1 t o
Down Goods No. 1.
York No. 2 Up
York Yar d South
York N o. 1 U p
Holgate
No. 3 Independent
Killingworth Sidings
Killingworth Station
Main
Killingworth Sidings
Kill ingworth Station
Sidings.
Main
Geldard
W ortley
Main
Sherburn-in-Elmet North
Sherburn-in-Elmet South
Goods to Bacon Factory
Connection.
Foreshore
Lackenby Slag Siding
Old River...
Grangetown
No. 5 Goods Indept.
Goods Independent.
Normanby
Cargo Fleet
No. 2 Goods.
Turntable Sidings
Ground Frame,
Monkwearmouth.
Wearmouth
No. 2 Goods Indept.
(Light engines only).
Thornley Station
Wheatley Hill
No. 9 crossover.
Main ( C ol l i er y C o.' s
private locomotive
and carriage).
82
TABLE F.
LEVEL C R OSSIN G GA T ES— OPEN IN G A N D C L OSIN G B Y T R A IN M EN .
Line N o.
PAGE 203.
INSERT:—
3
16
22
23
26
29
32
34
35
45
56
DELETE:—
59
79
INSERT:—
79
82
83
83A
85
Situated Between.
Name of Crossing.
Mill Road
Field Lane
Ealand
Hagg Lane
Beltoft
Burnham Lane
(a) Leeds Road
Ross...
Glasshouses
Wath Lane
Nosterfield...
Thornborough
Aid burgh
Mill Lane
Wath Lane
Hum berton
Myton Gates
(b) Little Driffield
(b) Garton Baulk
(b) Garton Slack
(b) W etwang Green Lane
(c) Starfitts Lane
(c) Pockley Gates
(c) Harome
Eastgate
Haygate Lane
Hugton
Westfield
Broadmire
Gipsy Lane
Unthank
Coronation...
..•
•••
•••
•••
•••
•••
•••
..•
•••
•••
•••
•••
•••
•••
Crowle and Belton.
Crowle and Belton.
Crowle and Belton.
Crowle and Belton.
Belton and Epwor th.
Epworth and Haxey.
Selby W est and W istow.
Birstwith and Dacre.
Dacre and Pateley Bridge.
Melmerby and Tanfield.
Melmerby and Tanfield.
Meimerby and Tanfield.
Tanfield and Masham.
Brackenhill and Hemsworth Colliery.
Brafferton and Boroughbridge.
Driffield and Gar ton.
Driffield and Gar ton.
Garton and W etwang.
Wetwang and Sledmere & Fimber.
Kirbymoorside and N aw ton.
Nawton and Helmsley.
Helmsley and Nunnington.
Pickering (Mill Lane) and Thor nton Dale.
Chilton Bank Foot and Chilton.
Stanhope and Westgate.
Westgate and Wearhead.
*Saltersgate
High Callerton
Bells
Burnhill and Saltersgate.
Callerton and Panteland.
Coxiodge and Callerton
(a) High Callerton
(a) Bells
Callerton and Ponteland.
Coxiodge and Ca[lemon.
•••
•••
•••
Township
(a) Bendor
Hagg Lane
Langham
Kilham
Kirknewton
Yeavering
(d) Buteland
..•
Chevington and Am ble
W ooler and Ak eId.
Mindrum and Coldstream.
Mindrum and Kir knewton.
Mindrum and Ki r knew ton
AkeId and Kir knewton.
AkeId and Kir knewton.
Reedsmouth and W oodbur n.
(a) T he Guard must assist the Fireman i n both opening and closing the gates.
(b) These instructions apply except when Passenger Trains are r un on the Branch. F or instructions regarding the
working of the gates when Passenger Trains are r un, see page 41 o f this supplement.
(c) These instructions apply except when Passenger Trains are r un on the Branch. F or instructions regarding the
working of the gates when Passenger Trains are r un, see page 42 of this supplement.
(d) These instructions apply except when Passenger or Military Trains ar e r un on the Branch. F o r instructions
regarding the working of the gates when Passenger or Military Trains are r un, see page 55 of this supplement.
D EL ET E:
Asterisk and note.
TABLE G .
T O W I N G O F VEH IC L ES:
Line N o.
Place.
PAGE 204.
INSERT:—
DELETE:—
1 Y o r k , Signal Engineer's Loading Dock, Queen Street.
7 Sutton- on- H ul l .
9 E a r s w i c k ( Down Siding)
83
T ABLE G . — T O W I N G O F VEHICLES- - - ( continued.)
Line N o.
INSERT:—
DELETE:—
INSERT:—
Place.
15
32
Menthorpe Gate.
Garton.
Wetwang.
36
63
65
78
84
Hawsker.
Coxhoe Br idge.
Pittington ( not m or e than 2 wagons for W arehouse Siding).
Preston Colliery Depots.
Sprouston.
85
87
Me!don.
Wark.
Tarset.
TABLE H .— PL A C IN G T R A IN S O R VEH IC L ES O U T SI D E H O M E SIGN A L S.
Line N o.
PAGE 204.
INSERT:—
1
PAGE 205.
DELETE:—
22
INSERT:—
26
28
DELETE:—
34
44
Line.
Signal Box.
Remarks.
W arkworth
(Southside).
Down
The brakes of one wagon i n five m ust be
pinned dow n. T h e r e m ust be no tr ai n
between signals Nos. 2 and 8 at Acklington
before the Blocking Back signal is accepted
by Acklington and unti l the Obstruction
Removed signal is received.
Dacre
Up Direction
Pontefract South
Pontefract (Baghill)
Station.
Knaresborough Station
Up Branch (towards Pontefract (Monkhill) ) .
Down
Kirbymoorside
Wynyard
Up Direction
Down
Trains composed of Coaching Stock only.
Fully fi tted Coaching Stock.
TABLE J.
EN GIN ES A SSIST IN G I N R EA R O F T R A IN S.
Line N o.
To
From
Condition.
Trains Author ised and Remarks.
PAGE 206.
DELETE:—
1
Durham N or th
ReIly Mill
Passenger and Freight Trains:—
Slip couplings at Durham for U p Express
Passenger Trains assisted out of Durham
Station.
INSERT:—
1
Durham Up Platform
Durham South
Passenger Trains. Assistant engine must not
go far ther than is necessary to clear the
crossover r oad at Durham South Signal
Box and i n no case far ther than the U p
Starting Signal.
Cudworth
Stairfoot
Denaby and C onisborough.
Sprotborough
10
A M EN D : —
11
A
Freight Trains.
Condition " C " to read " D " and del ete to
following remarks
" If the slip coupling i s not available t he
assisting engine must be coupled t o the
train by the ordinary coupling, the Guard
to remove the coupling with the shunting
pole from the brake van when the tr ain
has r eached t h e t o p o f t h e i ncl i ne,
approximately 156 yar ds f r om Spr atborough Down Distant Signal."
SECTIONALIM(ENDIX—continued.
TABLE J—(continued).
EN GIN ES A SSIST IN G I N REAR O F TRAINS—(continued).
Line N o.
DELETE:—
20
PAGE 207.
DELETE:—
36
INSERT:—
36
From
INSERT:—
49
51
DELETE:—
52
INSERT:—
52
PAGE 208.
INSERT:—
60
DELETE:—
60
I NSERT:—
60
PAGE 210.
INSERT:—
80
DELETE:—
83
I NSERT:—
85
Condition.
Trains Author ised and Remarks.
Geldard
Leeds " B "
A
Freight Trains. R ear engine must not assist
until t he w hol e of the tr ai n has passed
clear o v e r t h e crossings a t Gel dar d
Signal Box.
Loftus
Carlin H ow
Brotton
Grinkle
Brotton
Carlin H ow
A
A
A
Freight Trains.
Freight Trains.
Freight Tr ains, pr ovi ded tr ai n does n o t
convey timber, castings or other articles
on tw o or m or e bolster wagons.
Crag Hall
Brotton
Brotton
Crag Hall
A
A
Freight Trains.
Freight Tr ains, pr ovi ded tr ai n does n o t
convey timber, castings or other articles
on tw o or more bolster wagons.
Saltburn W est
A
Saltburn W es t
Stain more
A
40
Redcar (Upleatham)
AM EN D to re ad:—
Redcar
DELETE:—
Kirkby Stephen
49
Junction
51
To
} As shown.
Passenger and Freight trains—slip couplings
at Kir kby Stephen. W hen i t is necessary
to attach assisting engine t o the rear of
Passenger train dur ing snowstorms, or in
stormy weather the assisting engine must
be coupled w i th the screw instead of the
slip coupling, and t he Autom atic br ake
pipes connected.
Freight tr ains—slip couplings a t Ki r k by
Stephen.
Kirkby Stephen
Junction
Ravenstonedale
Kirkby Stephen
Junction
Stainmore
Kirkby Stephen
Junction
Kirkby Stephen
Junction
Stain more
A
Passenger trains—slip couplings at Ki r kby
Stephen. D u r i n g snowstor m s o r i n
stormy weather the assisting engine must
be coupled w i th the screw instead of the
slip coupling, and t he Autom atic br ake
pipes connected.
Freight trains.
Tebay
A
Freight trains.
Shildon South
Fieldon Br idge
A
Freight Trains.
Hopetown
Shildon N or th
Shildon N or th
Fieldon Br idge
A
A
Freight Trains.
Freight Trains.
Consett N or th
Carr House East
A
Freight Trains.
South Pelaw
Carr House W est
A
Freight Trains.
South Pelaw
Consett Fell (C.I.C.)
A
Freight Trains.
Percy Main N or th
Earsdon
A
Passenger and Empty Coaching Stock Trains
when di ver si ons a r e author i s ed i n
emergency.
Whittingham
Alnwick
A
Cattle Trains.
Reedsmouth...
Broomhope Siding...
A
Special Trains conveying guns.
TABLE K .
TR A IN S D R A W N B Y PI L O T EN G I N E W I T H T R A I N E N G I N E I N REAR.
Line N o.
PAGE 210.
DELETE:—
1
From
York (Clifton)
York (W aterworks)
Newcastle N o. 1
Heaton South
To
Waterworks
Platform
Heaton South
Newcastle N o. 1
Line.
Up
Up
Down
Up
Applies t o
Empty Coaching Stock Trains.
Empty Coaching stock Trains.
t 85
SECTIONAL APPENDIX—ccintinued.
TABLE'K—(continued).
T R A IN S D R A W N B Y PI L O T E N G I N E W I T H T R A IN E N G I N E I N REAR—(continued).
Line N o.
INSERT:—
1
I NSERT-:—
5
10
DELETE:—
20
INSERT:—
26
PAGE 211.
INSERT:—
66
68
To
From
Line.
Applies t o
Newcastle N o. 1
Benton Bank
Benton Bank
Newcastle N o. 1
Down
Up
Springbank N or th
Albert Dock
Hull (West Parade)...
Springbank N or th
Alber t Dock
Springbank N or th
Springbank N or th
Hull (West Parade)...
Down
Up
Up
Down
Leeds " B "
W ortley (L.N.E.R.)
Geidard
Armley
Geldard
Leeds " B "
Armley
Geldard
Down
Up
Down
Up
Freight Trains during fog or falling snow.
Freight Trains during fog or falling snow.
Freight Trains.
W ath Junction
Dearne Junction
Up
Freight Trains dur ing fog or falling snow.
Hendon
Hendon
Pallion
Ryhope Grange
Up
Up
Freight Trains.
Freight Trains.
TABLE L .
PR OPELLIN G O F T R A IN S O R VEH IC L ES.
From
Line N o.
To
Line.
No. o f Vehicles and
Special Conditions.
PAGE 212.
DELETE:—
1
Selby South
Selby Canal
Freight Tr ai ns w i t h o r w i t hout
Brake Van.
I NSERT:—
1
Nos. 1 a n d 2 U p
Goods I ndept.
Selby South
Selby (Canal)
No. 1 U p Goods
Selby South
Selby (Canal)
No. 2 U p Goods
Freight W agons w i th o r w i thout
Brake Van.
Brake Van. A l s o applicable I n
wrong direction.
Chaloners W hi n
South Points
South Points
Chaloners W hi n
Down Leeds
Down Doncaster
Up Leeds
Up Doncaster
Down Passenger
lines.
DELETE:—
1
1NSERT:—
1
PAGE 213.
DELETE:—
1
I NSERT:—
1
Stores Vans.
Stores Vans.
tSouth Points
Clifton
tClifton
South Points
Up Passenger lines
York (Loco.)
Waterworks or
Leeman Road.
Down lines
York ( Clifton)
Loco. via W ater works or Leeman
Road.
Up lines
South Points
Skelton
Skelton
South Points
All D ow n Goods
All U p Goods
Vehicles c onv ey i ng passenger s;
such movements m ust be deal t
with in the same way as passenger
trains except that they must not
be accepted under Regulation 5
as betw een W ater w or ks a n d
Locomotive Yar d.
Brake Van.
York
Skelton
Skelton
York
All D ow n Goods
All U p Goods
Brake Van.
Clifton
Down Goods
York Yard So.
Up Goods
Clifton
Up Main
20 Freight Wagons—clear weather,
etc.
20 Freight Wagons with or without
Brake Van.
Freight W agons for Yor k Water.works Siding.
York
Down Scarborough
Goods.
20 Freight Wagons. Clear weather.
Movement must not be authorised
from Yor k Yard South i f section
is occupied.
York Yard South
Up Scarborough
Goods.
York
Up Main
Brake Vans. C l e a r w eather .
Must not be authorised by York if
section i s occupied.
Freight Wagons and to from Yor k
Waterworks Siding.
I
1
Y
- Skelton
o
C
r
l
k York Yar d South
i
Y
f
a
t
r
o York
d
n
S
o
Skelton
u
t
h
Empty Coaching Stock or Freight
Wagons w i th or w i thout Brake
Van. Al s o applies in the w r ong
direction where the latter working is authorised.
1
86
ontinued.
S E CTI O NAL AOPPENDI X
T ABL L — ( c o n t
PR OPELLIN G O F T R AI
Line N o.
From
PAGE 213.
D ELETE:—
1
Croft D epot
I NSERT:—
1
Croft D epot
To
IN SER T :—
1
PAGE 214.
AM EN D : —
1
Line.
Special Conditions.
Croft Marshalling
Yard.
Down
Freight W agons.
Croft Marshalling
Yard.
Croft D epot
Single
Freight Wagons.
Ferryhill South
Goods Yar d.
Ferryhill N or th
Goods Yar d.
Ferryhill N or th
Goods Yar d.
Ferryhill South
Goods Yar d.
Down
Ferryhill N o. 3
Ferryhill N o. 2
Ferryhill N o. 2
Ferryhill N o. I
Ferryhill N o. 1
Ferryhill N o. 3
Down Goods Nos.
1, 2 & 3.
Down Goods Nos.
I & 2.
Up Goods Nos. 1
& 2.
IDurham South
Durham N or th
tDurham N or th
•
Croft Marshalling
Yard.
DELETE:—
1
ed).
S V E H I C L E S — ( co n t i n u ed ) .
1
Single
Freight W agons.
Brake Van.
Up
Brake Van.
Durham South
Down Main
Down Platform
Up Main
Up Platform
Note (c) t o read:—
(c) A n U p Tr ain conveying Passengers not exceeding 8 vehicles
may be propelled fr om the U p
line at South Box t o the Down
Platform line when necessary to
effect a quick clearance of the Up
line i f Platform 4 is not available.
Drivers m ust br i ng thei r trains
to rest opposite the Signal Bridge
carrying Durham South Up Home
Signal.
PAGE 215.
AM EN D :—
2
Potters Gr ange
Boothferry Road
Down Main
D ELETE:—
5
A M EN D Special I s L in e C lear
Signal t o read 2 - 3 - 2.
Neptune Str eet
Manor House
Down
Manor House
Neptune Str eet
Brake Van or Stores Van.
Brake Van.
IN SER T:—
5
PAGE 216.
INSERT: —
6
7
Neptune Str eet
Alber t Dock
Alber t Dock
Dairycoates East
Deirycoates East
Dairycoates W est
tHessle Road...
tDairycoates East
Neptune Str eet
Alber t Dock
Alber t Dock
Dairycoates East
Dairycoates East
Dairycoates W est
Dairycoates East
tHessle Road...
.•
••
••
••
••
p
Albert Dock
Neptune Str eet
Dairycoates East
Albert Dock
Dairycoates W est
Dairycoates East
Dairycoates East
Hessie Road...
Albert Dock
Neptune Str eet
Dairycoates East
Albert Dock
Dairycoates W est
Dairycoates East
Hessie Road...
Dairycoates East
Up
Down
Up
Down
p
Down
Up
Down
•••
•••
•••
•••
Up
Down
p
Down
p
Down
Up
Down
Brake Van.
Freight W agons with o r w i thout
Brake Van.
Wagons, w i th or w i thout Brake
Van.
1
Freight W agons with o r w i thout
Brake Van.
Hull (Paragon)
Botanic Gardens
Down
One Coaching Stock Vehicle w i th
Brake C om par tm ent o r t w o
Coaching Stock Vehicles fi tted
with Continuous Brake, one of
which m us t contai n a Br ak e
Compartment.
Wilmington
Dansom Lane
Down Goods
Wilmington
Stoneferry Goods
Down...
15 F r ei ght W agons and Van i n
daylight and clear weather only.
15 F r ei ght W agons a n d Br ak e
van i n c l e a r w e a t h e r a n d
daylight only.
TABLE L—(continued).
c o n Gt iOnF uTeR AdIN
. S O R VEHICLES—(continued).
PR OPELLIN
Line N o.
INSERT:—
9
To
From
No. of Vehicles and
Special Conditions.
York, Bur ton Lane
Up
3 Fr ei ght W agons and Van. I n
clear weather.
INSERT ( A f t er Cannon St reet ) :
10 A i r e Junction
Gowdall
Up
PAGE 217.
INSERT:—
11
45 Freight Wagons. T r ai ns m ust
be accepted at " l i ne clear " and
facing poi nts set for Main line.
Middleton Sidings
Down
12 M o o r h o u s e South
(ER.).
Moorhouse and
South Elmsall
Up
Moorhouse South
(ER.).
Moorhouse and
South Elmsall
Down
Botanic Gardens
Anlaby Road
Anlaby Road
Hull (Paragon)
Up Goods (Anlaby
Road Loop) .
Down
Cottingham South
Hessle Road...
Selby (Canal)
Selby W est
Hessle Road...
Cottingham South
Selby W est
Selby (Canal)
p
Down
Reception
Reception
20 Freight Wagons in daylight and
clear weather only.
10 Freight Wagons in daylight and
clear w eat her o n l y w i t h o u t
Brake Van leading.
Brake Van. D ay l i ght and clear
weather. Al s o provided leading
vehicle is suitable for Guard t o
ride on.
Only applicable when the U p line
is blocked by stored Wagons and
the Down line is being wor ked
under t he instructions " Si ngl e
Lines wor ked by Pilot Guar d" .
Conditions as set out above for
Up line t o be observed.
One Coaching Stock Vehicle w i th
Brake C om par tm ent o r t w o
Coaching Stock Vehicles fi tted
with Continuous Brake, one of
which m us t contai n a Br ak e
Compartment.
One Stores Van. I n daylight and
clear weather only.
Brake Van. C l ear weather.
W ortley L.N.E.R.
Leeds " B "
Up
Leeds " B "
Geldard
Down
Geldard
W ortley
W ortley
Geldard
Down
Up
W ortley
Castieton Br idge
Sidings.
W ortley
Down
Up
Freight Wagons.
Sherburn-in-Elmet
South.
Down Goods to
Bacon Factory
Connection.
Up Main
Freight W agons f o r t h e Bacon
Factory w i th o r w i thout Brake
Van.
10 Freight Wagons. D ay l i ght.
Freight W agons i n clear weather
only. T h e propelled tr ai n must
not b e per m i tted b y D ear ne
Junction Signal B o x t o l eave
Wath Junction unti l the l i ne Is
clear a t D ear ne Juncti on i n
accordance w i th Bl ock Regulation 4.
14
DELETE:—
20
PAGE 218.
I NSERT:—
25
PAGE 219.
INSERT:—
26
DELETE:—
29
INSERT:—
29
DELETE:—
30
Earswick
Line.
Denaby
Castleton Br i dge
Sidings.
Sherburn-in-Elmet
North.
Castleford ( Gates) ... W hitwood
5 Empty Coaching Stock vehicles.
Clear weather.
Freight W agons , F i s h W agons ,
Parcels Vans and Empty Coaching
Stock. T w o Horse Boxes (conveying grooms o r attendants) .
When m or e than 15 wagons of
Goods o r 10 wagons o f Coal,
Brake Van to be heavy type.
Freight W agons. A l s o applicable
in w r ong dir ection over D ow n
Main line for 15 Freight Wagons
in clear weather. St or es Vans
may be propelled from W or tley
to Geldard over Up line.
Wath (G.C.)
Dearne Junction
Down
Copgrove
Roecliffe Siding
Boroughbridge
Boroughbridge
Down dir ection
Down dir ection
Boroughbridge
Brafferton
Down dir ection
Three Freight Wagons.
Malton W est
Maiton East
Up Main
Down Main
Brake Van.
tMalton East
W al ton W est
1
Six Freight Wagons.
88
SECTIONAL A E NDI X — c onti nue t
TABLE L—(continued).
PR OPELLIN G O F T R A IN S O R VEHICLES—(continued).
Line No.
!INSERT:—
30
DELETE:—
30
INSERT: —
30
32
DELETE:—
33
PAGE 220.
DELETE:—
36
1 NSERT:—
36
PAGE 221.
DELETE:—
40
NSERT:—
40
From
Cargo Fleet
Normanby
Normanby
Cargo Fleet
Whitehouse
Cargo Fleet
Norman by
41
43
I NSERT:—
43
PAGE 222.
DELETE:—
43
PAGE 223.
INSERT: —
49
•
1
PNSERT:—
54
A
DELETE:—
G
55
E
2
2
4
.
Line.
1
• M al ton W est
tMalton
W est
Malton East
M
tMalton East
Malton W est
a
l
t Scarborough (Station) Gasworks
oGasworks
Scarborough (Station)
n
E
Wash beck
aScarborough
(Station).
s
Gasworks
t
1
- (Station.)
t Gasworks
Scarborough
S
(Station).
c
Malton East
Scarborough Road
a
Bacon Factory
r
Sidings.
bGrosmont
Dowson Gar th
o
Sidings.
r
oCarlin H ow
Kilton Embankment
u
Kilton Embankment
gCrag Hall
h
W hitehouse...
Cargo Fleet
Cargo Fleet
DELETE:—
40
To
N
Number of Vehicles and
Special Conditions.
1
Up Main
Down Main
Van.
Van.
Up Goods
Up Main Down Main
1
Middle or Excursion
Up M ain, M i ddl e
or Excursion.
Down Main, Middle
or Excursion.
Down
Empty Coaching Stock (see Special
Instructions o n page 65 of the
Sectional Appendix) , or Freight
Wagons with or w i thout Brake
Van.
Stores Vans.
Empty Coaching Stock (see special
instructions on page 65 o f the
Sectional Appendix) , or Freight
Van, or Stores Vans.
6 Freight Wagons dur i ng daylight
and clear weather only.
Down
20 Freight Wagons.
Down
Freight Wagons.
Down
Freight Wagons.
No. 1 D ow n
Goods Indept.
No. 2 Down
Goods Indept.
Brake Van.
o
. 1
Goods
Normanby
N o .
2
Goods
Cargo Fleet N o .
2
Goods
Down
Down
• •
Down
• •
Brake Van.
Brake Van.
Saltburn
Saltburn W es t
Saltburn W est U p
Saltburn D o w n
Maw & Co.'s Siding
(Eston Bch.).
Northallerton
Cargo Fleet Inner
Up
Northallerton East
Down
20 Freight Wagons.
Northallerton
Station.
Northallerton East
Northallerton East
Down
Low Gates
Down
6 em pty Coaching Stock Vehicles
or 20 Freight Wagons.
6 em pty Coaching Stock Vehicles
or 15 Freight Wagons. I n daylight and clear weather only.
Seaton Carew
Cliff House South
Down Goods
Cliff House South
Ground Frame.
Seaton Carew
Up Goods
15 Freight Wagons. Daylight and
clear weather.
10 empty Coaching Stock Vehicles.
Daylight and clear weather.
Barnard Castle West
Stainmore
Down
P. W ay Specials.
Byers Gr een
Spennymoor
Up Single
6 em pt y F r ei ght W agons w i t h
Brake Van.
Spring Gardens
Randolph Colliery
Down
Brake Van, pr ov i di ng l i ne i s
clear to Colliery Sidings.
more t h a n 3 vehicles. S e e
instructions on page 73.
1 Passenger
Trains Wagons,
consistingetc.
of not
5 loaded Freight
S E CTI O NAL APPE DI X — c ont i nue c l
TABLE L .
PR OPELLIN G O F T R A I N S O R VEHICLES—(continued).
Line No.
INSERT: —
55
From
Line.
To
No. of vehicles and special
conditions.
Randolph Colliery
Spring Gardens
Down
10 Freight Wagons with Brake Van.
The m ovem ent fr om Randolph
Colliery m ust be br ought t o a
stand at N o. 23 D ow n Branch
Home Signal, w i th N o. 16 Trap
Points open, befor e the tr ain is
allowed for w ar d t o t he D ow n
Main line.
Spring Gardens
Randolph Colliery
Up
DELETE:—
55
Brake Van, providing line is clear
to Collier y Sidings.
Hunwick Colliery
Hunwick
Down
Freight W agons. C l ear weather .
Level crossing gates at Hunwick
to be closed against r oad traffic
before the propelling movement
is accepted and until completed.
NSERT:—
55
Hunwick Colliery
Hunwic‘ik
Up Reception
Freight W agons. C l ear weather .
Level crossing gates at Hunwick
to be closed against road traffic
before movement is accepted and
until completed.
PAGE 215.
DELETE:—
59
Saltersgate
Burn hill
Single
5 Freight Wagons with or w i thout
Brake Van.
1 NSERT:—
60
Carr House W est
Fell (C.I.C.)
Up
Fell (C.I.C.)
Carr House W est
Down
Dunston East
Dunston Exchange
Sidings.
Dunston East
Up
11 20- t on F r ei ght W agons o r
equivalent, w i t h o r w i t h o u t
Brake Van.
equivalent, w i t h o r w i t h o u t
Brake Van.
The points at Carr House W est
must be set for the Down Goods
line before the propelling movement commences.
Freight Wagons.
Down
Freight Wagons.
Blaydon Main
Up
One Passenger Br ake Van i n daylight and clear weather only.
Thrislington Colliery
Colliery
40 Freight Wagons.
40 Freight Wagons.
Freight w agons . T r a i n t o b e
brought to a stand at the Junction
Signals before the points are set
for t h e Pi tti ngton di r ecti on.
Freight wagons w i th o r w i thout
Brake van.
Brake Van.
61
Dunston Exchange
Sidings.
Blaydon
PAGE 226.
DELETE:—
63
INSERT: —
63
Ferryhill Sidings
Ferryhill N o. 2
Thrislington Colliery
Down Goods No. 1
and Colliery.
DELETE:—
65
Sherburn N or th
Broomside
Down
Broomside
Sherburn
Up
Doxford's Sidings
Pallion
Up
1NSERT:—
66
Jobling's Sidings
Pall ion
Up
Brake Van.
PAGE 227.
I NSERT:—
69
Louisa Colliery
Oxhill S.B.
Up
25 Freight Wagons. D ayl i ght and
clear weather.
DELETE:—
69
Lousia Colliery
Annfield Plain
Mineral Yar d.
Louisa Colliery
Down
Louisa Colliery
Down
66
Annfield Plain
Mineral Yar d.
INSERT: —
69
Annfield Plain
Mineral Yar d.
Up
1
clear weather.
clear weather only.
SECTIONAL P
• IX
TA L . — ( co n t i n u ed ) .
c
o
n
t
i
d S. O R VEHICLES—(continued).
PR OPELLIN G O Fn TuR e
A IN
From
Line N o.
DELETE:—
69
INSERT:—
69
71
PAGE 228.
INSERT:—
78
DELETE:—
80
PAGE 229.
INSERT:—
87
To
Line.
Special Conditions.
South Pelaw
Stella Gill Haus
Stella Gill Flats
South Pelaw
Up
Down
South Pelaw
Stella Gill Fl ats
1
S
o
Heaton South
u
t
h
S
h
i Earsdon
e
l
d
Hexham ( Bor der
s Counties).
Stella Gill Haus
South Pelaw
Garden Lane
All U p
All Down
Up
Heaton East...
Down
clear weather. M axim um speed
10 m.p.h. Poi nts at Heaton East
Signal Box t o b e s et f or t h e
Sidings before permission Is given
for the propelling movement to
commence.
Blue Bell
Up
3 Fr eight W agons w i thout Br ake
Van for Co-operative Sidings.
Acomb Collier y
Single
Freight Trains for Acomb Colliery.
Freight wagons w i th o r w i thout
brake van.
1
Heigh wagons w i t h o r w i t hout
brake van.
Empty C oachi ng St oc k o r t e n
Freight Wagons with or without
Brake Van. C l ear weather.
PAGE 229.
Propelling of Guard's B rake Vans.
DELETE " Br i er l ey" from list of tunnels thr ough which Brake Vans must not be propelled.
PR OPELLIN G O F B A LLA ST T R A IN S. R u l es 149 ( vil) and 175.
The pr opelling of Ballast Trains is pr ohibited at the places shown i n the following list:—
Line No.
INSERT:—
From dir ection of
Signal Box.
Bowes.
Stainmore.
Merrygill.
Belah.
Stainmore,
Lartington W est
Bowes
Kirkby Stephen East
Merrygill
Belah
49
TABLE L .
PR OPELLIN G O F BALLAST T R A IN S.
Line No.
PAGE 230.
DELETE:—
From
41
73
To
Cargo Fleet
Lockhaugh
Cargo Fleet Inner .
Rowlands Gill.
TABLE M .
W OR K IN G O F VEH IC L ES W I T H O U T BRAKE V A N I N REAR.
Line No.
PAGE 231.
INSERT:—
1
From
To
Line.
Special Conditions.
After t h e m ovem ent has passed
clear of No. 20 tr ap points, they
must immediately be restored to
normal position.
Selby South
Selby Canal
No. 2 Down Goods
Selby South
Selby Canal
No. 2 U p Goods
91
TABLE M—(continued).
W OR K IN G O F VEH IC L ES W I T H O U T BRAKE V A N I N REAR—(continued).
Line No.
PAGE 231.
A M EN D : —
1
DELETE:—
1
1
DELETE:—
1
• IN SER T : —
1
PAGE 232.
DELETE:—
1
INSERT:—
1
2
PAGE 233
DELETE:—
5
NSERT:—
5
PAGE 234.
DELETE:—
20
To
From
Selby South
Barlby N or th
Barlby N or th
Selby South
DELETE:—
30
Down Main
Down Passenger
Independent.
Up Main
Up• Hull
York Leeman Road... York Yard South
Leeman Road
York Yard South
Special Conditions.
1
6 w agons conveyi ng R oad Rail
Tanks.
Up Goods
Down Goods
York
York Yard South
York Yard South
York
York Skelton
South Points
South Points
Skelton
Skelton
York
Up Main, Platforms
and U p G o o d s
York
Skelton
Down M ai n, Pl atforms and D ow n
Goods.
Darlington South
Croft Spa
Croft Spa
Darlington South
Down
Ferryhill N o. 3
Sidings
Ferryhill N o. 1
Sidings
Sidings
Ferryhill N o. 3
Sidings
Ferryhill N o. 1
Down Goods
Up Goods
Up Goods
Down Goods
Ferryhill N o. 3
Ferryhill N o. 2
Ferryhill
Ferryhill
Ferryhill
Ferryhill
Ferryhill N o.
Ferryhill N o.
Ferryhill N o.
Ferryhill N o.
Up Scarborough
Goods
Down Scarborough
Goods.
Up Main, Platforms
and U p Goods .
Down Main, Platforms
and Down Goods.
One fully fitted Horse Box or fully
fitted C attl e W agon.
Newcastle N o. 1
Manors
Manors
Newcastle N o. 1
Boothferry Road
Potters Gr ange
Potters Gr ange
Boothferry Road
Down Goods Nos. 1,
2 & 3.
Up Goods N o. 1
Up Goods N o. 2
Up Goods N o. 1
Down Goods N os.
1& 2
Down Main
Down Tynemouth
Up Main
Up Tynemouth
Up
Down
Manor House
Neptune Str eet
Hessle Road...
Dairycoates East
Neptune Str eet
Manor House
Dairycoates East
Hessie Road...
Up
Down
Up
Down
Dairycoates East
Hessle Road...
Hessle Road...
Dairycoates East
Up
Down
W ortley L.M.S.
W ortley L.N.E.R.
Down
Wortley L.N.E.R.
Geldard
W ortley L.M.S.
Castleton Br i dge
Sidings.
Geldard
Up
Down
Leeds (Cen.)
Up
Geldard o r Ar m ley
Sidings.
Down
Starbeck N or th
Stonefall
Stonefall
Starbeck N or th
Up
Down
30 W agons , e t c . S u b s t i t u t e
"Stonefall Si di ngs" f o r " St onefall".
York (Leeman Road)
Foss Islands
Down
10 Fish W agons, etc.
N o.
N o.
N o.
N o.
2
1
1
2
Castleton Br i dge
Sidings.
Geldard o r Ar m ley
Sidings.
Leeds (Cen.)
A M EN D : —
20
Line.
3
3
2
1
Up
One Fi tted Hor se Box or Special
Cattle W agon.
One Fi tted Hor se Box or Special
Cattle W agon.
2 F i tted F i sh W agons. C l e a r
weather.
1 F i tted Vehicle. C l ear weather .
1
4 Fitted Vehicles.
92
TABLE M—(continued).
W OR K IN G O F VEH IC L ES W I T H O U T BRAKE V A N I N REAR—(continued).
Line No.
PAGE 235.
INSERT:—
30
DELETE:—
40
INSERT:—
40
PAGE 236.
DELETE:—
41
INSERT:—
41
DELETE:—
43
I NSERT:—
43
PAGE 238.
INSERT:—
58
DELETE:—
59
I NSERT:—
60
PAGE 239.
DELETE:—
63
I NSERT:—
63
64
DELETE:—
64
I NSERT
64
DELETE:—
65
I NSERT:—
65
66
From
To
Line
Number of Vehicles and
Special Conditions.
Maiton East
Malton W est
Up Goods
Bowesfield
Bowesfield
Thornaby East
Gr angetown_
Grangetown...
Bowesfield
Down Main
All D ow n Goods
Indepts.
All U p Goods
Indepts.
Bowesfield
Gr angetown_
All Down Goods except Down Beam
Mill line (Grangetown).
Gr angetown_
Bowesfield
All Up Goods except
Up Beam Mill line
(Grangetown)
Cargo Fleet ( Inner )
Cargo Fleet
Cargo Fleet ( Inner )
Cargo Fleet
Cargo Fleet (Inner)
Maw & Co.' s Siding
Up
Down
Down
Cargo Fleet Inner
Ground Frame.
Cargo Fleet
Cargo Fleet
Up
Cargo Fleet Inner
Ground Frame.
Down
Stockton (Hartburn)
Bowesfield
Down Main
Norton-on-Tees
West.
Norton-on-Tees
East.
Down
Dearness Valley
Baxter W ood N o. 2
Down
Burnhill
Saltersgate
Up
5 Wagons.
Carr House W est
Fell (C.I.C.).
Up
Fell (C.I.C.)
Carr House W est D o w n
equivalent. N o . 15 poi nts an
No. 17 crossover points at Carr
House West must not be restored
to the normal position unti l the
Train has cleared No. 21 connection to the C.I.C. line and No. 21
connection has been restored to
the normal position.
equivalent.
Wingate
Wingate Colliery
Wingate Colliery
Wingate
Down
Up
Wingate
Wingate Colliery
Ryhope Colliery
Wheatley Hill or
Thornley Colliery
Wingate Colliery
Wingate
Ryhope
Thorn ley
Up
Down
Down
Up
Ryhope Colliery
Pess pool
Haswell
Wheatley Hill or
Thornley Colliery.
Ryhope
Haswell
Pesspool
Thornley
Up
Up
Down
Down
Pesspool
Haswell
Haswell
Pesspool
Down
Up
Murton
Sherburn N or th
Hetton
D o w n
Broomside D o w n
Murton
Ford W or ks
Hylton
Hetton
Hylton
Ford W or ks
Up
Up
Down
Clear weather.
10 Wagons.
10 Empty Wagons. Speed not t o
exceed 10 m.p.h.
10 Wagons.
25 Wagons.
10 Wagons In clear weather .
1 1 0 Wagons, clear weather.
93
SECTIONAL APPErstaX—continued.
TABLE M—(continued)•
W O R K I N G O F VEH IC L ES W I T H O U T BRAKE V A N I N REAR—(continued).
From
To
Line.
Pontop Crossing . . .
Pontop Crossing . . .
Penshaw N or th . . .
Penshaw Station . . .
Green Lane . . .
Green Lane . . .
Penshaw Station . . .
Penshaw N or th . . .
Down M ain . . .
Down Goods . . .
Goods lines
Goods lines . . .
Belmont . . .
. . .
Durham Goods . . .
Down . . .
Belmont . . .
. . .
Durham Goods . . .
Up . . .
Jarrow, East End.
Light Railway.
Down . . .
Manors N or th . . .
Down
Manors . . .
Up
Manors . . .
Line N o.
PAGE 240.
INSERT: —
69
70
D EL ET E:
70
IN SER T:—
70
71
PAGE 241.
DELETE:—
78
IN SER T :
78
-
D EL ET E:
81
-
INSERT:—
81
Jarrow
.
.
Manors . . .
.
. . .
. . .
Newsham N or th
New Blyth . . . .
Newsham N or th
Old Bl yth . . . .
. . .
. . . New Blyth . . . .
. . Newsham N or th
. . . Old Bl yth . . . .
. . Newsham N or th
Newsham N or th . . .
Links Road ... . . .
Blyth Station . . .
. .
...
. .
...
Links Road ... . . .
Blyth Station . . .
.
No. of Vehicles and Special
Condition.
.
.
.
Down
. . .
12 wagons. D a y l i g h t and clear
weather.
.
12 wagons. D a y l i g h t and clear
weather.
- -
.
. . .
.
.
.
. . .
.
.
.
Fitted em pty Coaching Stock.
Fitted empty Coaching Stock. O n
fitted H or s e B o x o r speci a
Cattle W agon.
Fitted em pty Coaching Stock. One
fitted H or s e B o x o r speci a
Cattle W agon.
Down . . . . . .
Up . . .
. . .
Down
. . .
Up . . . . . . . . .
Down . . .
Up . . . . . .
Down . . .
Up . . . . . .
- -
. . .
—
. . .
. . .
TABLE N .
TROLLEYS G O I N G I N T O O R T H R O U G H T U N N EL S.
Tunnel.
Line N o.
PAGE 242.
A M EN D : —
26
A M EN D : —
36
DELETE:—
36
I NSERT:—
36
78
DELETE:—
83
Length.
Between
Miles.
Yards.
Brotherton
Burton Salmon and Ferrybridge
104
Gallows Close
Scarborough and Scalby
260
Ravenscar
Ravenscar and Fyling Hall
279
Ravenscar
Byker
Ravenscar and Robin Hood' s Bay
Byker and St. Peters
279
140
Edlingham
Whittingham and EdlIngham
351
TABLE O .
B R EA K D OW N V A N T R A IN S.
Place
PAGE 242.
DELETE:—
Ardsley ( Souther n Ar ea) ...
Cudworth
IN SER T :
-Leeds, Holbeck (L.M, Oper ating
Area).
D EL ET E:
Neville Hill
-Leeds,
IN SER T: - Leeds, Neville Hill
Type of Crane.
Capacity of Crane.
Tons.
Steam
Hand
15
Steam
40
Hand
1
0
Remarks.
Breakdown Vans only.
94
TABLE O .
B R EA K D OW N V A N T R A IN S.
Section of Line.
PAGE 243.
DELETE:—
Alnwick and Coldstream Branch
1NSERT:—
Coldstream and W ool er Branch
A M EN D : —
Tweedmouth t o Longhoughton inclusive
to read
Tweed mouth t o M or peth exclusive.
I NSERT:—
Amble Branch
Alnwick Branch
PAGE 244.
A M EN D : —
Manors East to Longhoughton, exclusive and Alnwick
to read
Manors East t o M or peth inclusive.
DELETE:—
Amble Branch
A M EN D : —
Newcastle t o Scotby inclusive
to read
Newcastle t o Haydon Bridge inclusive.
INSERT:—
Scotby t o Haydon Br idge exclusive
DELETE:—
Hexham and Allendale Branch
INSERT:—
Riccarton exclusive t o Bellingham inclusive...
Tool Vans and Breakdown Appliances under jurisdiction of
Breakdown Vans and
Loco. Shed Master,
Breakdown Vans and
Loco. Shed Master,
Steam Cr ane:—
Tweed mouth.
Steam Cr ane:—
Tweedmouth.
Breakdown Vans and Steam Crane:—
Loco. Shed Master, Tweedmouth.
Breakdown Vans and Steam Crane: —
Loco. Shed Master, Gateshead.
Breakdown Vans and Steam Crane: -Loco. Shed Master, Gateshead.
Breakdown Vans:—
Loco. Shed Master, Carlisle (Canal) (Sc.).
Steam Cr ane (as r equir ed) :—
Loco. Shed Master, Carlisle (Kingmoor) (Sc.).
Breakdown Vans and H and Cranes:—
Loco. Shed Master, Hawick.
If Steam Crane required application t o be made to St. Margaret's.
A M E N D last paragraph of NOTES t o read as folio ws:—
I
the Engine and t he Steam Cr ane and t he Engine m ust be o f
type -per m itted i n the r oute availability.
DELETE:—
Murton
A to Durham Elvet.
Broomside
to Sherburn North
B
INSERT:—
r
Murton to Sherburn Nor th
A M EN
e D:—
BellyaMill exclusive to Thirsk inclusive
Breakdown Vans and Steam Cr ane:—
to read
Loco. Shed Master, Darlington.
k
Relly Mill exclusive t o Nor thaller ton Inclusive
d
Loco. Shed Master, Darlington
DELETE:—
o
Trlorthallerton and Hawes
INSERT:—
w
Northallerton
t o Garsdale exclusive
n
V 245.
PAGE
DELETE:—
a
1n
a derailment i n Hawes Station.
-m 245.
PAGE
DELETE:—
A
u
Merrybent
p
s 246.Branch
PAGE
p
A M EN
t D:—
l"Gilling
to Pickering inclusive" t o read " Gi l l i n
b
A M EN D : —
i
e
York t o Thirsk exclusive
ep read
to
Yorksl and Nor thaller ton exclusive.
ta
I NSERT:—
oc
Shaftholme
Junction and Knotti ngl ey exclusive
ae
Ferrybridge
and Knotti ngl ey exclusive
ld
DELETE:—
lb
:Bur T
ton
e Salmon and M oor thor pe N or th inclusive
Applies t o all Trains except those of the L.M.
arert concerned.
aw
ie
ne
sn
e
x
c
.S. Company to whom application should be made i n the event of
g and Kirbymoorside Inclusive".
Breakdown Vans and Steam Crane:- Loco. Shed Master, Yor k.
Breakdown Vans and Steam C r ane:- Loco. Shed Master, Yor k.
Loco. Shed Master, Doncaster.
Breakdown Vans and Steam Crane:--Loco. Shed Master, Yor k.
S. Co. w ho will cover the Joint lines so far as thei r ow n Trains
95
TABLE 0—( cont inued) .
B R EA K D OW N V A N TRAINS—(continued).
Section of Line.
Tool Vans and Breakdown Applicanes under jurisdiction of
IN SER T :
-Burton Salmon and Pontefract inclusive
Pontefract exclusive and Dear ne Junction inclusive
A M EN D :
-Pi!moor t o Knaresborough exclusive
to read
Brafferton and Knaresborough Goods
A M E N D entr y commencing W ellington Str eet and
Hunslet Goods Yar d
Headingley ( Car digan R oad D o w n D i s tant) t o
Harrogate exclusive (via Ar thington) .
Ar thington t o Otl ey exclusive...
Leeds t o Crimple Junction ( Vi a W ether by)
W etherby t o Church Fenton exclusive
Cross Gates t o South M ilfor d inclusive
Garforth t o Castleford exclusive
Micklefield t o Church Fenton exclusive
A M EN D :
- "Ilkley Br anch" t o r ead:—
"Ar thi ngton t o Otl ey exclusive".
D EL ET E:
Starbeck
t o Pannal exclusive
Seamer t o Pickering exclusive
IN SER T :
-Pickering M ill Lane and T hor nton Dale
PAGE 247.
DELETE:—
*W rangbrook t o Moorhouse exclusive
ttKir ksm eaton exclusive t o Stair foot
Loco. Shed Master, Yor k.
Loco. Shed Master, Mexborough.
York.
York.
Hunslet Goods Yar d t o r ead:—
Breakdown Vans onl y:—
Loco. Shed Master, Leeds, Neville Hill.
When Crane is required Leeds (Holbeck) (L.M.) Steam Crane to
cover sections of line Headingley (Cardigan Road Down Distant)
to Crimple Junction (exclusive), via Ar thington, Ar thi ngton to
Otley, and Leeds t o W ether by (exclusive). O f not available,
York Steam C r ane t o be requested.) R em ai nder o f Leeds
(Neville Hill) (14.E.) Breakdown Van area covered by York (N.E.)
Steam Crane when r equir ed.
Breakdown Vans onl y:—
Loco. Shed Master, Malton.
Breakdown Vans and Hand Cr ane:—
Loco. Shed Master, Cudwor th.
Notes:—
* W hen Steam Crane required, apply to District Locomotive Superintendent, Doncaster (Southern Area).
t W hen Steam Crane required, apply to District Locomotive Superintendent, Doncaster (Southern Area), or Locomotive D epot Superintendent, Mexborough (Southern Area) as may be most convenient.
t For derailments in Hemsworth Sidings apply to Leeds (Southern Area) Contr ol for attendance of Ardsley Breakdown Vans.
Denaby and W r angbr ook exclusive
Moorthorpe N or th exclusive and Dearne Jct.
Moorthorpe Station and South Ki r kby
Dearne Junction and W ath Junction...
Dearne Junction and M exbor ough W est
IN SER T:—
*W rangbrook t o Moorhouse exclusive
1.• tKirksmeaton exclusive t o Stair foot exclusive
Locomotive D epot Superintendent,
Mexborough (Southern Ar ea) .
Cudworth Br eakdown Van and H and C r ane t o deal w i th any
mishap betw een Pi ckbur n & Br odsw or th and W r angbr ook
during the time Denaby Signal Box is closed.
Breakdown Vans only, Royston (L.M. Oper ating Area).
Application t o be m ade t o D i str i ct Oper ating Superintendent,
London Midland Oper ating Ar ea, Rotherham.
Notes:—
* W hen Steam Crane required, apply to District Motive Power Superintendent, Doncaster (ER.).
t W hen Steam Crane required, apply to District Motive Power Superintendent, Doncaster (ER.), or Shed Master,
Mexborough ( ER.) , as may be m ost convenient.
t F or derailments i n Hemsworth Sidings, apply t o Leeds (Eastern Oper ati ng Ar ea) C ontr ol f or attendance o f
Ardsley Vans.
1
4
Station and South Ki r kby
DMoorthorpe
Shed Master, Mexborough (E.R.).
Dearne Junction and W ath Junction
e Dearne Junction and Mexborough W est
n
aN o t es:
b* Royston (L.M. Oper ating Area) Breakdown Vans t o deal w i th any mishap between Plckburn, Br odswor th and
y
Wrangbrook dur ing the time Denaby Signal Box is closed. Appl i cati on t o be made t o the District Operating
a
Superintendent, L.M . Oper ating Ar ea, Rotherham.
n
d
W
r
a
n
g
) 96
SECTIONAL AP rE N — c o n ti n u e d .
PAGE 248.
INSERT:—
TA
SPEEDS O F B R EA K D OW N C R A N ES.
The following are the maximum permissible speeds f or Breakdown Cranes thr oughout British Railways:—
Maximum Speed. R e m a r k s .
Capacity of Crane.
m . p . h .
.20 tons and under
2
5
21- 29 tons
3
0
30- 50 tons
4
5
T o
appl y w hether fi tted o r n o t fi tted w i t h w ei ght
relieving bogies. A Crane having an articulated jib, ano'
suitable in other respects may r un at 60 m.p.h.
The above speeds are of general application, except in respect of individual Cranes to which more stringent regulations
may be applied as considered necessary by the Region to which such Cranes are allocated for operating.
The following table gives details of Breakdown Cranes allocated to the N or th Eastern Motive Power Area together
with the per m itted speeds t o conform t o the above instructions:—
Crane N o.
Location.
Maximum Permissible Speed.
901630
Tweed mouth.
154
Gateshead.
45 m.p.h.
156
Darlington.
151
York.
152
Sunderland.
153
Middlesbrough.
30 m.p.h.
157
Hull.
155
West Hartlepool.
901634
Tyne Dock.
25 m.p.h.
901636
Percy Main
901642
W hitby.
TABLE O .
S N O W PL OU GH S.
PAGE 248.
Referring t o page 89 of the General Appendix.
Independent U nit s.
Except as shown i n the following paragraph, the position of engines employed w i th Snow Ploughs must be tender
to tender with a Snow Plough at the chimney end of each engine. A Guard must in all cases accompany the Snow Plough.
When Snow Ploughs are worked from one centre to another, the following arrangements must be adopted:—
One engine
to be used and marshalled between the Ploughs, except when only one Plough has to be conveyed, when
It should
be hauled.
Speed not t o exceed 25 m.p.h.
Guard t o travel i n r ear plough.
Snow Ploughs m ust be signalled as shown below:—
When pr oceeding t o clear the line
A
s
Express Passenger Train ( 4 consecutively).
When r etur ni ng to Home Station after ploughing A s
Or dinar y Passenger Train (3-1).
When proceeding to or from Shops or being transferred
from one point to another for distribution purposes A s Class " J " Goods (4-1).
The Shunt T r ai n for F ol l ow i ng T r ai n t o Pass Signal (1-5-5) may be given whenever the sections in advance ar e
occupied by trains which the Snow Plough tr ai n m ust pass t o reach the site of blockage.
List of Motive Power Depots wher e independent Snow Ploughs ar e located:—
No. of
No. of
Ploughs L o c a t e d at
Located at .
Ploughs
2 Y o r k
2
Blackh ill
2
Gateshead
2 D ar l i ngton
2 Alnm outh
1
Tyne Dock
1T w eedm outh
1
Alston
1
2 K i r k b y Stephen
Percy Main
2 W e s t Auckland
Two independent Snow Ploughs ar e also located at Blackhill.
INSERT:—
Light St eel Buffer B eam Ploughs.
In addition, Li ght Steel Buffer Beam Ploughs for fitting to the Buffer Beams of selected locomotives are available at
the following Depots:—
Located at
No. of
Class o f
For use on Single
or Double Lines
Loco
Ploughs
York
1
Double
J.27
2
Darlington
Universal
2MT
1
Universal
Darlington
3 M T BR
Tweed mouth
1
Double
J.39
2
Hull Dairycoates
Double
J.39
Malton
1
Double
J.25
2
W hitby
J.25
Single
2
Middlesborough
Double
J.26
1
Newport
J.26
Single
2
Universal
2MT
Kirkby Stephen
West Auckland
2
Universal
3MT BR
Consett
1
Double
Q.6
Sunderland
2
Double
J.27
1
Blaydon
J.21
Single
1
Blyth
J.21
Single
Hexham
1
J.21
Single
97
SECTIONAL APPEND —
c onti nue d.
These Ploughs will only be fitted, dur ing the W inter season and the Motive Power Superintendent will be responsible
for thei r fitting to the locomotives when snow is imminent.
When fi tted, the Ploughs do not inter fer e with the normal wor king of the locomotive. C ar e must, however, be
taken w hen coupling the engine end of the locomotive, so fitted, to vehicles, and also when approaching buffer stops,
as the Ploughs extend slightly beyond the buffers at rail level.
Stripe wagons and bogie vehicles of any type must not be marshalled nex t to an engine fitted w i th the Light Steel
Snow Ploughs when being worked tender first.
Clearance o f Snow Ploughs above rail level.
Except as shown below for the section Loftus to W hitby, with all types of Snow Ploughs the clearance above rail level
In the four foot should never be less than 4 in. when wear is at its maximum and working under heavy load of snow, and
the dimension outside the rails should never be less than 6 In. above rail level.
The width in the four foot may be taken as 5 ft. 2 In., i.e., the distance between the outside edges of the rails.
When wor king between Loftus and W hi tby inclusive, all Ploughs may be at 4 in. above rail for a width of 4 ft. 10 In.
and outside the four foot the clearance must be 8 i n. above rail level.
Restrictions.
Tyne D ock, H art o n , Bridge N o .
When travelling from Tyne Dock, Bank Top to Up Sunderland line at Harton Junction via the Down Pontop line, t he
independent uni t Snow Ploughs must be stopped shor t of Bridge N o. 11, cross thr ough N o. 14 points and back on t o
the Up Pontop line. Gr eat care must be excerised in these movements and the speed must not exceed 2 m.p.h.
TABLE P
PU SH A N D P U L L T R A IN S.
Line N o.
PAGE 249.
INSERT:—
1, 49 and 50
1, 4 and 2
14
9
15
DELETE:—
20
INSERT:—
20
DELETE:—
20 and 22
INSERT:—
20 and 24
DELETE:—
20, 28 and 29
INSERT:—
20 and 28
A M EN D t o read:—
30
33
DELETE:—
34
INSERT:—
38
39
INSERT:—
40
45, 1 and 54
66
DELETE:—
74
I NSERT
74
A M EN D : —
• 81
No. o f Vehicles fitted for "Push and Pul l "
working which may be propelled with
the contr ols i n use.
Secton of Line.
Darlington and Middleton-in-Teesdale
Selby and Gool e
Staddlethorpe and Selby
Beverley and M ar ket W ei ghton...
Selby and M ar ket W ei ghton
2
3
2
2
2
Ar thington and Harrogate
2
Headingley and Harrogate (Leeds Central Trains)
2
Harrogate and Pateley Bridge
2
Harrogate and Thir sk
2
Harrogate and Pilmoor
3
Harrogate and Knaresborough
3
Maiton and Rillington
Rillington and Pickering
3
3
Pickering and Pilm oor
2
Battersby and N unthor pe
Picton and Battersby
Stockton and Picton
2
2
2
Middlesbrough and Redcar
Stockton, Ferryhill and Spennymoor
Sunderland and H yl ton
2
2
3
Scotswood and N or th W ylam
3
Scotswood and W est Wylam Junction...
3
Blyth and Monkseaton via Avenue Branch o r
Backworth.
Newsham and Newbiggin
3
3
TABLE R .
EN GIN EER 'S VEL OC IPED E C A R S.
Line N o.
PAGE 250.
DELETE:—
INSERT:—
Section o f Line.
20
29
Leeds ( W or tl ey L.N.E.R.)—Nidd Bridge.
Knaresborough Goods—Pilmoor.
29
Knaresborough Goods—Brafferton.
SECTIONAL A P P E I 6 X
T ABLE R —( conti nued) .
continued.
Line N o.
DELETE:—
INSERT:—
DELETE:—
INSERT:—
DELETE:—
INSERT:—
DELETE:—
Section o f Line.
34
Pickering (Mill Lane)—Pilmoor.
34
Kirbymoorside—Pilmoor.
35
49
72
Pickering (Mill Lane)—Seamer W est.
Merrybent Branch.
Bardon Mill—Scotby.
72
Bardon Mill—W etheral,
83
Alnwick—Coldstream.
83A
Coldstream—Wooler.
84
Tweedmouth Nor th—Kelso.
84
Tweedmouth North—Carharn.
INSERT:—
TABLE S .
SPECIAL C OD ES O F E N G I N E H EA D L A M PS O R D ISC S.
FREIGHT T R A IN S B ET W EEN T H O R N A B Y A N D C A R L IN H O W .
PAGE 252.
A M E N D the destinations of trains shown in CLAUSE 1 t o read:—
East of Grangetown, Grangetown Or e Sidings, Lackenby Steelworks, Guisborough Branch. No. 1 U p Goods Yard.
(Note.—The special head lamps to be carried remains as shown.)
TABLE W .
A T T A C H IN G VEH IC L ES B E H I N D T H E R EA R B R A K E V A N O F PA SSEN GER T R A I N S.
Line N o.
Section o f Line.
No. o f Vehicles w hi c h m ay b e
attached behi nd Rear Brake Van
in which Guard rides.
PAGE 253.
INSERT:—
5
10
DELETE:—
10
INSERT:—
10
DELETE:—
20
INSERT:—
20
PAGE 254.
DELETE:—
22
32
PAGE 254.
DELETE:—
35
42
INSERT: —
42
Springbank N or th t o Al ber t D ock
Alber t D ock t o Springbank N or th
Hull t o Springbank N or th
Springbank N or th t o Hull
6t
of
6t
6t
Hull t o C udw or th L.M.S....
Cudworth L.M.S. t o Hull...
Springbank N or th t o C udw or th (L.M.R.)
Cudworth (L.M.R.) t o Springbank N or th
Between Pannal and Starbeck
From N i dd Bridge t o Harrogate
4*
From Bi l ton t o Harrogate
2t (B)
Harrogate t o Pateley Bridge
Pateley Br idge t o Ripley Valley...
Ripley Valley t o Harrogate
Maiton t o Burdale
Burdale t o Driffield
Driffield t o Sledmere and Fimber
Sledmere and Fimber t o Burdale
Burdale t o Wharram
Wharram t o MaIton
4
4
From Seamer t o Forge Valley
From Forge Valley t o Pickering...
From Pickering t o Forge Valley
From Forge Valley t o Seamer
Between N or thal l er ton and Bedale
Between Bedale and Hawes
4
From Nor thaller ton t o Bedale
From Bedale t o Garsdale...
From Garsdale t o Hawes...
From Hawes t o Nor thaller ton
(B)
2t
4*
4*
2t
it
4*
4t
4
4*
4t
4*
4t
TABLE W —(continued).
A T T A C H IN G VEH IC L ES B E H I N D T H E R EA R B R A K E V A N O F PA SSEN GER T R A IN S.
Line N o.
DELETE:—
49
INSERT:—
49
PAGE 255.
DELETE:—
57
60
INSERT:—
60
DELETE:—
61
INSERT:—
61
DELETE:—
65
INSERT:—
65
DELETE:—
72
INSERT:—
72
DELETE:—
73
No. o f Vehicles which may be
attached behind Rear Brake Van
in which Guar d rides.
Secton o f Line.
Piercebridge t o Ki r kby Stephen...
Piercebridge t o Barnard Castle
Barnard Castle t o Ki r kby Stephen
(a) This number may be increased to three
(when assistant engine is attached i n r ear )
Kirkby Stephen t o Stainm or e o r Bar nar d
Castle t o Stainmore.
From Durham t o Waterhouses
From VVaterhouses t o Durham
From Bi r tley t o Blackhill...
From Blackhill t o Annfield Plain
From Annfield Plain t o Bir tley
4*
2
4*
2
From Bi r tley ( Ouston) t o Blackhill
From Blackhill t o Annfield Plain
From Annfield Plain t o Bi r tley (Ouston)
2t
21
4*
-
From Newcastle t o Dunston
From Dunstan t o Newcastle
i t (3)
it
It (
i6t
)
20t
From Newcastle t o Dunston ( Nor wood)
From Dunston ( Nor wood) t o Newcastle
Blaydon Main to Low Fell Station. (Applies only
to Class " C " Freight and Class " C " Parcels
Trains for the South.)
4*
4
t4*
Murton to Durham Elvet
Durham Elvet to Hetton
Murton to Hetton
From Newcastle t o Carlisle
From Carlisle t o Newcastle
3
1
*3
From Blaydon t o Carlisle...
From Carlisle t o Newcastle
DELETE:—
75
Between Hexham and Allendale...
t
2t
3
f
2t
3
ti t
PAGE 256.
DELETE:—
83
INSERT:—
83A
Between Al nw i ck and Coldstream
it
Between Coldstream and W ooler
i
t
INSERT:—
73
From Newcastle t o Consett
From Consett t o Newcastle
••••
From Blaydon South t o Consett
From Consett t o Newcastle
TABLE X .
ELECTRIC B ELLS A N D I N D I C A T O R S A T S T A T I O N S F O R ST A R T IN G O F T R A IN S.
PAGE 256.
DELETE:—
1
40
43
62
INSERT:—
62
Platforms.
Station.
Line N o.
Darlington
Middlesbrough
West Har tlepool
Up and D ow n Main.
Up and D ow n.
Up and D ow n.
Gateshead East
Up and Down.
Gateshead East
Gateshead East
Up.
Down (see page 93 of Sectional Appendix).
BEM ROSE. DERBY

No.! SUPPLEMENT GENERAL NORTH EASTERN

Transcription

Similar documents

Italian Train Crash - LiveWell with Optum

South West Trains

Earn Air Miles @ ND Graphics!

Kids Trail - Train World

Aston Kaanapali Shores page1.psd

Raw Music Upfront

OUR NEW EXPRESS FREIGHT SERVICE

alternative routes

Fun with Trains Do you like trains? I love trains. Trains can take

Hit the road this summer!